MRA4

HighPROTEC

Feeder Protection

Device Manual DOK-HB-MRA4E

MRA4 Functional Overview

MRA4

74 50 Measured and
79 46 49 Inrush 50P 51P 67P 67N
TC BF calculated values

V, VE, V012, I, IG, f,

delta phi, theta , IH2,
IGH2, I012, P, Q, S,
3
37 SOTF CLPU PF, cos phi, W

1 Fault recorder
32 47 60L 55

4 Event recorder

60 81 Disturbance
27 59 59N 81R 50N 51N 78
FL U/O recorder

option standard

Page 2 EN MRA4 04/09

Order Code

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 3

 COMMENTS ON THE MANUAL....................................................................................................................11
Information Concerning Liability and Warranty ..............................................................................................11
IMPORTANT DEFINITIONS............................................................................................................12
Scope of Delivery ..........................................................................................................................................16
Storage..........................................................................................................................................................16
Important Information ....................................................................................................................................16
Symbols.........................................................................................................................................................17
DEVICE...............................................................................................................................................21
Device Planning.............................................................................................................................................21
Device Planning Parameters of the Device....................................................................................................22
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION ...............................................................................................................23
Three-Side-View............................................................................................................................................23
Installation Diagram.......................................................................................................................................24
Assembly Groups...........................................................................................................................................25
Grounding .....................................................................................................................................26
Power Supply and Digital Inputs.....................................................................................................................27
Binary Output Relays ....................................................................................................................................29
Digital Inputs..................................................................................................................................................31
Voltage Measuring Inputs ..............................................................................................................................33
Current Measuring Inputs and Ground Current Measuring Input...................................................................35
System (SC)..................................................................................................................................................37
Communication Interfaces ............................................................................................................................38
Modbus® RTU / IEC 60870-5-103 via Terminals..................................................................................38
Modbus® RTU / IEC 60870-5-103 via D-SUB-plug...............................................................................40
PC Interface...................................................................................................................................................41
Assignment of the Zero Modem Cable.................................................................................................42
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS (CT)...............................................................................................................43
Current Transformer Connection Examples...................................................................................................43
VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS.......................................................................................................................49
Check of the Voltage Measuring Values.........................................................................................................49
Wiring Examples of the Voltage Transformers...............................................................................................50
CONNECTION EXAMPLES VOLTAGE AND CURRENT TRANSFORMERS....................................................................56
NAVIGATION - OPERATION ......................................................................................................................59
Basic Menu Control .......................................................................................................................................64
Smart view Keyboard Commands..................................................................................................................65
SMART VIEW.......................................................................................................................................66
Installation of Smart View...............................................................................................................................66
Uninstalling Smart view..................................................................................................................................67
Switching the Language of the Graphical User Interface...............................................................................67
Setting up the Connection PC - Device..........................................................................................................68
Set-up a Connection via Ethernet - TCP/IP.............................................................................................68
Set-up a Connection via Serial Interface under Windows 2000................................................................69
Set up a Connection via Serial Interface under Windows XP....................................................................71
Set up a Connection via Serial Interface under Windows Vista.................................................................72
Connected to the Device and Calling up Websites at the same Time.........................................................74
Establishing the Connection via a USB-/RS232-Adapter..........................................................................74
Smart view Troubleshooting................................................................................................................75
Smart view persistent connection problems............................................................................................77
Loading of Device Data when using Smart view ...........................................................................................77
Restoring of Device Data when using Smart view..........................................................................................78
Backup and Documentation when using Smart view.....................................................................................79
Printing of Device Data When using Smart view (Setting List).....................................................................79
Saving Data as a txt-file via Smart view................................................................................................79
Offline Device Planning via Smart view..........................................................................................................80
MEASURING VALUES..............................................................................................................................81
Read out Measured Values............................................................................................................................81
Read out of Measured Values via Smart view .......................................................................................81
Standard Measured Values............................................................................................................................82
ENERGY COUNTER................................................................................................................................85

Page 4 EN MRA4 04/09

 Global Parameters of the Energy Counter Module.........................................................................................85
Direct Commands of the Energy Counter Module .........................................................................................85
Signals of the Energy Counter Module (States of the Outputs)......................................................................86
STATISTICS..........................................................................................................................................87
Read out Statistics.........................................................................................................................................87
Statistics to be Read-Out via Smart view...............................................................................................87
Statistics (Configuration)................................................................................................................................88
Statistics (Configuration) via Smart view................................................................................................88
Direct Commands..........................................................................................................................................89
Standard Statistic Values...............................................................................................................................89
Global Protection Parameters of the Statistics Module..................................................................................94
States of the Inputs of the Statistics Module..................................................................................................95
Signals of the Statistics Module.....................................................................................................................95
Counters of the Module Statistics..................................................................................................................95
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS..............................................................................................................................96
Manual Acknowledgment...............................................................................................................................98
Manual Acknowledgment via Smart view.............................................................................................98
External Acknowledgments............................................................................................................................99
External Acknowledge via Smart view..................................................................................................99
MANUAL RESETS ...............................................................................................................................100
Manual Resets via Smart view.....................................................................................................................100
ASSIGNMENT LIST ..............................................................................................................................101
STATUS DISPLAY ................................................................................................................................126
Status Display via Smart View.....................................................................................................................126
MODULE: DIGITAL INPUTS (DIS)............................................................................................................127
Digital Inputs (Standard)..............................................................................................................................128
Global Protection Parameters of the Digital Inputs (Standards)...................................................................128
Digital Inputs Signals (Outputs States).........................................................................................................132
Optional Digital Inputs..................................................................................................................................133
Global Protection Parameters of the Optional Digital Inputs.....................................................................133
Optional Digital Input Signals (Outputs States)......................................................................................136
BINARY OUTPUT RELAYS......................................................................................................................137
System Contact............................................................................................................................................139
Global Protection Parameters of the Binary Output Relays..........................................................................140
Binary Output Relay Input States.................................................................................................................154
Binary Output Relay Signals.........................................................................................................................160
LIGHT EMITTING DIODES (LEDS)..........................................................................................................161
The »System OK« LED ...............................................................................................................................164
Global Protection Parameters of the LED Module........................................................................................165
LED Module Input States.............................................................................................................................178
OPERATING PANEL (HMI)....................................................................................................................183
Special Parameters of the Panel..................................................................................................................183
Direct Commands of the Panel....................................................................................................................183
Global Protection Parameters of the Panel..................................................................................................183
MODULE: DISTURBANCE RECORDER .......................................................................................................184
Read Out Disturbance Records...................................................................................................................187
Disturbance Recorder to be Read Out by Smart view ...........................................................................187
Deleting Disturbance Records.....................................................................................................................188
Deleting Disturbance Records via Smart view ......................................................................................188
Direct Commands of the Disturbance Recorder Module .............................................................................189
Global Protection Parameters of the Disturbance Recorder Module............................................................189
Disturbance Recorder Module Input States..................................................................................................191
Disturbance Recorder Module Signals.........................................................................................................191
Special Parameters of the Disturbance Recorder........................................................................................192
MODULE: FAULT RECORDER .................................................................................................................193
Read Out the Fault Recorder.......................................................................................................................194
Read Out the Fault Recorder via Smart View .......................................................................................194
Direct Commands of the Fault Recorder Module ........................................................................................196
Global Protection Parameters of the Fault Recorder Module.......................................................................196
Fault Recorder Module Input States.............................................................................................................197

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 5

 Fault Recorder Module Signals....................................................................................................................197
MODULE: EVENT RECORDER ................................................................................................................198
Read Out the Event Recorder......................................................................................................................199
Read Out the Event Recorder via Smart View.......................................................................................199
Direct Commands of the Event Recorder Module .......................................................................................201
Event Recorder Module Signals...................................................................................................................201
MODULE: SCADA............................................................................................................................202
Device Planning Parameters of the Serial Scada Interface..........................................................................202
Global Protection Parameters of the Serial Scada Interface........................................................................202
MODULE: MODBUS® (MODBUS)............................................................................................................203
Modbus® Protocol Configuration.................................................................................................................203
Modbus RTU.................................................................................................................................204
Modbus TCP.................................................................................................................................205
Direct Commands of the Modbus®..............................................................................................................206
Global Protection Parameters of the Modbus®............................................................................................206
Modbus® Module Signals (Output States)..................................................................................................208
Modbus® Module Values.............................................................................................................................209
MODULE: IEC60870-5-103...............................................................................................................210
IEC60870-5-103 Protocol Configuration......................................................................................................210
Global Protection Parameters of the IEC60870-5-103.................................................................................212
IEC60870-5-103 Module Signals (Output States).......................................................................................213
IEC60870-5-103 Module Values..................................................................................................................214
PARAMETERS.....................................................................................................................................215
Parameter Definitions..................................................................................................................................215
Device Parameters..........................................................................................................................215
Field Parameters............................................................................................................................215
Protection Parameters......................................................................................................................215
Device Planning Parameters.............................................................................................................216
Direct Commands..........................................................................................................................216
State of the Module Inputs...............................................................................................................216
Signals........................................................................................................................................216
Adaptive Parameter Sets..................................................................................................................217
Operational Modes (access authorization)...................................................................................................220
Operational Mode – »Display Only«...............................................................................................220
Operation Mode – »Parameter Setting and Planning«..........................................................................220
Password.....................................................................................................................................................221
Password Entry at the Panel.............................................................................................................221
Password Changes........................................................................................................................221
Password Forgotten .......................................................................................................................221
Changing of Parameters - Example.............................................................................................................222
Changing of Parameters when using the Smart View - Example.................................................................223
Protection Parameters ................................................................................................................................225
Setting Groups.............................................................................................................................................225
Setting Group Switch .....................................................................................................................225
Setting Group Switch via Smart View.................................................................................................226
Copying Setting Groups (Parameter Sets) via Smart View.......................................................................227
Comparing Setting Groups via Smart View.........................................................................................227
Comparing Parameter Files via Smart view.................................................................................................228
Converting Parameter Files via Smart view.................................................................................................228
FIELD PARAMETERS ............................................................................................................................229
BLOCKINGS.......................................................................................................................................234
Permanent Blocking.....................................................................................................................................234
Temporary Blocking.....................................................................................................................................234
To Activate or Deactivate the Tripping Command of a Protection Module....................................................238
Activate, Deactivate Respectively Block Temporarily Protection Functions..................................................239
MODULE: PROTECTION (PROT)..............................................................................................................241
Direct Commands of the Protection Module.................................................................................................248
Global Protection Parameters of the Protection Module ..............................................................................248
Protection Module Input States....................................................................................................................250

Page 6 EN MRA4 04/09

 Protection Module Signals (Output States)..................................................................................................250
Protection Module Values.............................................................................................................................251
MODULE: TRIP CONTROL (TRIPCONTROL)................................................................................................252
Direct Commands of the Trip Control Module..............................................................................................254
Global Protection Parameters of the Trip Control Module............................................................................254
Trip Control Module Input States..................................................................................................................258
Trip Control Module Signals (Outputs States)..............................................................................................259
Trip Control Module – Sum of Tripping Currents..........................................................................................259
Trip Control Module Values..........................................................................................................................259
I-PROTECTION MODULE – OVERCURRENT PROTECTION [ANSI 50, 51, 67]...................................................260
Device Planning Parameters of the I Module...............................................................................................277
Global Protection Parameters of the I Module..............................................................................................277
Setting Group Parameters of the I Module...................................................................................................279
I Module Input States...................................................................................................................................283
I Module Signals (Output States).................................................................................................................284
Commissioning: Overcurrent Protection, non-directional [ANSI 50, 51].......................................................285
Commissioning: Overcurrent Protection, directional [ANSI 67]....................................................................286
IG-PROTECTION MODULE – GROUND FAULT [ANSI 50N/G, 51N/G, 67N/G].............................................287
Device Planning Parameters of the Ground Fault Protection ......................................................................304
Global Protection Parameters of the Ground Fault Protection ....................................................................304
Setting Group Parameters of the Ground Fault Protection ..........................................................................306
Ground Fault Protection Input States...........................................................................................................310
Ground Fault Protection Signals (Output States).........................................................................................311
Commissioning: Ground Fault Protection – non-directional [ANSI 50N/G, 51N/G].......................................312
Commissioning: Ground Fault Protection – directional [ANSI 50N/G, 51N/G, 67N/G].................................312
THR-PROTECTION MODULE: THERMAL REPLICA [ANSI 49]........................................................................313
Direct Commands of the Thermal Overload Module....................................................................................315
Device Planning Parameters of the Thermal Overload Module....................................................................315
Global Protection Parameters of the Thermal Overload Module..................................................................316
Setting Group Parameters of the Thermal Overload Module.......................................................................317
Thermal Overload Module Input States........................................................................................................319
Signals of the Thermal Overload Signals (Output States)............................................................................319
Thermal Overload Module Values................................................................................................................320
Thermal Overload Module Statistics............................................................................................................320
Commissioning: Thermal Replica [ANSI 49]................................................................................................321
I2>-PROTECTION MODULE – UNBALANCED LOAD PROTECTION [ANSI 46].....................................................322
Device Planning Parameters of the Unbalanced Load Module ...................................................................325
Global Protection Parameters of the Unbalanced Load Module...................................................................325
Setting Group Parameters of the Unbalanced Load Module........................................................................326
Unbalanced Load Module Input States........................................................................................................328
Unbalanced Load Module Signals (Output States).......................................................................................328
Commissioning: Unbalanced Load Protection [ANSI 46].............................................................................329
SOTF-PROTECTION MODULE: SWITCH ONTO FAULT.................................................................................331
Device Planning Parameters of the Switch Onto Fault Module....................................................................333
Global Protection Parameters of the Switch Onto Fault Module...................................................................334
Setting Group Parameters of the Switch Onto Fault Module........................................................................336
Switch Onto Fault Module Input States........................................................................................................337
Signals of the Switch Onto Fault Module (Output States)............................................................................337
Commissioning: Switch Onto Fault [ANSI 50HS].........................................................................................338
CLPU - SUPERVISION MODULE COLD LOAD PICKUP.................................................................................339
Device planning parameters of the Cold Load Pickup module ....................................................................342
Global protection parameter of the Cold Load Pickup-module.....................................................................342
Parameter set parameters of the Cold Load Pickup module........................................................................343
States of the inputs of the Cold Load Pickup module...................................................................................344
Signals of the Cold Load Pickup module (states of the outputs)..................................................................344
Commissioning of the Cold Load Pickup Module.........................................................................................345
IH2 MODULE – INRUSH.......................................................................................................................347
Device Planning Parameters of the Inrush Module......................................................................................348
Global Protection Parameters of the Inrush module.....................................................................................348
Setting Group Parameters of the Inrush Module..........................................................................................349
Inrush Module Input States..........................................................................................................................350
Inrush Module Signals (Output States)........................................................................................................350

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 7

 Commissioning: Inrush................................................................................................................................351
V-PROTECTION MODULE – VOLTAGE PROTECTION [ANSI 27/59]................................................................352
Device Planning Parameters of the Voltage Protection Module ..................................................................354
Global Protection Parameters of the Voltage Protection Module .................................................................354
Setting Group Parameters of the Voltage Protection Module ......................................................................355
Voltage Protection Module Input States.......................................................................................................359
Voltage Protection Module Signals (Output States)......................................................................................359
Commissioning: Overvoltage Protection [ANSI 59]......................................................................................360
Commissioning: Undervoltage Protection [ANSI 27]....................................................................................361
VE-PROTECTION MODULE – RESIDUAL VOLTAGE [ANSI 59N]...................................................................362
Device Planning Parameters of the Residual Voltage Supervision Module..................................................364
Global Protection Parameters of the Residual Voltage Supervision Module................................................364
Setting Group Parameters of the Residual Voltage Supervision Module......................................................365
Residual Voltage Supervision Module Input States......................................................................................366
Residual Voltage Supervision Module Signals (Output States)....................................................................366
Commissioning: Residual Voltage Protection - Measured [ANSI 59N].........................................................367
Commissioning: Residual Voltage Protection - Calculated [ANSI 59N]........................................................368
V 012 - PROTECTION MODULE ASYMMETRY.............................................................................................369
Device planning parameters of the asymmetry module ..............................................................................371
Global protection parameter of the asymmetry-module...............................................................................371
Parameter set parameters of the asymmetry module..................................................................................372
States of the inputs of the asymmetry module............................................................................................373
Signals of the asymmetry module (states of the outputs).............................................................................374
Commissioning: Asymmetry Protection........................................................................................................375
PQS – POWER PROTECTION MODULE [ANSI 32, 37].............................................................................376
Device planning parameters of the Power Protection module .....................................................................380
Global protection parameter of the Power Protection-module......................................................................380
Parameter set parameters of the Power Protection module.........................................................................381
States of the inputs of the Power Protection module....................................................................................383
Signals of the Power Protection module (states of the outputs)...................................................................383
Commissioning Examples for the Power Protection Module .......................................................................384
PF PROTECTION MODULE – POWER FACTOR [ANSI 55]...........................................................................393
Device planning parameters of the Power Factor module ...........................................................................396
Global protection parameter of the Power Factor-module............................................................................396
Parameter set parameters of the Power Factor module..............................................................................397
States of the inputs of the Power Factor module..........................................................................................399
Signals of the Power Factor module (states of the outputs).........................................................................399
Commissioning: Power Factor [ANSI 55].....................................................................................................400
F-PROTECTION MODULE – FREQUENCY PROTECTION
[ANSI 81O/U]....................................................................................................................................402
Device Planning Parameters of the Frequency Protection Module..............................................................408
Global Protection Parameters of the Frequency Protection Module.............................................................408
Setting Group Parameters of the Frequency Protection Module..................................................................409
Frequency Protection Module Input States...................................................................................................411
Frequency Protection Module Signals (Output States).................................................................................411
Commissioning: Frequency Protection (Overfrequency) [ANSI 81O]...........................................................412
Commissioning: Frequency Protection (Underfrequency) [ANSI 81U].........................................................412
Commissioning: df/dt...................................................................................................................................413
Commissioning: f< and -df/dt.......................................................................................................................414
Commissioning: delta phi.............................................................................................................................415
AR-PROTECTION MODULE – AUTOMATIC RECLOSURE [ANSI 79]................................................................416
Direct Commands of the Automatic Reclosure Module................................................................................423
Device Planning Parameters of the Module Automatic Reclosure...............................................................423
Global Protection Parameters of the Module Automatic Reclosure..............................................................424
Setting Group Parameters of the Module Automatic Reclosure...................................................................425
Module Automatic Reclosure Input States...................................................................................................429
Module Automatic Reclosure Signals (Output States)..................................................................................430
Automatic Reclosure Module Values............................................................................................................431
Setting Group Parameters of the Start Functions and Fast Trip of the Module Automatic Reclosure...........432
Module Automatic Reclosure Fast Trip Signals (Output States)...................................................................435
Setting Group Parameters of the AR Abort Functions..................................................................................436
AR Abort Functions......................................................................................................................................437

Page 8 EN MRA4 04/09

 AR Start Functions.......................................................................................................................................439
Commissioning: Automatic Reclosure [ANSI 79].........................................................................................440
EXP PROTECTION MODULE – EXTERNAL PROTECTION................................................................................441
Device Planning Parameters of the Module External Protection..................................................................443
Global Protection Parameters of the Module External Protection.................................................................443
Setting Group Parameters of the Module External Protection......................................................................444
Module External Protection Input States......................................................................................................445
Module External Protection Signals (Output States)....................................................................................445
Commissioning: External Protection............................................................................................................446
CBF-SUPERVISION MODULE – CIRCUIT BREAKER FAILURE PROTECTION [ANSI 50BF]...................................447
Device Planning Parameters of the CBF Module.........................................................................................449
Global Protection Parameters of the CBF Module.......................................................................................449
Setting Group Parameters of the CBF Module.............................................................................................450
CBF Module Input States.............................................................................................................................451
CBF Module Signals (Output States)...........................................................................................................451
Commissioning: Circuit Breaker Failure Protection [ANSI 50BF].................................................................452
TCS-SUPERVISION MODULE – TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION ANSI [74TC].....................................................453
Device Planning Parameters of the Trip Circuit Supervision Module............................................................456
Global Protection Parameters of the Trip Circuit Supervision Module..........................................................457
Setting Group Parameters of the Trip Circuit Supervision Module...............................................................458
Trip Circuit Supervision Module Input States................................................................................................459
Trip Circuit Supervision Module Signals (Output States)..............................................................................459
Commissioning: Trip Circuit Supervision for Circuit Breakers [74TC]..........................................................460
CTS-SUPERVISION MODULE – CURRENT TRANSFORMER SUPERVISION [ANSI 60L].........................................461
Device Planning Parameters of the Current Transformer Supervision.........................................................463
Global Protection Parameter of the Current Transformer Supervision.........................................................463
Setting Group Parameters of the Current Transformer Supervision.............................................................464
Current Transformer Supervision Input States.............................................................................................465
Current Transformer Supervision Signals (Outputs States).........................................................................465
Commissioning: Current Transformer Failure Supervision [ANSI 60L].........................................................466
VTS-SUPERVISION MODULE - VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER SUPERVISION [ANSI 60FL]........................................467
Device Planning Parameters of the Voltage Transformer Module ...............................................................469
Global Protection Parameters of the Voltage Transformer Supervision Module ..........................................469
Setting Group Parameters of the Voltage Transformer Module....................................................................470
Voltage Transformer Supervision Module Input States................................................................................471
Voltage Transformer Module Signals (Output States)..................................................................................471
Commissioning: Voltage Transformer Supervision (via DI) [ANSI 60FL]......................................................472
Commissioning: Voltage Transformer Failure [ANSI 60FL]..........................................................................473
DEVICE PARAMETERS...........................................................................................................................474
Date and Time.............................................................................................................................................474
Synchronize Date and Time via Smart View.........................................................................................474
Version.........................................................................................................................................................474
Version via Smart view.................................................................................................................................474
TCP/IP Settings...........................................................................................................................................475
Direct Commands of the System Module.....................................................................................................476
Global Protection Parameters of the System...............................................................................................477
System Module Input States........................................................................................................................480
System Module Signals................................................................................................................................481
Special Values of the System Module..........................................................................................................482
COMMISSIONING .................................................................................................................................483
Commissioning/Protection Test ...................................................................................................................484
Putting out of Operation – Plug out the Relay..............................................................................................485
SERVICE...........................................................................................................................................486
General........................................................................................................................................................486
SELF SUPERVISION..............................................................................................................................487
Error messages / -codes..............................................................................................................................488
TECHNICAL DATA ...............................................................................................................................489
Climatic Environmental Conditions...............................................................................................................489
Degree of Protection EN 60529...................................................................................................................489
Routine Test.................................................................................................................................................489
Housing........................................................................................................................................................489

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 9

 Plug-in Connectors with Integrated Short-Circuiter
(Conventional Current Inputs)..........................................................................................................................489
Voltage Supply.............................................................................................................................................490
Power Consumption.....................................................................................................................................490
Real Time Clock...........................................................................................................................................490
Display.........................................................................................................................................................490
Digital Inputs................................................................................................................................................491
Current and Earth Current Measurement.....................................................................................................492
Voltage and Residual Voltage Measurement................................................................................................492
Frequency Measurement ............................................................................................................................492
Binary Output Relays...................................................................................................................................493
Supervision Contact (SC).............................................................................................................................493
Time Synchronization IRIG..........................................................................................................................494
Front Interface RS232..................................................................................................................................494
RS485..........................................................................................................................................................494
Boot phase...................................................................................................................................................494
STANDARDS.......................................................................................................................................495
Design Standards........................................................................................................................................495
High Voltage Tests (IEC 60255-6) ...............................................................................................................495
EMC Immunity Tests....................................................................................................................................496
EMC Emission Tests....................................................................................................................................497
Environmental Tests.....................................................................................................................................498
Mechanical Tests.........................................................................................................................................499
TOLERANCES......................................................................................................................................500
Real Time Clock Tolerances........................................................................................................................500
Measured Values Tolerances.......................................................................................................................500
Phase and Earth Current Measuring...................................................................................................500
Phase-to-earth and Residual Voltage Measurement................................................................................501
Frequency measurement..................................................................................................................501
Protection Stages Tolerances......................................................................................................................502

53733abae968e215f44109436e958d7c
63e9c311f04781f5ddb4b4825f2ec609
RMS Handoff: 0
File: C:\p4_data\deliverMRA4\generated\MRA4_user_manual_uk.odt

This manual applies to devices (version):

Version 1.5 a

Build: 6656, 6789, 6972

Page 10 EN MRA4 04/09

Comments on the Manual

Comments on the Manual

This manual explains in general the tasks of device planning, parameter setting, installation, commissioning,
operation and maintenance of the HighPROTEC devices.

The manual serves as working basis for:

• Engineers in the protection field,

• commissioning engineers,
• people dealing with setting, testing and maintenance of protection and control devices,
• as well as trained personnel for electrical installations and power stations.

All functions concerning the type code will be defined. Should there be a description of any functions, parameters
or inputs/outputs which do not apply to the device in use, please ignore that information.

All details and references are explained to the best of our knowledge and are based on our experience and
observations.
This manual describes the (optionally) full featured versions of the devices.

All technical information and data included in this manual reflect their state at the time this document was issued.
We reserve the right to carry out technical modifications in line with further development without changing this
manual and without previous notice. Hence no claim can be brought based on the information and descriptions
this manual includes.

Text, graphic and formulae do not always apply to the actual delivery scope. The drawings and graphics are not
true to scale. We do not accept any liability for damage and operational failures caused by operating errors or
disregarding the directions of this manual.

No part of this manual is allowed to be reproduced or passed on to others in any form, unless Woodward SEG
GmbH & Co. KG have approved in writing.

This user manual is part of the delivery scope when purchasing the device. In case the device is passed on
(sold) to a third party, the manual has to be handed over as well.

Any repair work carried out on the device requires skilled and competent personnel who need to be well aware
especially of the local safety regulations and have the necessary experience for working on electronic protection
devices and power installations (provided by evidence).

Information Concerning Liability and Warranty

Woodward SEG does not accept any liability for damage resulting from conversions or changes carried out on
the device or planning (projecting) work, parameter setting or adjustment changes done by the customer.

The warranty expires after a device has been opened by others than Woodward SEG specialists.

Warranty and liability conditions stated in Woodward SEG’s General Terms and Conditions are not
supplemented by the above mentioned explanations.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 11

IMPORTANT DEFINITIONS

IMPORTANT DEFINITIONS
The signal definitions shown below serve the safety of life and limb as well as for the appropriate operating life of
the device.

DANGER indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in

death or serious injury.

WARNING indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could

result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION, used with the safety alert symbol, indicates a hazardous

situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

NOTICE is used to address practices not related to personal injury.

CAUTION, without the safety alert symbol, is used to address practices not
related to personal injury.

Page 12 EN MRA4 04/09

IMPORTANT DEFINITIONS

FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS

Read this entire manual and all other publications pertaining to the work to
be performed before installing, operating, or servicing this equipment.
Practice all plant and safety instructions and precautions. Failure to follow
instructions can cause personal injury and/or property damage.

PROPER USE

Any unauthorized modifications to or use of this equipment outside its

specified mechanical, electrical, or other operating limits may cause
personal injury and/or property damage, including damage to the
equipment. Any such unauthorized modifications: (1) constitute "misuse"
and/or "negligence" within the meaning of the product warranty thereby
excluding warranty coverage for any resulting damage, and (2) invalidate
product certifications or listings.

The progamable devices subject to this manual are designed for protection
and also control of power installations and operational devices. The
devices are further designed for installation in low-voltage (LV)
compartments of medium voltage (MV) switchgear panels or in de-
centralized protection panels. The programing and parameterization has to
meet all requirements of the protection concept (of the equipment that is to
be protected). You must ensure that the device will properly recognize and
manage (e.g. switch off the circuit breaker) on the basis of your progaming
and parameterization all operational conditions (failures). Before starting
any operation and after any modification of the programming
(parameterization) test make a documentary proof that your programing
and parameterization meets the requirements of your protection concept.

Typical applications for this product family/device line are for instance:

• Feeder protection

• Mains protection

• Machine protection

Any usage beyond these applications the devices are not designed for. The
manufacturer cannot be held liable for any resulting damage, the user alone
bears the risk for this. As to the appropriate use of the device: The
technical data specified by Woodward SEG have to be met.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 13

IMPORTANT DEFINITIONS

OUT-OF-DATE PUBLICATION

This publication may have been revised or updated since this copy was
produced. To verify that you have the latest revision, be sure to check the
Woodward SEG documentation website:

doc.seg-pp.com

The latest version of most publications is available at: doc.seg-pp.com

If your publication is not there, please contact your customer service

representative to get the latest copy.

Page 14 EN MRA4 04/09

IMPORTANT DEFINITIONS

Electrostatic Discharge Awareness

All electronic equipment is electro static-sensitive, some components more

than others. To protect these components from electro static damage, you
must take special precautions to minimize or eliminate electrostatic
discharges.

Follow these precautions when working with or near the control.

1. Before doing maintenance on the electronic control, discharge the

static electricity on your body to ground by touching and holding a
grounded metal object (pipes, cabinets, equipment, etc.).

2. Avoid the build-up of static electricity on your body by not wearing

clothing made of synthetic materials. Wear cotton or cotton-blend
materials as much as possible because these do not store static
electric charges as much as synthetics.

3. Keep plastic, vinyl, and Styrofoam materials (such as plastic or

Styrofoam cups, cup holders, cigarette packages, cellophane
wrappers, vinyl books or folders, plastic bottles, and plastic ash trays)
away from the control, the modules, and the work area as much as
possible.

4. Do not remove any printed circuit board (PCB) from the control cabinet
unless absolutely necessary. If you must remove the PCB from the
control cabinet, follow these precautions:

• Do not touch any part of the PCB except the edges.

• Do not touch the electrical conductors, the connectors, or the

components with conductive devices or with your hands.

• When replacing a PCB, keep the new PCB in the plastic

antistatic protective bag it comes in until you are ready to
install it. Immediately after removing the old PCB from the
control cabinet, place it in the antistatic protective bag.

To prevent damage to electronic components caused by improper

handling, read and observe the precautions in Woodward manual 82715,
Guide for Handling and Protection of Electronic Controls, Printed Circuit
Boards, and Modules.

Woodward SEG reserves the right to update any portion of this publication at any time. Information provided by
Woodward SEG is believed to be correct and reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed by Woodward SEG
unless otherwise expressly undertaken.

© Woodward SEG 2007 All Rights Reserved

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 15

IMPORTANT DEFINITIONS

Scope of Delivery
The delivery scope does not include the fastening material, but includes all connection terminals, except
communication connectors. Please check the consignment for completeness on arrival (delivery note).

Please ascertain whether the type plate, connection diagram, type code and description of the device tally.
If you have any doubts please contact our Service Department (contact address to be found on the reverse of
the manual).

Storage
The devices must not be stored outdoors. The storing facilities have to be sufficiently ventilated and must be dry
(see Technical Data).

Important Information

In line with the customer’s requirement the devices are combined in a

modular way (in compliance with the order code). The terminal assignment
of the device can be found on the top of the device (wiring diagram). In
addition to that it can be found within the appendix (wiring diagrams).

Page 16 EN MRA4 04/09

EN MRA4 04/09
Setting value: Option/features to be realised in the future CB.Latched
<name>.I

inactive
IMPORTANT DEFINITIONS

active

Device planning:
<name>
Parameter of a Module-Input with a
SelectionList/DropDown. An (1..n)
signal/output from the list or a pre-
<name>
defined value can be selected.
Signal: 1..n, Assignment List
Prot.I dir fwd

internal message <name>.*int Alm L1

Measured values: IG

Parameter of a Module-Input (with <name>

special values): An (1..n) output from the
Functional description: If the setting list will be assigned to the input no assignment 1
value "IG.Block at VE=0" is set to "<name>.identifier". If the parameter is
Symbols

"inactive" the output 1 is active and set to "ItemNull", an "active"-signal will be 1..n,
1..n,
Assignment
VeEnableList
IG.nondir Trip at
output 2 is inactive. If the setting value VE=0 given out. no assignment,1..n
"IG.Block at VE=0" is set to "active" the 1
inactive
output 2 is active and the output 1 is
2
inactive. active

Limit value monitoring with three I/ In

analogue input values. Compares 3
analogue values with the set limit; IL1
output values are three different
binary values as a result of the
IL2
comparision. If the analogue signal
exceeds the limit I/In the
corresponding output signal becomes IL3
"φ "=Elements with complex functions "1".
AR.t-DP
"gray-box".

φ
t-DP 0

Page 17
Page 18
& RS flip-flop a S 1 c
And
abcd b d
R1 1
0 0 Unchanged
0101
IMPORTANT DEFINITIONS

Or >1
1010
1101

Exclusive-OR =1

Time stage: A "1" at the <name>.t

Negated input input starts the stage. If the t 0
time <name>.t is expired
the output becomes "1" too.
Negated output
The time stage will be reset
by "0" at the input. Thus the
output will be set to "0" at
Band-pass (filter) the same time.
IH1
IH1

Band-pass (filter)
IH2
IH2
Edge triggered counter
+ increment +
R Reset R
Quotient of analogue values
IH2
IH1

Time stage minimum pulse

width: The pulse width CB.t-TripCmd
<name>.t will be started if a
1
"1" is feed to the input. By t
starting <name>.t the output
Analog values becomes "1". If the time is
expired, the output becomes
"0" independent from the
input signal.
Analogue values
comparator

EN MRA4 04/09
 Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module
Output Signal will lead to a general trip.
2 name.Trip L1 16
2 Input Signal Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module
will lead to a general trip.

EN MRA4 04/09
name.Trip L2 17
Please Refer To Diagram: Prot Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module
Prot.available 1 will lead to a general trip.
name.Trip L3 18
Please Refer To Diagram: Blockings Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module
name.active 2 will lead to a general trip.
name.TripCmd 19
IMPORTANT DEFINITIONS

Please Refer To Diagram: Trip blockings

Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module
name.Blo TripCmd 3 will lead to a general trip.
name.Trip L1 20
Please Refer To Diagram: Blockings**
Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module
name.active 4 will lead to a general trip.
name.Trip L2 21
Please Refer To Diagram: IH2
Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module
IH2.Blo L1 5 will lead to a general trip.
name.Trip L3 22
Please Refer To Diagram: IH2
Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module
IH2.Blo L2 6 will lead to a general trip.
name.Trip 23
Please Refer To Diagram: IH2 Each phase selective alarm of a module (I, IG, V, VE
depending on the device type) will lead to a phase
IH2.Blo L3 7 selective general alarm (collective alarm).
name.Alarm L1 24
Please Refer To Diagram: IH2 Each phase selective alarm of a module (I, IG, V, VE
depending on the device type) will lead to a phase
IH2.Blo IG 8 selective general alarm (collective alarm).
name.Alarm L2 25
Please Refer To Diagram: direction decision
Each phase selective alarm of a module (I, IG, V, VE
phase overcurrent
depending on the device type) will lead to a phase
name. Fault in projected direction 9 selective general alarm (collective alarm).
name.Alarm L3 26
Please Refer To Diagram: direction decision Each phase selective alarm of a module (I, IG, V, VE
Earth fault depending on the device type) will lead to a phase
name. Fault in projected direction 10 selective general alarm (collective alarm).
name.Alarm 27
Each phase selective alarm of a module (I, IG, V, VE
Please Refer To Diagram: CB
CB.Trip CB depending on the device type) will lead to a phase
11 selective general alarm (collective alarm).
name.Alarm L1 28
Each phase selective alarm of a module (I, IG, V, VE
Please Refer To Diagram: VTS depending on the device type) will lead to a phase
VTS.Alarm 12 selective general alarm (collective alarm).
Each alarm of a module (except from name.Alarm L2 29
supervision modules but including CBF) will
Each phase selective alarm of a module (I, IG, V, VE
lead to a general alarm (collective alarm).
depending on the device type) will lead to a phase
name.Alarm 14 selective general alarm (collective alarm).
name.Alarm L3 30
Each trip of an active, trip authorized
Each phase selective alarm of a module (I, IG, V, VE
protection module will lead to a general trip.
depending on the device type) will lead to a phase
name.TripCmd 15 selective general alarm (collective alarm).
name.Alarm 31

Prot.Blo TripCmd 32

Page 19
Page 20
Please Refer To Diagram: CB.CB Manager
CB.Pos 33
Please Refer To Diagram: CB.CB Manager
CB.Pos ON 34
Please Refer To Diagram: CB.CB Manager
CB.Pos OFF 35
IMPORTANT DEFINITIONS

Please Refer To Diagram: CB.CB Manager

CB.Pos Indeterm 36
Please Refer To Diagram: CB.CB Manager
CB.Pos Disturb 37

EN MRA4 04/09
Device

Device
MRA4

Device Planning
Planning of a device means to reduce the functional range to a degree that suits the protection task to be
fulfilled, i.e. the device shows only those functions you really need. If you, for example, deactivate the voltage
protection function, all parameter branches related to this function do not appear in the parameter tree any more.
All corresponding events, signals etc. will be deactivated too. By this the parameter trees become very
transparent. Planning also involves adjustment of all basic system data (frequency etc.).

But it has to be taken into account that by deactivating, for instance,

protective functions, you also change the functionality of the device. If you
cancel the directional feature of the overcurrent protections then the device
no longer trips in a directional way but merely in a non-directional way.

The manufacturer does not accept liability for any personal or material
damage as a result of wrong planning.

A planning service is also offered by Woodward SEG.

Beware of inadvertent deactivating protective functions/modules

If you are deactivating modules within the device planning all parameters of
those modules will be set on default.
If you are activating one of these modules again all parameters of those
reactivated modules will be set on default.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 21

Device

Device Planning Parameters of the Device

Parameter Description Options Default Menu path
Hardware Variant 1 Optional Hardware »A« 8 digital inputs | 8 digital inputs | 7 [MRA4]
Extension 7 binary output binary output relays
relays,
»C« 8 digital inputs |
13 binary output
relays,
»D« 16 digital inputs
| 13 binary output
relays
Hardware Variant 2 Optional Hardware »0« Standard »0« Standard [MRA4]
Extension
Housing Mounting form »A« Flush mounting, Flush mounting [MRA4]
»B« 19 inch
mounting (semi-
flush)
Communication Communication »A« Without, »A« Without [MRA4]
»B« RS485 terminal,
»C« Ethernet,
»F« Fiber Optic,
»G« RS485 D-Sub

Page 22 EN MRA4 04/09

Installation and Connection

Installation and Connection

Three-Side-View

Dependent on the connection method of the SCADA system used the

needed space (depth) differs. If, for instance, a D-Sub-Plug is used, it has to
be added to the depth dimension.

3-Side-View B2 Housing

The housing must be carefully earthed. Connect a ground cable (4 to 6 mm2

(AWG 12-10) / 1.7 Nm (15 lb-in)) to the housing, using the screw, which is
marked with the ground symbol (at the rear side of the device).

The power supply card needs a separate ground connection (2.5 mm2
(AWG 14) at terminal X1 (0.55 Nm/4.9 lb-in).

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 23

Installation and Connection

Installation Diagram

Even when the auxiliary voltage is switched-off, unsafe voltages might

remain at the device connections.

B2 Housing Door Cut-out

The housing must be carefully earthed. Connect a ground cable (4 to 6 mm2

(AWG 12-10) / 1.7 Nm (15 lb-in)) to the housing, using the screw, which is
marked with the ground symbol (at the rear side of the device).

The power supply card needs a separate ground connection (2.5 mm2
(AWG 14) at terminal X1 (0.55 Nm/4.9 lb-in).

Be careful. Do not overtighten the mountings nuts of the relay

(M4 metric 4 mm). Check the torque by means of a torque wrench (1.7 Nm /
15 lb-in). Overtightening the mounting nuts could due to personal injury or
damage the relay.

Page 24 EN MRA4 04/09

Installation and Connection

Assembly Groups

In line with the customer’s requirement the devices are combined in a

modular way (in compliance with the order code). In each of the slots an
assembly-group may be integrated. In the following the terminal
assignment of the individual assembly-groups are shown. The exact
installation place of the individual modules can be learned from the
connection diagram fixed at the top of your device.

Middle Housing B2 for the following device:MRA4

Housing B2

slot1 slot2 slot3 slot4 slot5 slot6

X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6

X100 X102 X103 X104

The housing must be carefully grounded. Connect a ground cable (4 to 6

mm2 (AWG 12-10) / 1.7 Nm (15 lb-in)) to the housing, using the screw, which
is marked with the ground symbol (at the rear side of the device).

The power supply card needs a separate ground connection (2.5 mm2
(AWG 14) at terminal X1 (0.55 Nm/4.9 lb-in).

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 25

Installation and Connection

Grounding

The housing must be carefully grounded. Connect a ground cable (4 to 6

mm2 (AWG 12-10) / 1.7 Nm (15 lb-in)) to the housing, using the screw, which
is marked with the ground symbol (at the rear side of the device).

The power supply card needs a separate ground connection (2.5 mm2
(AWG 14) at terminal X1 (0.55 Nm/4.9 lb-in).

The devices are very sensitive to electro-static discharges.

Page 26 EN MRA4 04/09

Installation and Connection

Power Supply and Digital Inputs

Make sure, that the tightening torque is 0.55 Nm (4.9 lb-in).

This assembly group comprises:

• a wide-range power supply unit

• 6 digital inputs, grouped
• 2 digital inputs, non-grouped
• 24V DC (for options with Woodward SEG Devices only)

Auxiliary voltage supply

• The aux. voltage inputs (wide-range power supply unit) are non-polarized. The device could be provided
with AC or DC voltage.

Digital inputs

For each digital input group the related voltage input range has to be
parameterized. Wrong switching thresholds can result in
malfunctions/wrong signal transfer times.

The digital inputs are provided with different switching thresholds (can be parameterized) (two AC and five DC
input ranges). For the six grouped (connected to common potential) inputs and the two non-grouped inputs the
following switching levels can be defined:

• 24V DC
• 48V DC / 60V DC
• 110 V AC/DC
• 230 V AC/DC

If a voltage >80% of the set switching threshold is applied at the digital input, the state change is recognized
(physically “1”). If the voltage is below 40% of the set switching threshold, the device detects physically “0”.

The ground terminal has to be connected to the »-pole« when using DC

supply.

Use of the 24 V DC Output is prohibited. This output is exclusively for

factory testing and commissioning.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 27

Installation and Connection

MRA4, MRU4, MRI4 Terminal Marking => X1

X?.
1 PE
2 L+ Power Supply
3 L-
4 n.c.
5 COM1
6 DI1
7 COM2
8 DI2
9 COM3
10 COM
11 DI3
12 DI4
13 DI5
14 DI6
15 DI7
16 DI8
17 24 V DC OUT1
18 COM OUT1

Electro-mechanical assignment

0+HTL-NT

PE
1

L+
2

Power Supply
L-
3

n.c.
4

COM1
5

DI1
6

COM2
7

DI2
8

COM3
9

COM3
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10

DI3

DI4

DI5

DI6

DI7

DI8

24 V DC OUT1

COM OUT1

Page 28 EN MRA4 04/09

Installation and Connection

Binary Output Relays

The number of the binary output relay contacts is related to the type of the device or type code. The binary
output relays are potential-free change-over contacts. In chapter [Assignment/binary outputs] the assignment of
the binary output relays is specified. The changeable signals are listed in the »assignment list« which can be
found in the appendix.

Make sure that the tightening torque is 0.55 Nm (4.9 lb-in).

Please duly consider the current carrying capacity of the binary output
relays. Please refer to the Technical Data.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 29

Installation and Connection

Terminal Marking X2 Terminal Marking X5

for device: MRA4 for device: MRA4

X?. X?.
1 1
2 BO1 2 BO1
3 3
4 4
5 BO2 5 BO2
6 6
7 7
8 BO3 8 BO3
9 9
10 10
11 BO4 11 BO4
12 12
13 13
14 BO5 14 BO5
15 15
16 16
17 BO6 17 BO6
18 18

Electro-mechanical assignment for device: MRA4

0+HTL-MK

BO1 n.c.
1

BO1 C
2

BO1 n.o.
3

BO2 n.c.
4

BO2 C
5

BO2 n.o.
6

BO3 n.c.
7

BO3 C
8

BO3 n.o.
9
18 1 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 13 1 2 1 1 10

BO4 n.c.

BO4 C

BO4 n.o.

BO5 n.c.

BO5 C

BO5 n.o.

BO6 n.c.

BO6 C

BO6 n.o.

Page 30 EN MRA4 04/09

Installation and Connection

Digital Inputs
This module is provided with 8 grouped digital inputs.
In chapter [Device parameter/Digital Inputs] the assignment of the digital inputs is specified.

Make sure that the tightening torque is 0.55 Nm (4.9 lb-in).

The ground terminal has to be connected to the »-pole« when using DC

supply.

For each digital input group the related voltage input range has to be
parameterized. Wrong switching thresholds can result in
malfunctions/wrong signal transfer times.

Via the »assignment list« the states of the digital inputs are assigned to the
module inputs (e.g. I[1]).

The digital inputs are provided with different switching thresholds (can be parameterized) (two AC and five DC
input ranges). For each group the following switching thresholds can be defined:

• 24V DC
• 48V DC / 60V DC
• 110 V AC/DC
• 230 V AC/DC

If a voltage >80% of the set switching threshold is applied at the digital input, the state change is recognized
(physically “1”). If the voltage is below 40% of the set switching threshold, the device detects physically “0”.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 31

Installation and Connection

Terminal Marking X6 for device: MRA4

X?.
1 DI1
2 DI2
3 DI3
4 DI4
5 DI5
6 DI6
7 DI7
8 DI8
9 COM1
10 n.c.
11 n.c.
12 n.c.
13 n.c.
14 n.c.
15 n.c.
16 n.c.
17 n.c.
18 n.c.

Electro-mechanical assignment for device: MRA4

0+HTL-DI-8

DI1
12

DI2
3

DI3
4

DI4
5

DI5
6

DI6
7

DI7
DI8
8

COM1
9

n.c.
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10

n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.

Page 32 EN MRA4 04/09

Installation and Connection

Voltage Measuring Inputs

The device is provided with 4 voltage measuring inputs: three for measuring the phase-to-phase voltages
(»V12«, »V23« , »V31«) or phase-to-neutral voltages (»VL1«, »VL2«, »VL3«) and one for the measuring of the
residual voltage »VE«. With the field parameters the correct connection of the voltage measuring inputs has to
be set:

• phase-to-neutral (star)
• phase-to-phase (Delta respectively V-Connection)

Make sure that the tightening torque is 1 Nm (8.85 lb-in).

The rotating field of your power supply system has to be taken in to

account. Make sure that the transformer is wired correctly.

For the V-connection the parameter »VT con« has to be set to »phase-to-
phase«.

Please refer to the Technical Data.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 33

Installation and Connection

MRA4 Terminal Marking => X4

MRU4 Terminal Marking => X3

X?.
1
VL1/VL12
2
3
VL2/VL23
4
5
VL3/VL31
6
7
VE
8

Electro-mechanical assignment

0+HTL-TU-x

VL1.1
1

VL1.2
2

VL2.1
3

VL2.2
4

VL3.1
5
6

VL3.2

VE1.1
7
8

VE1.2

Page 34 EN MRA4 04/09

Installation and Connection

Current Measuring Inputs and Ground Current Measuring Input

The device is provided with 4 current measuring inputs: three for measuring the phase currents and one for
measuring of the earth current. Each of the current measuring inputs has a measuring input for 1 A and 5 A.

The input for earth current measuring either can be connected to a cable-type current transformer or
alternatively it is possible to connect the summation current path of the phase current transformer to this input
(Holmgreen connection).

Current transformers have to be earthed on their secondary side.

Interrupting the secondary circuits of current transformers causes

hazardous voltages.

The secondary side of the current transformers have to be short circuited

before the current circuit to the device is opened.

The current measuring inputs may exclusively be connected to current

measuring transformers.

• Do not interchange the inputs (1 A/5 A)

• Make sure the transformation ratios and the power of the CTs are
correctly rated. If the rating of the CTs is not right (overrated), then
the normal operational conditions may not be recognized. The
pickup value of the measuring unit amounts approx. 3% of the rated
current of the device. Also the CTs need a current greater than
approx 3% of the rated current to ensure sufficient accuracy.
Example: For a 600 A CT (primary current) any currents below 18 A
cannot be detected any more.

• Overloading can result in destruction of the measuring inputs or

faulty signals. Overloading means that in case of a short-circuit the
current-carrying capacity of the measuring inputs could be
exceeded.

Make sure, that the tightening torque is 1 Nm (11.94 lb-in).

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 35

Installation and Connection

MRA4, MRI4 Terminal Marking => X3

X?.
1A
1
5A
2 IL1
N
3
1A
4
5A
5 IL2
N
6
1A
7
5A
8 IL3
9 N
1A
10
5A
11 IG
12 N

Electro-mechanical assignment

0+HTL-TI-x

IL1-1A 1

3 IL1-N

IL1-5A 2

IL2-1A 4

6 IL2-N

IL2-5A 5

IL3-1A 7

9 IL3-N

IL3-5A 8

IG-1A 10
12 IG-N

IG-5A 11

Page 36 EN MRA4 04/09

Installation and Connection

System (SC)

Make sure that the tightening torque is 0.55 Nm (4.9 lb-in).

Terminal markings X104 for device: MRA4

SC
X104
1
2
3
4
5
Electro-mechanical assignment for device: MRA4

0+HTL-uP-6 / 0+HTL-uP-14
X104
1 2 3 4 5
SC n.c.

SC n.o.

C
SC

This contact closes after the boot phase of the device if the protection is working.
This contact will open if an internal device error has occurred (please refer to chapter Self Supervision).

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 37

Installation and Connection

Communication Interfaces
Modbus® RTU / IEC 60870-5-103 via Terminals

Make sure that the tightening torque is 0.23 Nm (2.03 lb-in).

Terminal Marking X103 for the device: MRA4

Protective Relay
+5V GND
560 Ω 560Ω
120Ω

P*
N*
N
P
X102
1
2
3
4
5
6

Electro-mechanical assignment for device: MRA4

Protective Relay
+5V R1 = 560 Ω GND
R2 = 120 Ω
R1 R1
R2
P*
N*
P
N

1 2 3 4 5 6

The Modbus® / IEC 60870-5-103 connection cable must be shielded. The

shielding has to be fixed at the screw which is marked with the ground
symbol at the rear side of the device.

The communication is Halfduplex.-

Page 38 EN MRA4 04/09

Installation and Connection

Wiring example, Device in the Middle of the BUS

Protective Relay
+5V R1 = 560 Ω GND
R2 = 120 Ω
R1 R1
R2

1 2 3 4 5 6

B B*

N N*

Wiring example, Device at the End of the BUS (using the integrated Terminal Resistor)

Protective Relay
+5V R1 = 560 Ω GND
R2 = 120 Ω
R1 R1
R2

1 2 3 4 5 6

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 39

Installation and Connection

Modbus® RTU / IEC 60870-5-103 via D-SUB-plug

Terminal marking X103 for the device: MRA4

6 9

1 5

Electro-mechanical assignment for device: MRA4

D-SUB assignment - bushing

1 Earthing/shielding
3 RxD TxD - P: High-Level
4 RTS-signal
5 DGND: Ground, neg. Potential of aux voltage supply
6 VP: pos. Potential of the aux voltage supply
8 RxD TxD - N: Low-Level

The Modbus® / IEC 60870-5-103 connection cable must be shielded. The

shielding has to be fixed at the screw which is marked with the ground
symbol at the back side of the device.

Page 40 EN MRA4 04/09

Installation and Connection

PC Interface
X120 9-pole D-Sub at all device fronts

B1, B2 und B3 Housing

RS232 PC-Interface
for Parameter Setting
and Evaluation
Software - X120

Electro-mechanical assignment for all device types

1 5

6 9

1 DCD

2 RxD

3 TxD

4 DTR

5 GND

6 DSR

7 RTS

8 CTS

9 RI

housing shielded

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 41

Installation and Connection

Assignment of the Zero Modem Cable

Assignment of the fully wired zero modem cable

Dsub -9 (female) Signal Dsub -9 (female) Signal

2 RxD 3 TxD
3 TxD 2 RxD
4 DTR 6,1 DSR, DCD
6,1 DSR, DCD 4 DTR
7 RTS 8 CTS
8 CTS 7 RTS
5 GND (Ground) 5 GND (Ground)
9 Ring signal 9 Ring signal

The connection cable must be shielded.

Page 42 EN MRA4 04/09

Current Transformers (CT)

Current Transformers (CT)

Check the installation direction.

It is imperative that the secondary sides of measuring transformers be

grounded.

CT secondary circuits must always to be low burdend or short-circuited

during operation.

All current measuring inputs can be provided with 1 A or 5 A nominal. Make

sure that the wiring is correct.

Current Transformer Connection Examples

Connection example Clockwise Rotating Field
MRI4, MCI4, MRA4, MCA4 => terminal marking X3.

L1 L2 L3

X3.
1A
1
IL1' 5A
2 IL1
3 N
1A
4
IL2' 5A
5 IL2
IL1 N
6
1A
7
IL3' 5A
8 IL3
9 N
IL2 1A
10
5A
11 IG
12 N

IL3

Three phase current measurement; In secondary = 5 A.

Notice!
Calculation of IG is possible

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 43

Current Transformers (CT)

Connection example Clockwise Rotating Field

MRI4, MCI4, MRA4, MCA4 => terminal marking X3.

L1 L2 L3

X3.
1 1A
IL1'
2 5A
IL1
3 N

4 1A
IL2'
5 5A
IL2
IL1
6 N

7 1A
IL3'
8 5A
IL3
9 N
IL2 1A
10
IG' 5A
11 IG
12 N

IL3

Ring Core Type Current

Transformer: Measures the
ground current. (Sum of the three
phase currents). Can be used for
measuring the earth current in
isolated and compensated
networks. The shield is to be
returned through the ring core
current transformer.

Three phase current measurement; In secondary = 1 A.

Earth-current measuring via cable-type current transformer ; IGnom secondary = 1 A.
Warning!
The shielding at the dismantled end of the line has to be put through the cable-type current
transformer and has to be grounded at the cable side.

Notice!
Recommended for isolated or compensated networks

Page 44 EN MRA4 04/09

Current Transformers (CT)

Connection example Clockwise Rotating Field

MRI4, MCI4, MRA4, MCA4 => terminal markings X3.

L1 L2 L3

X3.
1A
1
5A
2 IL1
IL1' N
3
1A
4
IL1' 5A
5 IL2
IL2' N
6
IL1 1A
7
IL2' 5A
8 IL3
IL3'
9 N
1A
10
IL2 IL3' 5A
11 IG
12 N
IG'

IL3

Three phase current measurement; In secondary = 5 A.

Earth-current measuring via Holmgreen-connection; IGnom secondary = 5 A.
Notice!
Not recommended for isolated and compensated networks

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 45

Current Transformers (CT)

Connection example Clockwise Rotating Field

MRI4, MCI4, MRA4, MCA4 => terminal markings X3.

L1 L2 L3

X3.
1A
1
IL1' 5A
2 IL1
N
3
IL1' 1A
4
IL2' 5A
5 IL2
IL1 N
6
IL2' 1A
7
IL3' 8 5A
IL3
9 N
IL2 IL3' 1A
10
5A
11 IG
12 N
IG'
IL3

Three phase current measurement; In secondary = 1 A.

Earth-current measuring via Holmgreen-connection; IGnom secondary = 1 A.
Notice!
Not recommended for isolated and compensated networks

Page 46 EN MRA4 04/09

Current Transformers (CT)

Connection example Clockwise Rotating Field

MRI4, MCI4, MRA4, MCA4 => terminal markings X3.

L1 L2 L3

X3.
1A
1
IL1' 5A
2 IL1
3 N
IL1' 1A
4
5A
5 IL2
IL1
6 N
IL2' 1A
7
IL3' 5A
8 IL3
9 N
IL2 IL3' 1A
10
IG' 11 5A
IG
12 N

IL3

Ring Core Type Current

Transformer: Measures the
ground current. (Sum of the
three phase currents). Can
be used for measuring the
earth current in isolated and
compensated networks. The
shield is to be returned
through the ring core current
transformer.

Two phase current measurement (V-connection); In secondary = 5 A.

Earth-current measuring via cable-type current transformer ; IGnom secondary = 5 A.
Warning!
The shielding at the dismantled end of the line has to be put through the cable-type current
transformer and has to be grounded at the cable side.

Notice!
Recommended for isolated or compensated networks

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 47

Current Transformers (CT)

Connection example Anti-Clockwise Rotating Field

MRI4, MCI4, MRA4, MCA4 => terminal markings X3.

L1 L3 L2

X3.
1A
1
IL1' 5A
2 IL1
N
3
IL1' 1A
4
IL3' 5A
5 IL3
IL1 N
6
IL3' 1A
7
IL2' 5A
8 IL2
9 N
IL3 IL2' 1A
10
5A
11 IG
12 N
IG'
IL2

Three phase current measurement; In secondary = 1 A.

Earth-current measuring via Holmgreen-connection; IGnom secondary = 1 A.

Notice!
Not recommended for isolated and compensated networks

Page 48 EN MRA4 04/09

Voltage Transformers

Voltage Transformers
Check the installation direction of the VTs.

It is imperative that the secondary sides of measuring transformers be

grounded.

Check of the Voltage Measuring Values

Connect a three-phase measuring voltage equal to the rated voltage to the relay.

Take connection of the measuring transformers (star connection/delta

connection) duly into account.

Now adjust voltage values in the nominal voltage range with the corresponding nominal frequency which are not
likely to cause overvoltage- or undervoltage trips.

Compare the values shown in the device display with the readings of the measuring instruments. The deviation
must be according to the technical data.

When r.m.s. value measuring instruments are used, higher deviations can
arise if the fed voltage has a very high harmonic content. Since the device
is provided with a filter for the harmonics, only the fundamental oscillation
is evaluated (exception: thermal protection functions). If, however, a r.m.s.
value forming measuring instrument is used, the harmonics are also
measured.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 49

Voltage Transformers

Wiring Examples of the Voltage Transformers

Connection example Clockwise Rotating Field
MRA, MCA => terminal marking X4.
MRN4, MRU4, MRF4 => terminal marking X3.

L1 L2 L3

X?.
L1
1 VL1/
V31'
2 VL12
V12' L2
3 VL2/
4 VL23
V23' L3
5 VL3/
V12 N
6 VL31
V23 VL1' VL2' VL3'
7
V31 VE
8

VL1
VL2
VL3

Three-phase voltage measurement - wiring of the measurement inputs:

"star-connection"
Notice!
Calculation of the residual voltage VE is possible

Page 50 EN MRA4 04/09

Voltage Transformers

Connection example Clockwise Rotating Field

MRA, MCA => terminal marking X4.
MRN4, MRU4, MRF4 => terminal marking X3.

L1 L2 L3

X?.
L1
1 VL1/
V31' VL12
2
V12' L2
3 VL2/
4 VL23
V23' L3
5 VL3/
V12 N
6 VL31
V23 VL1' VL2' VL3'
e 7
V31 VE
n 8
VE'
VL1
VL2
VL3

Three-phase voltage measurement - wiring of the measurement inputs: "star-

connection"
Measurement of the residual voltage VE via auxilliary windings (e-n) "open delta"

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 51

Voltage Transformers

Connection example Clockwise Rotating Field

MRA, MCA => terminal marking X4.
MRN4, MRU4, MRF4 => terminal marking X3.

L1 L2 L3

X?.
L1
1 VL1/
V31'
2 VL12
V12' L2
3 VL2/
4 VL23
V23' L3
5 VL3/
V12
6 VL31
V23
7
V31 VE
8

VL1
VL2
VL3

Three-phase voltage measurement - wiring of the measurement inputs:

"delta connection"
Notice!
Calculation of the residual voltage VE is not possible

Page 52 EN MRA4 04/09

Voltage Transformers

Connection example Clockwise Rotating Field

MRA, MCA => terminal marking X4
MRN4, MRU4, MRF4 => terminal marking X3

L1 L2 L3

X?.
L1
1 VL1/
V31' VL12
2
V12' L2
3 VL2/
4 VL23
V23' L3
5 VL3/
V12 VL31
6
V23 e
7
V31 VE
n 8
VE'
VL1
VL2
VL3

Three-phase voltage measurement - wiring of the measurement inputs: "delta

connection"
Measurement of the residual voltage VE via auxilliary windings (e-n) "open delta"

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 53

Voltage Transformers

Connection example Clockwise Rotating Field

MRA, MCA => terminal marking X4
MRN4, MRU4, MRF4 => terminal marking X3

L1 L2 L3

X?.
L1
1 VL1/
V31' VL12
2
V12' L2
3 VL2/
4 VL23
V23' L3
5 VL3/
V12 VL31
6
V23 e
7
V31 VE
n 8
VE'
VL1
VL2
VL3

Three-phase voltage measurement - wiring of the measurement inputs: "delta

connection"
Measurement of the residual voltage VE via auxilliary windings (e-n) "open delta"

Page 54 EN MRA4 04/09

Voltage Transformers

Connection example Clockwise Rotating Field

MRA, MCA => terminal marking X4.
MRN4, MRU4, MRF4 => terminal marking X3.

L1 L2 L3

X?.
L1
1 VL1/
V31' VL12
2
V12' L2
3 VL2/
4 VL23
V23' L3
5 VL3/
V12 VL31
6
V23
7
V31 VE
8

Two-phase voltage measurement - wiring of the measuring

inputs: "V-connection"
Notice!
Calculation of the residual voltage VE is not possible

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 55

Connection Examples Voltage and Current Transformers

Connection Examples Voltage and Current Transformers

Connection example Clockwise Rotating Field
L3

L2

L1

L1 L2 L3
X4.
L1
1 VL1/
V31' VL12
2
V12' L2
3 VL2/
4 VL23
V23' L3
5 VL3/
V12 N VL31
6
V23 VL1' VL2' VL3'
e 7
V31 VE
n 8
VE'
VL1
VL2
VL3

X3.
L1 L2 L3
1A
1
IL1' 5A
2 IL1
N
3
IL1' 1A
4
IL2' 5A
5 IL2
N
6
IL2' 1A
7
IL3' 5A
8 IL3
9 N
IL3' 1A
10
5A
11 IG
IG' N
12
IL1 IL2 IL3

Three phase current measurement; In secondary = 1 A.

Earth-current measuring via Holmgreen-connection; IGnom secondary = 1 A.
Three-phase voltage measurement - wiring of the measurement inputs: "star-connection"
Measurement of the residual voltage VE via auxilliary windings (e-n) "open delta"

Notice!
Measuring of VE and IG is possible

Notice!
Not recommended for isolated and compensated networks

Page 56 EN MRA4 04/09

Connection Examples Voltage and Current Transformers

Connection example Clockwise Rotating Field

L3
L2
L1

X4.
L1 L2 L3 L1
1 VL1/
V31' VL12
2
V12 V12' L2
3 VL2/
4 VL23
V23 V23' L3
V31 5 VL3/
6 VL31

7
VE
8

L1 L2 L3
X3.
1A
1
IL1' 5A
2 IL1
3 N
IL1' 1A
4
5A
5 IL2
IL1 N
6
IL2'=-üIL2 1A
7
IL3' 5A
8 IL3
9 N
IL2 IL3' 1A
10
IG' 5A
11 IG
12 N

IL3

Ring Core Type Current

Transformer: Measures the
ground current. (Sum of the
three phase currents). Can
be used for measuring the
earth current in isolated and
compensated networks. The
shield is to be returned
through the ring core current
transformer.

Two-phase voltage measurement - wiring of the measuring inputs: "V-connection"

Two phase current measurement (V-connection); In secondary = 5 A.
Earth-current measuring via cable-type current transformer ; IGnom secondary = 5 A.
Warning!
The shielding at the dismantled end of the line has to be put through the cable-type current
transformer and has to be grounded at the cable side.
Notice! Notice!
Recommended for isolated or Calculation of the residual voltage VE is not
compensated networks possible

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 57

Connection Examples Voltage and Current Transformers

Connection example Anti-Clockwise Rotating Field

L2

L3

L1

L1 L3 L2
X4.
L1
1 VL1/
V21' VL12
2
V13' L3
3 VL2/
4 VL23
V32' L2
5 VL3/
N VL31
6
VL1' VL3' VL2'
e 7
VE
n 8
VE'
VL1
VL3
VL2

X3.
L1 L3 L2
1A
1
IL1' 5A
2 IL1
N
3
IL1' 1A
4
IL3' 5A
5 IL3
6 N
IL3' 1A
7
IL2' 5A
8 IL2
9 N
IL2' 1A
10
5A
11 IG
IG' N
12
IL1 IL3 IL2

Three phase current measurement; In secondary = 1 A.

Earth-current measuring via Holmgreen-connection; IGnom secondary = 1 A.
Three-phase voltage measurement - wiring of the measurement inputs: "star-connection"
Measurement of the residual voltage VE via auxilliary windings (e-n) "open delta"

Notice!
Measuring of VE and IG is possible

Notice!
Not recommended for isolated and compensated networks

Page 58 EN MRA4 04/09

Navigation - Operation

Navigation - Operation

1 2 3 4

6 7 8 9

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 59

Navigation - Operation

1 LEDs group A Messages inform you about

(left) operational conditions, system
data or other device particulars.
They additionally provide you
with information regarding
failures and functioning of the
device as well as other states
of the device and the
equipment.

Alarm signals can be freely

allocated to LEDs out of the
»assignment list«.

An overview about all alarm

signals available in the device
can be obtained from the
»ASSIGNMENT LIST« which can be
found in the appendix.

LED »System Should LED »System OK«

OK« flash red during operation,
contact the Service Dept.
immediately.

3 Display Via the display you can read-

out operational data and edit
parameters.

4 LEDs group B Messages inform you about

(right) operational conditions, system
data or other device particulars.
They additionally provide you
with information regarding
failures and functioning of the
device as well as other states
of the device and the
equipment.

Alarm signals can be freely

allocated to LEDs out of the
»assignment list« .

An overview about all alarm

signals available in the device
can be obtained from the
»assignment list« which can be
found in the appendix.

Page 60 EN MRA4 04/09

Navigation - Operation

5 Softkeys The function of the

»SOFTKEYS« are contextual.
On the bottom line of the
display the present function is
displayed/symbolized.

Possible functions are:

• Navigation

• Parameter
decrement/increment.

• Scrolling up/down a menu

page

• Moving to a digit

• Change into the parameter

setting mode »wrench
symbol«.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 61

Navigation - Operation

6 INFO Key Looking through the present

(Signals/Messa LED assignment. The direct
ges) select key can be actuated at
any time.

If the INFO key is actuated

once, the »LEFT LED SIGNALS«
are inserted, if the INFO key is
actuated again, the »RIGHT LED
SIGNALS« are inserted. If the
INFO key is actuated again you
will leave the LED menu.

Here only the first assignments

of the LEDs will be shown.
Every three seconds the
»SOFTKEYs« will be shown
(flashing).

Displaying the multiple

Assignments

If the INFO-Button is pressed

only the first assignments of
any LED is shown. Every three
seconds the »SOFTKEYs« will
be shown (flashing).

If there is more than one signal

assigned to a LED (indicated by
three dots) you can check the
state of the multiple
assignments if you proceed as
follows.

In order to show all (multiple)

assignments select a LED by
means of the »SOFTKEYs«
»up« and »down«

Via the »Softkey« »right« call

up a Submenu of this LED that
gives you detailed information
on the state of all signals
assigned to this LED. An arrow
symbol points to the LED
whose assignments are
currently displayed.

Via the »SOFTKEYs« »up«

and »down« you can call up the
next / previous LED.

In order to leave the LED menu

press the »SOFTKEY« »left«
multiple times.

Page 62 EN MRA4 04/09

Navigation - Operation

7 »C Key« To abort changes and to ac-

knowledge messages.

In order to reset please press

the Softkey »wrench« and
enter the password.

The reset menu can be left by

pressing the Softkey »Arrow-
left«

8 RS232 Connection to software Smart

Interface view is done via the RS232
(Smart view interface.
Connection)

9 »OK Key« When using the »OK« key

parameter changes are
temporarily stored. If the »OK«
key is pressed again, those
changes are stored definitely.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 63

Navigation - Operation

Basic Menu Control

The graphic user interface is equivalent to a hierarchical structured menu tree. For access to the individual
submenus the »SOFTKEYS«/Navigation Keys are used. The function of the »SOFTKEYS« can be found as
symbol in the footer of the display.

Softkey Description
• Via »SOFTKEY« »up« you will come to the prior menu point/one parameter up by scrolling
upwards.
• Via »SOFTKEY« »left« you will go one step back.

• Via »SOFTKEY« »down« you will change to the next menu point/one parameter down by
scrolling downwards.
• Via »SOFTKEY« »right« you will come to a submenu.

• Via »SOFTKEY« »Top of list« you will jump directly to the top of a list.

• Via »SOFTKEY« »Bottom of list« you will jump directly to the end of a list.

• Via »SOFTKEY« »+«the related digit will be incremented. (Continuous pressure -> fast).

• Via »SOFTKEY« »-«the related digit will be decremented. (Continuous pressure -> fast)

• Via »SOFTKEY« »left« you will go one digit to the left.

• Via »SOFTKEY« »right« you will go one digit to the right.

• Via »SOFTKEY« »Parameter setting« you will call up the parameter setting mode.

• Via »SOFTKEY« »delete« data will be deleted.

In order to return to the main menu, just keep pressing the Softkey »Arrow-Left« until you arrive at the »main
menu».

Page 64 EN MRA4 04/09

Navigation - Operation

Smart view Keyboard Commands

You can control Smart view alternatively by means of keyboard commands (instead of the mouse)

Key Description
á Moving up within the navigation tree or parameter list.

â Moving down within the navigation tree or parameter list.

ß Collapse the tree item or select a folder on a higher level.

à Expands the tree item or selects a subfolder.

Numpad + Expands the tree item.

Numpad - Collapses the tree item.

Home Moves to the top of the active window.

End Moves to the bottom of the active window.

Ctrl+O Opens the file opening dialog. Browsing through the file system for an existing device
file.
Ctrl+N Creates a new parameter file file by means of a template.

Ctrl+S Saves actual loaded parameter file.

F1 Displays the online help information.

F2 Load Device Data

F5 Reloads the displayed data of a device.

Ctrl+F5 Enables automatic refresh.

Ctrl+Shift+T Back to the navigation window.

Ctrl+F6 Walks through the tabular forms (detail windows).

Page á Previous value (parameter setting).

Page â Next value (parameter setting).

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 65

Smart View

Smart View
Smart view is a parameter setting and evaluation software.

• Menu-controlled parameter setting incl. validity checks

• Offline configuration of all relay types
• Reading and evaluating of statistical data and measuring values
• Setting into operation assistance
• Display of the device status
• Fault analysis via event- and fault recorder

Smart view is available in two different versions (with and without Data
Visualizer (optionally to analyze disturbance records).

• Basic Edition
• Standard Edition (option to analyze disturbance records)

Installation of Smart View

Port 52152 must not be blocked by a Firewall

If the Windows Vista User Access Control pops up while installing Smart
view, please “Allow” all installation requirements concerning Smart view.

System requirements:
Windows 2000 or compatible (e.g. Windows XP or Vista)

• Double-click on the installation file with the left mouse button.

• Select a language for the installation procedure.

• Confirm by pressing the »Continue« button in the INFO frame.

• Select an installation path or confirm the standard installation path by mouse click on the »Continue«
button.

• Confirm the entry for the suggested installation folder by mouse click on the »Continue« button.

• By mouse click on the »Install« button, the installation routine is started.

• Close the installation procedure by mouse click on the »Complete« button.

Now you can call up the program via [Start>Programs>Woodward SEG>HighPROTEC>Smart view].

Page 66 EN MRA4 04/09

Smart View

Uninstalling Smart view

Via the menu [Start>System Control >Software] the Smart view can be removed from your computer.

Switching the Language of the Graphical User Interface

Within the menu Settings/Language, you can change the language of the graphical user interface.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 67

Smart View

Setting up the Connection PC - Device

Set-up a Connection via Ethernet - TCP/IP

Establishing a connection via TCP/IP to the device is only possible if your

device is equipped with an Ethernet Interface (RJ45).

Contact your IT administrator in order to establish the network connection.

Part 1: Set the TCP/IP Parameters at the panel (Device)

Call up the menu »Device parameter/TCP/IP« at the HMI (panel) and set the following parameters:

• TCP/IP address

• Subnetmask

• Gateway

Part 2: Setting the IP address within Smart view

• Call up the menu Settings/Device Connection within Smart view.

• Set radio button Network Connection.

• Enter the IP-Address of the device that should be connected.

Page 68 EN MRA4 04/09

Smart View

Set-up a Connection via Serial Interface under Windows 2000

After installation of the software, the »Connection PC/Notebook to the Device« has to be configured once, so
that you are able to read device data or re-write them into the device by means of the software Smart view.

For connection of your PCs/notebooks with the device you need a special
zero-modem cable (no serial cable!/please refer to chapter »Zero Modem
Cable«).

If your PC/notebook does not have a serial interface, you need a special
USB-to-serial-adapter. Only if the USB-to-serial-adapter is correctly
installed - aided by the provided CD – the communication with the device
can be established. (see next chapter).

The connection Notebook/PC to the device must not be

protected/encrypted via a smartcard.

If the network connection wizard asks you, to encrypt the connection via a
smartcard or not, please choose »Do not use the smartcard«.

Setting up/Configuring the connection

• Connect your PC/notebook with the device via a zero-modem cable.

• Start the software Smart view.

• Select the menu point »Device Connection« in menu »Settings«.

• Click on »Serial Connection«.

• Click button »Settings«.

• When initially setting up the connection, a dialogue window appears with the information that, so far, a
direct connection with your protection device has not been established. Click on »Yes«.

• If, so far, a location has not been set up on your PC, your location information has to be put in. Confirm
the pop-up window »Telephone and Modem Options« with »OK«.

• The Windows network connection assistant appears after the location information is set up. Select the
connection type »Establish direct connection to another computer«.

• Select the serial interface (COM-Port) where the device shall be connected to.

• Select »To be used for all users« in window »Availability of the connection«.

• Do not change the connection name appearing in window »Name of the connection« and click the button
»Complete«.

• Finally you arrive again in window »Device Installation« from where you started establishing the
connection. Confirm the adjustments by clicking the »OK« button.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 69

Smart View

Due to an bug in Windows 2000 it is possible that the automatically made

communication settings are not correctly adopted. In order to overcome
this problem, proceed as follows after setting up the serial connection:

• Select menu point »Device Connection« in menu »Settings«.

• Select »Serial Connection«.

• Click button »Settings«.

• Change to register card »General«.

• Ensure that »Communication cable between two computers Com X

is selected in the »Drop Down Menu«. X = interface number where
you have connected the zero-modem cable to.

• Click button »Configure«.

• Ensure that the »Hardware Flowing Control« is activated.

• Ensure that baud rate »115200« is selected.

Page 70 EN MRA4 04/09

Smart View

Set up a Connection via Serial Interface under Windows XP

After installation of the software, the »Connection PC/Notebook to the Device« has to be configured once so that
you are able to read device data or re-write them into the device by means of the software Smart view.

For connection of your PCs/notebooks with the device, you need a zero-
modem cable (no serial cable!/please refer to chapter »Zero Modem
Cable«).

If your PC/notebook does not have a serial interface, you need a special
»USB-to-serial-adapter«. Only if the »USB-to-serial-adapter« is correctly
installed - aided by the provided CD – the communication with the device
can be established. (see next chapter).

Setting up/Configuring the connection

• Connect your PC/notebook with the device via a zero-modem cable.

• Start the software Smart view.

• Select the menu point »Device Connection« in menu »Settings«.

• Click on »Serial Connection«.

• Click button »Settings«.

• When initially setting up the connection, a dialogue window appears with the information that, so far, a
direct connection with your protection device has not been established. Click on »Yes«.

• If, so far, a location has not been set up on your PC, your location information has to be put in. Confirm
the following pop-up window »Telephone and Modem Options« with »OK«.

• The Windows network connection assistant appears after the location information is set up. Select the
connection type »Establish direct connection to another computer«.

• Select the serial interface (COM-Port) where the device shall be connected to.

• Select »To be used for all users« in window »Availability of the connection«.

• Do not change the connection name appearing in window »Name of the connection« and click the button
»Complete«.

• Finally you arrive again in window »Device Installation« from where you started establishing the
connection. Confirm the adjustments by clicking the »OK« button.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 71

Smart View

Set up a Connection via Serial Interface under Windows Vista

Establishing the connection between Smart view and the device is a three step procedure.

1. Installing Smart view (the application itself)

2. Installing a (virtual) modem (that is a precondition for TCP/IP communication via a zero-modem cable)/
(to be done within the control panel).

3. Establishing a network connection between Smart view and the device

(to be done within Smart view).

1. Installlation of Smart view (the application itself).

Please see above.

2. Installation of the (virtual) modem

• Call up the »Control Panel«

• Choose »Hardware & Sound«

• Choose »Phone & Modem Options«

• Go to Tab »Modem«

• Click on the »Add« button

• A new window Install new modem pops up

• Set the check box Don´t detect my modem

• Choose» I will select from list«

• Click on the »Next« button

• Choose the correct COM-Port

• Click on the »Next« button

• Select Computer cable between two computers

• Click on the »Properties« button

• Go to Tab »General«

• Click on the »Change Settings« button

• Go to Tab »Modem«

• Set within the Drop-Down Menu the correct baud rate = 115200

• Click on the »OK« button

• Click on the »OK« button

• You have to reboot your computer now!

Page 72 EN MRA4 04/09

Smart View

3. Establishing a network connection between Smart view and the device

• Connect the device to the PC/notebook via a correct Zero-Modem-Cable.

• Run Smart view.

• Call up »Device Connection« within the menu »Device Connection«.

• Click on the »Settings« button.

• A wizard will pop up asking you How do you want to connect.

• Choose »Dial-up«.

• The Telephone number must not be empty. Please enter any number (e.g. 1).

• Don´t care about the username and password.

• Click on the »OK« button.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 73

Smart View

Connected to the Device and Calling up Websites at the same Time

In principle, it is possible to call up websites while there is an active connection to the device.

If your computer has no direct connection to the internet, that means, that it is placed behind a proxy server, the
device connection has to be modified in certain circumstances. The device connection has to be provided with
the proxy settings.

Internet Explorer
For each connection the proxy settings have to be set manually. Please proceed as follows:

• Start your Internet Explorer.

• Call up the »Tools« menu.

• Call up the menu »Internet options«.

• Call up the tab »Connections«.

• Click with the left hand mouse key on the button »Settings« on the right of the »HighPROTEC-Device-
Connection«.

• Set the check box »Use Proxy Server for this connection.

• Enter the proxy settings that are available by your network administrator.

• Confirm the settings by pressing »OK«.

Firefox
The proxy settings are centrally managed, so there is no need to modify any settings.

Establishing the Connection via a USB-/RS232-Adapter

If your PC/notebook is not provided with a serial interface, this can be compensated by a special USB-/RS232-
Adapter+Zero Modem-Cable.

Only an adapter accepted by Woodward SEG may be used. First install the
adapter (with the related driver that you can find on the CD) and then
establish the connection (Smart view => Device). The adapters must
support very high speed.

Page 74 EN MRA4 04/09

Smart View

Smart view Troubleshooting

• Make sure whether the Windows service Telephony is started. In [Start>System Control >Administration
>Services] the service »Telephony« must be visible and must have also been started. If not, the service
has to be started.

• For establishing the connection, you need to have sufficient rights (administration rights).

• If a firewall is installed on your computer, TCP/IP port 52152 must have been released.

• If your computer is not provided with a serial interface, you need a USB-to-serial-adapter, accepted by
Woodward SEG. This adapter has to be properly installed.

• Ensure that a zero-modem cable is used (a standard serial cable without control wires does not enable
communication).

If on a »WINDOWS XP computer a serial interface for direct connection to

another computer has not been established so far, the following problem
can arise:

If you have selected a serial interface in the connection assistant, it may

happen that this is not entered correctly in the dial-up network due to an
bug in the Windows operating system. Your attention is drawn to this
problem by the operational software and the error message »Warning,
invalid connection setting« will be shown.

To solve this problem, you need administration rights.

Please proceed as follows:

• Select menu point »Device Connection« in menu »Settings«.

• Select »Serial Connection«.

• Click button »Settings«.

• Change to register card »General«.

• Ensure that »Communication cable between two computers (Com X)“ is

selected in the »Drop Down Menu«. »X« = interface number where you
have connected the zero-modem cable to.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 75

Smart View

If the message »Warning, invalid connection settings« appears during

establishing the connection, this indicates that the connection adjustments
you have chosen are not correct.

On this warning you can react as follows:

»Yes«: (to set up the connection completely new).

By this, all adjustments are cancelled and the connection assistant is
opened again for renewed adjustment of the connection to the device.

This procedure is advisable in case basic adjustments cannot be modified

via the characteristics dialogue (e.g. if a new additional serial interface has
been installed on the system).

»No«: (to modify the existing dial-up network entry).

Opens the dialogue for characteristics of the connection settings. During
the dialogue it is possible to correct invalid settings (e.g. the recommended
baud rate).

»Cancel«:
The warning is ignored and the connection adjustments remain as they are.
This procedure is accepted for a limited time, but in such a case, the user is
obliged to establish a correct connection later on.

Page 76 EN MRA4 04/09

Smart View

Smart view persistent connection problems

In case of persistent connection problems you should remove all connection settings and establish them again
afterwards. In order to remove all connection settings please proceed as follows:

1. Remove the settings for the Dial-up Network

• Close Smart view

• Call up the »Control Panel«

• Choose »Network & Internet«

• On the left side click on »Manage Network Connections«

•
• Click on HighPROTEC Direct Connection with the right hand mouse key
•
• Choose Delete from the shortcut menu

• Click on the OK button

2. Remove the virtual modem

• Call up the »Control Panel«

• Choose »Hardware & Sound«

• Choose »Phone & Modem Options«

• Go to Tab Modem

• Click on the correct (in case there is more than one) entry Connection cable between two com-
puters

• Click on the Remove button

Loading of Device Data when using Smart view

• Starting of the Smart view.

• Make sure the connection has been established properly.

• Connect your PC with the device via a zero-modem cable.

• Select »Receiving Data From The Device« in menu »Device«.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 77

Smart View

Restoring of Device Data when using Smart view

Via the button »Transfer only modified parameters into the device« only
modified parameters are transmitted into the device.

Parameter modifications are indicated by a red “star symbol” in front of the

parameter.

The star symbol (in the device tree window) indicates that parameters in the
opened file (within smart view) differ from parameters stored on your local
hard disk.

Via the button »Transfer only modified parameters into the device«, you can
transmit all parameters that are marked by this symbol.

If a parameter file is saved on your local hard drive, these parameters are
no longer classified to be modified and cannot be transmitted via the
button »Transfer only modified parameters into the device«.

In case that you have loaded and modified a parameter file from the device
and saved it to your local hard drive without transferring the parameters
into the device beforehand, you cannot use the button »Transfer only
modified parameters into the device«. In a case like that, use »Transfer all
parameters into the device«.

The button »Transfer only modified parameters into the device« only works
if modified parameters are available in the Smart view.

In contrast to that, all parameters of the device are transferred when the
button »Transfer all parameters into the device« is pressed (provided all
device parameters are valid).

• In order to (re-)transfer changed parameters into the device, please select »Transfer all parameters into
the device« in menu »Device«.

• Confirm the safety inquiry »Shall the parameters be overwritten into the device?“«.

• Enter the password for setting parameters in the popup window.

• Thereafter the changed data is transferred to the device and adopted.

• Confirm the inquiry »Parameters successfully updated. It is recommended to save the parameters into a
local file on your hard drive. Shall The Data Be Saved Locally?“« with »Yes« (recommended). Select a
suitable folder on your hard disk.

• Confirm the chosen folder by clicking »Save«.

• The changed parameter data is now saved in the folder chosen by you.

Page 78 EN MRA4 04/09

Smart View

Backup and Documentation when using Smart view

How to save device data on a PC:

Click on »Save as ...« in menu »File«. Specify a name, choose a folder on your hard disk and save the device
data accordingly.

Printing of Device Data When using Smart view (Setting List)

The »Printing menu« offers the following options:

• Printer setting
• Page preview
• Printing
• Export the selected printing range into a txt-file.

The printing menu of the Smart view software offers contextual different types of printing ranges.

• Printing of the complete parameter tree:

All values and parameters of the present parameter file are printed.

• Printing of the displayed working window:

Only the data shown on the relevant working window are printed, i.e. this applies, if at least one window
is opened.

• Printing of all opened working windows:

The data shown on all windows are printed, i.e. this applies only if more than one window is opened.

• Printing of the device parameter tree as from a shown position on:

All data and parameters of the device parameter tree are printed as from the position/marking in the
navigation window. Below this selection the complete name of the marking is additionally displayed.

Saving Data as a txt-file via Smart view

Within the print menu [File>Print] you can choose »Export into File« in order to export the device data into a text-
file.

Only the actual selected printing range will be exported into a text-file. That
means: If you have chosen the “Complete device parameter tree” then the
“Complete device parameter tree” will be exported. But, if you have chosen
“Actual working window”, only this window will be exported.

You can print out operating data but not export them.

If you export a txt-file, the content of this file is encoded as Unicode. That
means that, if you want to edit this file, your application must support
Unicode encoded files (e.g. Microsoft Office 2003 or higher).

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 79

Smart View

Offline Device Planning via Smart view

In order to be able to transmit a parameter file (e.g. offline created) into the
device the following issues must comply:

• Type Code (written on the top of the device/type label) and

• Version of the device model (can be found in menu

[Device Parameters\Version].

The Smart view software enables also to parameterize offline. The advantage is: By using device models you
can do planning jobs for a device and set parameters in advance.

You can also read the parameter file out of the device, further process it offline (e.g. from your office) and finally
re-transfer it to the device.

You can either:

• load an existing parameter file from a device (please refer to chapter [Loading device data when using
Smart view]).
• create a new parameter file (see below),
• open a locally saved parameter file (backup).

In order to create a new device/parameter file by way of a device template offline:

• In order to create a new offline parameter file please choose within the »file-menu« »create new
parameter file«.

• A working window pops up. Please make sure, that you select the right device type with the correct
version and configuration.

• Finally click on »Apply«

• In order to save the device configuration select »Save« out of the »File-Menu«.

• Within the menu »Modify Device Configuration (Typecode)« you can modify the device configuration or
simply find out the type code of your current selection.

If you want to transfer the parameter file into a device, please refer to chapter “Restoring of device data when
using Smart view”.

Page 80 EN MRA4 04/09

Measuring Values

Measuring Values

Read out Measured Values

In menu »Operation/Measured Values« both measured and calculated values can be viewed. The measured
values are ordered by »Standard values« and »special values« (depending on the type of device).

Read out of Measured Values via Smart view

• In case Smart view is not running – please start it.

• If the device data were not yet loaded – select »Receive Data From The Device« from menu »Device«.

• Double click on icon »Operation« in the navigation tree.

• Double click on icon »Measured Values« within the navigation tree »Operation«.

• Double click the »Standard Values« or special values within the »Measured values«.

• The measured and calculated values are shown now in tabular form on the window.

To have the measuring data read in a cyclic manner, select »Auto refresh«
in menu »View«. The measured values are read out about every two
seconds.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 81

Measuring Values

Standard Measured Values

Value Description Menu path
f Measured value: Frequency [Operation
/Measured values
/Standard values]
VL12 Measured value: Phase-to-phase [Operation
voltage
/Measured values
/Standard values]
VL23 Measured value: Phase-to-phase [Operation
voltage
/Measured values
/Standard values]
VL31 Measured value: Phase-to-phase [Operation
voltage
/Measured values
/Standard values]
VL1 Measured value: Phase-to-neutral [Operation
voltage
/Measured values
/Standard values]
VL2 Measured value: Phase-to-neutral [Operation
voltage
/Measured values
/Standard values]
VL3 Measured value: Phase-to-neutral [Operation
voltage
/Measured values
/Standard values]
VE meas Measured value (measured): VE [Operation
measured
/Measured values
/Standard values]
VE calc Measured value (calculated): VE [Operation
/Measured values
/Standard values]
V0 Measured value (calculated): [Operation
Symmetrical components Zero
/Measured values
voltage
/Standard values]
V1 Measured value (calculated): [Operation
Symmetrical components positive
/Measured values
phase sequence voltage
/Standard values]
V2 Measured value (calculated): [Operation
Symmetrical components negative
/Measured values
phase sequence voltage
/Standard values]

Page 82 EN MRA4 04/09

Measuring Values

IL1 Measured value: Phase current [Operation

(fundamental)
/Measured values
/Standard values]
IL2 Measured value: Phase current [Operation
(fundamental)
/Measured values
/Standard values]
IL3 Measured value: Phase current [Operation
(fundamental)
/Measured values
/Standard values]
IG meas Measured value (measured): IG [Operation
(fundamental)
/Measured values
/Standard values]
IG calc Measured value (calculated): IG [Operation
(fundamental)
/Measured values
/Standard values]
I0 Measured value (calculated): Zero [Operation
current (fundamental)
/Measured values
/Standard values]
I1 Measured value (calculated): [Operation
Positive phase sequence current
/Measured values
(fundamental)
/Standard values]
I2 Measured value (calculated): [Operation
Unbalanced load current
/Measured values
(fundamental)
/Standard values]
IL1 H2 Measured value: 2nd harmonic/1st [Operation
harmonic of IL1
/Measured values
/Standard values]
IL2 H2 Measured value: 2nd harmonic/1st [Operation
harmonic of IL2
/Measured values
/Standard values]
IL3 H2 Measured value: 2nd harmonic/1st [Operation
harmonic of IL3
/Measured values
/Standard values]
IG H2 Measured value: 2nd harmonic/1st [Operation
harmonic of IG
/Measured values
/Standard values]

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 83

Measuring Values

Value Description Menu path

S Measured value (calculated): [Operation
Apparent power (S+ = Fed
/Measured values
Apparent Power, S- = Consumpted
Apparent Power) /Standard values]
P Measured value (calculated): Active [Operation
power (P+ = Fed Active Power, P- =
/Measured values
Consumpted Active Power)
/Standard values]
Q Measured value (calculated): [Operation
Reactive power (Q+ = Fed Reactive
/Measured values
Power, Q- = Consumpted Reactive
Power) /Standard values]
cos phi Measured value (calculated): Power [Operation
factor
/Measured values
/Standard values]
Wp+ Positive Active Power (Fed Energy) [Operation
/Measured values
/Standard values]
Wp- Negative Active Power is consumed [Operation
active energy
/Measured values
/Standard values]
Wq+ Positive Reactive Power (Fed [Operation
Energy)
/Measured values
/Standard values]
Wq- Negative Reactive Power is [Operation
consumed reactive energy
/Measured values
/Standard values]

Page 84 EN MRA4 04/09

Energy Counter

Energy Counter
PowerCr

Global Parameters of the Energy Counter Module

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
S, P, Q Cutoff Level The 0.0 - 0.100Sn 0.005Sn [Device Para
Active/Reactive/App
/Measurem Display]
arent Power shown
in the Display or
within the PC
Software will be
displayed as zero, if
the absolute value of
the corresponding
Power falls below
this Cutoff Level.
This parameter has
no impact on
recorders.

Direct Commands of the Energy Counter Module

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
Wp+ Reset Cr Wp+ Reset Counter inactive, inactive [Operation
active /Reset]

Wp- Reset Cr Wp- Reset Counter inactive, inactive [Operation

active /Reset]

Wq+ Reset Cr Wq+ Reset Counter inactive, inactive [Operation

active /Reset]

Wq- Reset Cr Wq- Reset Counter inactive, inactive [Operation

active /Reset]

Res all Energy Cr Reset of all Energy inactive, inactive [Operation

Counters
active /Reset]

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 85

Energy Counter

Signals of the Energy Counter Module (States of the Outputs)

Name Description
Cr Overflow Wp+ Signal: Counter Overflow Wp+
Cr Overflow Wp- Signal: Counter Overflow Wp-
Cr Overflow Wq+ Signal: Counter Overflow Wq+
Cr Overflow Wq- Signal: Counter Overflow Wq-
Wp+ Reset Cr Signal: Wp+ Reset Counter
Wp- Reset Cr Signal: Wp- Reset Counter
Wq+ Reset Cr Signal: Wq+ Reset Counter
Wq- Reset Cr Signal: Wq- Reset Counter
Res all Energy Cr Signal: Reset of all Energy Counters

Page 86 EN MRA4 04/09

Statistics

Statistics
Statistics

In menu »Operation/Statistics« the min., max. and mean values of the measured and calculated measured
quantities can be found. The statistics are ordered by »Standard values« and »special values« (depending on
the type of device and the device planning).

In menu »Device Parameter/Statistics« you can either set a fixed synchronization time and a calculation interval
or start and stop the statistics via a function (e.g. digital input).

Read out Statistics

• Call up the main menu.

• Call up the submenu »Operation/Statistics«.

• Call up the »Standard values« or »Special values«

Statistics to be Read-Out via Smart view

• In case Smart view is not running – please start it.

• If device data have not yet been loaded – click »Receive Data From The Device« in menu »Device«.

• Double click on icon »Operation« in the navigation tree

• Double click on icon »Statistics« within the navigation tree »Operation«

• Double click on icon »Standard values« or »Special values«

• In the window the statistical data is shown in tabular form

The values can be read out cyclically. For this purpose, please select »Auto Refresh« out of the menu »View«.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 87

Statistics

Statistics (Configuration)
The Statistic-module can be configured within the menu »Device Parameter/Statistics«.

The time interval, that is taken into account for the calculation of the statistics can either be limited by a fixed
duration or it can be limited by a start function (freely assignable signal from the »assignment list«).

Fixed duration:

If the statistic module is set to a fixed duration/time interval, the minimum, maximum and average values
will be calculated and displayed continuously on the basis of this duration/time interval.

Start function (flexible duration):

If the statistic module is to be started by a start function the statistics will be updated not until the start
function becomes true (rising edge). At the same time a new time interval will be started.

Statistics (Configuration) via Smart view

In case Smart view is not running – please start it

• If device data has not been loaded yet – click »Receive Data From The Device« in menu »Device«

• Double click on icon »Device Parameter« in the navigation tree

• Double click on icon »Statistics« within the navigation tree »Device Parameter«

• Configure the Statistics-module

Page 88 EN MRA4 04/09

Statistics

Direct Commands
Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
Reset Reset of statistics inactive, inactive [Operation
active /Reset]

Standard Statistic Values

Value Description Menu path

f max Max. frequency value [Operation
/Statistics
/Standard values]
f avg Average frequency value [Operation
/Statistics
/Standard values]
f min Min. frequency value [Operation
/Statistics
/Standard values]
VL12 max VL12 maximum value [Operation
/Statistics
/Standard values]
VL12 avg VL12 average value [Operation
/Statistics
/Standard values]
VL12 min VL12 minimum value [Operation
/Statistics
/Standard values]
VL23 max VL23 maximum value [Operation
/Statistics
/Standard values]
VL23 avg VL23 average value [Operation
/Statistics
/Standard values]
VL23 min VL23 minimum value [Operation
/Statistics
/Standard values]
VL31 max VL31 maximum value [Operation
/Statistics
/Standard values]

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 89

Statistics

VL31 avg VL31 average value [Operation

/Statistics
/Standard values]
VL31 min VL31 minimum value [Operation
/Statistics
/Standard values]
VL1 max VL1 maximum value [Operation
/Statistics
/Standard values]
VL1 avg VL1 average value [Operation
/Statistics
/Standard values]
VL1 min VL1 minimum value [Operation
/Statistics
/Standard values]
VL2 max VL2 maximum value [Operation
/Statistics
/Standard values]
VL2 avg VL2 average value [Operation
/Statistics
/Standard values]
VL2 min VL2 minimum value [Operation
/Statistics
/Standard values]
VL3 max VL3 maximum value [Operation
/Statistics
/Standard values]
VL3 avg VL3 average value [Operation
/Statistics
/Standard values]
VL3 min VL3 minimum value [Operation
/Statistics
/Standard values]
V1 max Maximum value: Symmetrical [Operation
components positive phase
/Statistics
sequence voltage
/Standard values]
V1 avg Average value: Symmetrical [Operation
components positive phase
/Statistics
sequence voltage
/Standard values]

Page 90 EN MRA4 04/09

Statistics

V1 min Minimum value: Symmetrical [Operation

components positive phase
/Statistics
sequence voltage
/Standard values]
V2 max Maximum value: Symmetrical [Operation
components negative phase
/Statistics
sequence voltage
/Standard values]
V2 avg Average value: Symmetrical [Operation
components negative phase
/Statistics
sequence voltage
/Standard values]
V2 min Minimum value: Symmetrical [Operation
components negative phase
/Statistics
sequence voltage
/Standard values]
IL1 max IL1 maximum value (fundamental) [Operation
/Statistics
/Standard values]
IL1 avg IL1 average value (fundamental) [Operation
/Statistics
/Standard values]
IL1 min IL1 minimum value (fundamental) [Operation
/Statistics
/Standard values]
IL2 max IL2 maximum value (fundamental) [Operation
/Statistics
/Standard values]
IL2 avg IL2 average value (fundamental) [Operation
/Statistics
/Standard values]
IL2 min IL2 minimum value (fundamental) [Operation
/Statistics
/Standard values]
IL3 max IL3 maximum value (fundamental) [Operation
/Statistics
/Standard values]
IL3 avg IL3 average value (fundamental) [Operation
/Statistics
/Standard values]
IL3 min IL3 minimum value (fundamental) [Operation
/Statistics
/Standard values]

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 91

Statistics

I1 max Maximum value positive phase [Operation

sequence current (fundamental)
/Statistics
/Standard values]
I1 avg Average value positive phase [Operation
sequence current (fundamental)
/Statistics
/Standard values]
I1 min Minimum value positive phase [Operation
sequence current (fundamental)
/Statistics
/Standard values]
I2 max Maximum value unbalanced load [Operation
(fundamental)
/Statistics
/Standard values]
I2 avg Average value unbalanced load [Operation
current (fundamental)
/Statistics
/Standard values]
I2 min Minimum value unbalanced load [Operation
current (fundamental)
/Statistics
/Standard values]

Page 92 EN MRA4 04/09

Statistics

Value Description Menu path

S max Maximum value of the apparent [Operation
power
/Statistics
/Standard values]
S avg Average of the apparent power [Operation
/Statistics
/Standard values]
S min Minimum value of the apparent [Operation
power
/Statistics
/Standard values]
P max Maximum value of the active power [Operation
/Statistics
/Standard values]
P avg Average of the active power [Operation
/Statistics
/Standard values]
P min Minimum value of the active power [Operation
/Statistics
/Standard values]
Q max Maximum value of the reactive [Operation
power
/Statistics
/Standard values]
Q avg Average of the reactive power [Operation
/Statistics
/Standard values]
Q min Minimum value of the reactive [Operation
power
/Statistics
/Standard values]
cos phi max Maximum value of the power factor [Operation
/Statistics
/Standard values]
cos phi avg Average of the power factor [Operation
/Statistics
/Standard values]
cos phi min Minimum value of the power factor [Operation
/Statistics
/Standard values]

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 93

Statistics

Global Protection Parameters of the Statistics Module

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
Start via: Start statistics by: Duration, Duration [Device Para
StartFct /Statistics]

StartFct Update the displayed 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para

statistics and start
new measuring /Statistics]
interval if the
assigned signal
becomes true (rising
edge):

Only available if:

Start via: = StartFct
ResetFct Reset of statistics if 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
the assigned signal
/Statistics]
becomes true
(slope):

Duration Recording time 15 s, 15 s [Device Para

Only available if: 30 s, /Statistics]

Start via: = Duration 1 min,
10 min,
30 min,
1 h,
2 h,
6 h,
12 h,
1 d,
2 d,
5 d,
7 d,
10 d,
30 d

Page 94 EN MRA4 04/09

Statistics

States of the Inputs of the Statistics Module

Name Description Assignment via
StartFct-I Module input state: Start statistics [Device Para
Module input signal
/Statistics]
ResetFct-I Module input state: Reset statistics [Device Para
Module input signal
/Statistics]

Signals of the Statistics Module

Name Description
Reset Signal: Reset of statistics

Counters of the Module Statistics

Value Description Menu path
MeasPointNo Each measuring point that is taken [Operation
over by the statistics increments
/Count and RevData
this counter. By means of this
counter, the User can check /Statistics]
whether the statistics are alive and
if data are being acquired.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 95

Acknowledgments

Acknowledgments
Collective Acknowledgments for latched signals:

Collective Acknowledgments

LEDs Binary Output SCADA Pending LEDs+

Relays Trip Command
Binary Output
Relays+
SCADA+
Pending
Trip Command
Via Smart view All LEDs at once: All Binary Output All SCADA All pending trip All at once:
or at the panel Relays at once: signals at once: commands at
Where? Where?
all... once:
[Operation\ Where? Where? [Operation\
can be
Acknowledge] [Operation\ [Operation\ Where? Acknowledge]
acknowledged.
Acknowledge] Acknowledge] [Operation\
Acknowledge]
At the panel, the
menu
[Operation\
Acknowledge]
can directly be
accessed via the
»C« key
External All LEDs at once: All Binary Output All SCADA All pending trip
Acknowledg- Relays at once: signals at once: commands at
ment: once:
Where? Within
Via a signal from
the menu Where? Within Where? Within
the assignment
Ex Acknowledge the menu the menu Where? Within
list (e.g. a digital
Ex Acknowledge Ex Acknowledge the menu
Input) all... can
Ex Acknowledge
be
acknowledged.

Page 96 EN MRA4 04/09

Acknowledgments

Options for individual acknowledgments for latched signals:

Individual Acknowledgment

LEDs Binary Output Relays Pending

Trip Command
Via a signal from the Single LED: Binary Output Relay: Pending Trip Command.
assignment list (e.g.:a
Where?
digital Input) a single...
Within the module
can be acknowledged. Where? Where?
TripControl
Within the configuration Within the configuration
menu of this single LED. menu of this single Binary
Output Relay.

As long as you are within the parameter setting mode, you cannot
acknowledge.

In case of a fault during parameter setting via the operating panel, you must
first leave the parameter mode by pressing either push-button »C« or »OK«
before you may access to menu »Acknowledgments« via push-button.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 97

Acknowledgments

Manual Acknowledgment
• Press the C-Button at the panel.
• Select the item to be acknowledged via the Softkeys:

• Binary output relays,

• LEDs,
• SCADA,
• a pending trip command or
• all (above) mentioned items at once.

• Press the Softkey with the »Wrench-Symbol«.

• Enter your password.

Manual Acknowledgment via Smart view

• In case Smart view is not running – please start it

• If the device data were not yet loaded – select »Receive Data From The Device« from menu »Device«

• Double click on icon »Operation« in the navigation tree.

• Double click on icon »Acknowledgment« within the operation menu.

• Double click the entry within the popup that is to be acknowledged.

• Press the button »Execute immediately«.

• Enter your password.

Page 98 EN MRA4 04/09

Acknowledgments

External Acknowledgments
Within the menu [Ex Acknowledge] you can assign a signal (e.g. the state of a digital input) from the assignment
list that:

• acknowledges all (acknowledgeable) LEDs at once;

• acknowledges all (acknowledgeable) binary outputs at once:
• acknowledges all (acknowledgeable) SCADA-signals at once.

Ack LED
Ex Acknowledge.Ack LED
1..n, Assignment List

Ack BO
Ex Acknowledge.Ack BO
1..n, Assignment List

Ack Scada
Ex Acknowledge.Ack Scada
1..n, Assignment List

Within the menu [Protection Para\Global Prot Para\TripControl] you can assign a signal that:

• acknowledges a pending trip command.

For details, please refer to chapter »TripControl«.

External Acknowledge via Smart view

In case Smart view is not running – please start it.

• If the device data were not yet loaded – select »Receive Data From The Device« from menu »Device«

• Double click on icon »Device Parameter« in the navigation tree

• Double click on icon »Ex Acknowledge« within the operation menu

• In the working window you can assign now each one signal that resets all acknowledgeable LEDs, a
signal that resets all binary outputs, a signal that resets the SCADA-signals respectively a signal that
acknowledges a pending trip command.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 99

Manual Resets

Manual Resets
In menu »Operation/Reset« you can:

• reset counters,
• delete records (e.g. disturbance records) and
• reset special things (like statistics, thermal replica...).

The description of the reset commands can be found within the

corresponding modules.

Manual Resets via Smart view

• In case Smart view is not running – please start it

• If device data has not been loaded yet – click »Receive Data From The Device« in menu »Device«

• Double click the »Operation« icon in the navigation tree

• Double click the »Reset icon« within the operation menu

• Double click the entry within the popup that is to be reset or deleted.

The description of the reset commands can be found within the

corresponding modules.

Page 100 EN MRA4 04/09

Assignment List

Assignment List
The »ASSIGNMENT LIST« below summarizes all module outputs (signals) and inputs (e.g. states of the assignments).

Name Description
-.- No assignment
Prot.available Signal: Protection is available
Prot.active Signal: active
Prot.ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
Prot.Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
Prot.ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
Prot.Alarm L1 Signal: General-Alarm L1
Prot.Alarm L2 Signal: General-Alarm L2
Prot.Alarm L3 Signal: General-Alarm L3
Prot.Alarm G Signal: General-Alarm - Earth fault
Prot.Alarm Signal: General Alarm
Prot.Trip L1 Signal: General Trip L1
Prot.Trip L2 Signal: General Trip L2
Prot.Trip L3 Signal: General Trip L3
Prot.Trip G Signal: General Trip Ground fault
Prot.Trip Signal: General Trip
Prot.Res Fault a Mains No Signal: Resetting of fault number and mains fault
number.
Prot.I dir fwd Signal: Phase current failure forward direction
Prot.I dir rev Signal: Phase current failure reverse direction
Prot.I dir n poss Signal: Phase fault - missing reference voltage
Prot.IG dir fwd Signal: Earth fault forward
Prot.IG rev dir Signal: Earth fault reverse direction
Prot.IG dir n poss Signal: Earth fault direction detection not possible
Prot.ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
Prot.ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking2
Prot.ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip
Command
CB.TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
CB.Res TripCmd Cr Signal: Resetting of the Counter: total number of trip
commands
CB.Ack TripCmd Signal: Acknow TripCmd
CB.Res Sum trip Signal: Reset summation of the tripping currents
CB.Ready Signal: Circuit breaker is ready for operation.
CB.Manual OFF Signal: Circuit breaker was switched off manually.
CB.Manual ON Signal: Circuit breaker was switched on manually
CB.Pos OFF Signal: Circuit Breaker is in OFF-Position
CB.Pos ON Signal: Circuit Breaker is in ON-Position

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 101

Assignment List

Name Description
CB.Pos Indeterm Signal: Circuit Breaker is in Indeterminate Position
CB.Pos Disturb Signal: Circuit Breaker Disturbed - Undefined Circuit
Breaker Position. The Position Indicators contradict
themselves. After expiring of a supervision timer the
Position Indicators indicate that the circuit breaker is in
the ON and OFF-Position at the same time.
CB.Acknow Sig-I Module input state: Acknowledgment Signal (only for
automatic acknowledgment) Module input signal
CB.Aux ON-I Position indicator/check-back signal of the CB (52a)
CB.Aux OFF-I Module input state: Position indicator/check-back
signal of the CB (52b)
CB.Manual ON-I Module input state: Circuit breaker was switched on
manually
CB.Manual OFF-I Module input state: Circuit breaker was switched off
manually
CB.Ready-I Module input state: CB ready
I[1].active Signal: active
I[1].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
I[1].Ex rev Interl Signal: External reverse Interlocking
I[1].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
I[1].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
I[1].IH2 Blo Signal: Blocking the trip command by an inrush
I[1].Alarm L1 Signal: Alarm L1
I[1].Alarm L2 Signal: Alarm L2
I[1].Alarm L3 Signal: Alarm L3
I[1].Alarm Signal: Alarm
I[1].Trip L1 Signal: General Trip L1
I[1].Trip L2 Signal: General Trip L2
I[1].Trip L3 Signal: General Trip L3
I[1].Trip Signal: Trip
I[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
I[1].DefaultSet Signal: Default Parameter Set
I[1].AdaptSet 1 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1
I[1].AdaptSet 2 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 2
I[1].AdaptSet 3 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 3
I[1].AdaptSet 4 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 4
I[1].ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
I[1].ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking2
I[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip
Command
I[1].Ex rev Interl-I Module input state: External reverse interlocking
I[1].AdaptSet1-I Module input state: Adaptive Parameter1
I[1].AdaptSet2-I Module input state: Adaptive Parameter2
I[1].AdaptSet3-I Module input state: Adaptive Parameter3

Page 102 EN MRA4 04/09

Assignment List

Name Description
I[1].AdaptSet4-I Module input state: Adaptive Parameter4
I[2].active Signal: active
I[2].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
I[2].Ex rev Interl Signal: External reverse Interlocking
I[2].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
I[2].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
I[2].IH2 Blo Signal: Blocking the trip command by an inrush
I[2].Alarm L1 Signal: Alarm L1
I[2].Alarm L2 Signal: Alarm L2
I[2].Alarm L3 Signal: Alarm L3
I[2].Alarm Signal: Alarm
I[2].Trip L1 Signal: General Trip L1
I[2].Trip L2 Signal: General Trip L2
I[2].Trip L3 Signal: General Trip L3
I[2].Trip Signal: Trip
I[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
I[2].DefaultSet Signal: Default Parameter Set
I[2].AdaptSet 1 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1
I[2].AdaptSet 2 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 2
I[2].AdaptSet 3 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 3
I[2].AdaptSet 4 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 4
I[2].ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
I[2].ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking2
I[2].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip
Command
I[2].Ex rev Interl-I Module input state: External reverse interlocking
I[2].AdaptSet1-I Module input state: Adaptive Parameter1
I[2].AdaptSet2-I Module input state: Adaptive Parameter2
I[2].AdaptSet3-I Module input state: Adaptive Parameter3
I[2].AdaptSet4-I Module input state: Adaptive Parameter4
I[3].active Signal: active
I[3].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
I[3].Ex rev Interl Signal: External reverse Interlocking
I[3].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
I[3].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
I[3].IH2 Blo Signal: Blocking the trip command by an inrush
I[3].Alarm L1 Signal: Alarm L1
I[3].Alarm L2 Signal: Alarm L2
I[3].Alarm L3 Signal: Alarm L3
I[3].Alarm Signal: Alarm
I[3].Trip L1 Signal: General Trip L1

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 103

Assignment List

Name Description
I[3].Trip L2 Signal: General Trip L2
I[3].Trip L3 Signal: General Trip L3
I[3].Trip Signal: Trip
I[3].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
I[3].DefaultSet Signal: Default Parameter Set
I[3].AdaptSet 1 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1
I[3].AdaptSet 2 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 2
I[3].AdaptSet 3 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 3
I[3].AdaptSet 4 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 4
I[3].ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
I[3].ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking2
I[3].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip
Command
I[3].Ex rev Interl-I Module input state: External reverse interlocking
I[3].AdaptSet1-I Module input state: Adaptive Parameter1
I[3].AdaptSet2-I Module input state: Adaptive Parameter2
I[3].AdaptSet3-I Module input state: Adaptive Parameter3
I[3].AdaptSet4-I Module input state: Adaptive Parameter4
I[4].active Signal: active
I[4].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
I[4].Ex rev Interl Signal: External reverse Interlocking
I[4].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
I[4].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
I[4].IH2 Blo Signal: Blocking the trip command by an inrush
I[4].Alarm L1 Signal: Alarm L1
I[4].Alarm L2 Signal: Alarm L2
I[4].Alarm L3 Signal: Alarm L3
I[4].Alarm Signal: Alarm
I[4].Trip L1 Signal: General Trip L1
I[4].Trip L2 Signal: General Trip L2
I[4].Trip L3 Signal: General Trip L3
I[4].Trip Signal: Trip
I[4].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
I[4].DefaultSet Signal: Default Parameter Set
I[4].AdaptSet 1 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1
I[4].AdaptSet 2 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 2
I[4].AdaptSet 3 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 3
I[4].AdaptSet 4 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 4
I[4].ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
I[4].ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking2

Page 104 EN MRA4 04/09

Assignment List

Name Description
I[4].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip
Command
I[4].Ex rev Interl-I Module input state: External reverse interlocking
I[4].AdaptSet1-I Module input state: Adaptive Parameter1
I[4].AdaptSet2-I Module input state: Adaptive Parameter2
I[4].AdaptSet3-I Module input state: Adaptive Parameter3
I[4].AdaptSet4-I Module input state: Adaptive Parameter4
I[5].active Signal: active
I[5].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
I[5].Ex rev Interl Signal: External reverse Interlocking
I[5].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
I[5].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
I[5].IH2 Blo Signal: Blocking the trip command by an inrush
I[5].Alarm L1 Signal: Alarm L1
I[5].Alarm L2 Signal: Alarm L2
I[5].Alarm L3 Signal: Alarm L3
I[5].Alarm Signal: Alarm
I[5].Trip L1 Signal: General Trip L1
I[5].Trip L2 Signal: General Trip L2
I[5].Trip L3 Signal: General Trip L3
I[5].Trip Signal: Trip
I[5].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
I[5].DefaultSet Signal: Default Parameter Set
I[5].AdaptSet 1 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1
I[5].AdaptSet 2 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 2
I[5].AdaptSet 3 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 3
I[5].AdaptSet 4 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 4
I[5].ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
I[5].ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking2
I[5].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip
Command
I[5].Ex rev Interl-I Module input state: External reverse interlocking
I[5].AdaptSet1-I Module input state: Adaptive Parameter1
I[5].AdaptSet2-I Module input state: Adaptive Parameter2
I[5].AdaptSet3-I Module input state: Adaptive Parameter3
I[5].AdaptSet4-I Module input state: Adaptive Parameter4
I[6].active Signal: active
I[6].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
I[6].Ex rev Interl Signal: External reverse Interlocking
I[6].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
I[6].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 105

Assignment List

Name Description
I[6].IH2 Blo Signal: Blocking the trip command by an inrush
I[6].Alarm L1 Signal: Alarm L1
I[6].Alarm L2 Signal: Alarm L2
I[6].Alarm L3 Signal: Alarm L3
I[6].Alarm Signal: Alarm
I[6].Trip L1 Signal: General Trip L1
I[6].Trip L2 Signal: General Trip L2
I[6].Trip L3 Signal: General Trip L3
I[6].Trip Signal: Trip
I[6].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
I[6].DefaultSet Signal: Default Parameter Set
I[6].AdaptSet 1 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1
I[6].AdaptSet 2 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 2
I[6].AdaptSet 3 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 3
I[6].AdaptSet 4 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 4
I[6].ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
I[6].ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking2
I[6].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip
Command
I[6].Ex rev Interl-I Module input state: External reverse interlocking
I[6].AdaptSet1-I Module input state: Adaptive Parameter1
I[6].AdaptSet2-I Module input state: Adaptive Parameter2
I[6].AdaptSet3-I Module input state: Adaptive Parameter3
I[6].AdaptSet4-I Module input state: Adaptive Parameter4
IG[1].active Signal: active
IG[1].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
IG[1].Ex rev Interl Signal: External reverse Interlocking
IG[1].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
IG[1].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
IG[1].Alarm Signal: Alarm IG
IG[1].Trip Signal: Trip
IG[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
IG[1].IGH2 Blo Signal: blocked by an inrush
IG[1].DefaultSet Signal: Default Parameter Set
IG[1].AdaptSet 1 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1
IG[1].AdaptSet 2 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 2
IG[1].AdaptSet 3 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 3
IG[1].AdaptSet 4 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 4
IG[1].ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
IG[1].ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking2

Page 106 EN MRA4 04/09

Assignment List

Name Description
IG[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip
Command
IG[1].Ex rev Interl-I Module input state: External reverse interlocking
IG[1].AdaptSet1-I Module input state: Adaptive Parameter1
IG[1].AdaptSet2-I Module input state: Adaptive Parameter2
IG[1].AdaptSet3-I Module input state: Adaptive Parameter3
IG[1].AdaptSet4-I Module input state: Adaptive Parameter4
IG[2].active Signal: active
IG[2].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
IG[2].Ex rev Interl Signal: External reverse Interlocking
IG[2].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
IG[2].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
IG[2].Alarm Signal: Alarm IG
IG[2].Trip Signal: Trip
IG[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
IG[2].IGH2 Blo Signal: blocked by an inrush
IG[2].DefaultSet Signal: Default Parameter Set
IG[2].AdaptSet 1 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1
IG[2].AdaptSet 2 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 2
IG[2].AdaptSet 3 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 3
IG[2].AdaptSet 4 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 4
IG[2].ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
IG[2].ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking2
IG[2].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip
Command
IG[2].Ex rev Interl-I Module input state: External reverse interlocking
IG[2].AdaptSet1-I Module input state: Adaptive Parameter1
IG[2].AdaptSet2-I Module input state: Adaptive Parameter2
IG[2].AdaptSet3-I Module input state: Adaptive Parameter3
IG[2].AdaptSet4-I Module input state: Adaptive Parameter4
IG[3].active Signal: active
IG[3].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
IG[3].Ex rev Interl Signal: External reverse Interlocking
IG[3].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
IG[3].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
IG[3].Alarm Signal: Alarm IG
IG[3].Trip Signal: Trip
IG[3].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
IG[3].IGH2 Blo Signal: blocked by an inrush
IG[3].DefaultSet Signal: Default Parameter Set
IG[3].AdaptSet 1 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 107

Assignment List

Name Description
IG[3].AdaptSet 2 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 2
IG[3].AdaptSet 3 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 3
IG[3].AdaptSet 4 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 4
IG[3].ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
IG[3].ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking2
IG[3].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip
Command
IG[3].Ex rev Interl-I Module input state: External reverse interlocking
IG[3].AdaptSet1-I Module input state: Adaptive Parameter1
IG[3].AdaptSet2-I Module input state: Adaptive Parameter2
IG[3].AdaptSet3-I Module input state: Adaptive Parameter3
IG[3].AdaptSet4-I Module input state: Adaptive Parameter4
IG[4].active Signal: active
IG[4].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
IG[4].Ex rev Interl Signal: External reverse Interlocking
IG[4].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
IG[4].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
IG[4].Alarm Signal: Alarm IG
IG[4].Trip Signal: Trip
IG[4].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
IG[4].IGH2 Blo Signal: blocked by an inrush
IG[4].DefaultSet Signal: Default Parameter Set
IG[4].AdaptSet 1 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1
IG[4].AdaptSet 2 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 2
IG[4].AdaptSet 3 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 3
IG[4].AdaptSet 4 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 4
IG[4].ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
IG[4].ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking2
IG[4].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip
Command
IG[4].Ex rev Interl-I Module input state: External reverse interlocking
IG[4].AdaptSet1-I Module input state: Adaptive Parameter1
IG[4].AdaptSet2-I Module input state: Adaptive Parameter2
IG[4].AdaptSet3-I Module input state: Adaptive Parameter3
IG[4].AdaptSet4-I Module input state: Adaptive Parameter4
ThR.active Signal: active
ThR.ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
ThR.Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
ThR.ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
ThR.Alarm Signal: Alarm Thermal Overload
ThR.Trip Signal: Trip

Page 108 EN MRA4 04/09

Assignment List

Name Description
ThR.TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
ThR.Reset Theta Signal: Resetting Thermal Replica
ThR.ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
ThR.ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking2
ThR.ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip
Command
I2>[1].active Signal: active
I2>[1].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
I2>[1].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
I2>[1].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
I2>[1].Alarm Signal: Alarm Negative Sequence
I2>[1].Trip Signal: Trip
I2>[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
I2>[1].ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
I2>[1].ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking2
I2>[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip
Command
I2>[2].active Signal: active
I2>[2].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
I2>[2].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
I2>[2].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
I2>[2].Alarm Signal: Alarm Negative Sequence
I2>[2].Trip Signal: Trip
I2>[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
I2>[2].ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
I2>[2].ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking2
I2>[2].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip
Command
IH2.active Signal: active
IH2.ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
IH2.Blo L1 Signal: Blocked L1
IH2.Blo L2 Signal: Blocked L2
IH2.Blo L3 Signal: Blocked L3
IH2.Blo IG Signal: Blocking of the earth protection module
IH2.3-ph Blo Signal: Inrush was detected in at least one phase - trip
command blocked.
IH2.ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
IH2.ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking2
V[1].active Signal: active
V[1].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
V[1].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
V[1].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 109

Assignment List

Name Description
V[1].Alarm L1 Signal: Alarm L1
V[1].Alarm L2 Signal: Alarm L2
V[1].Alarm L3 Signal: Alarm L3
V[1].Alarm Signal: Alarm voltage stage
V[1].Trip L1 Signal: General Trip L1
V[1].Trip L2 Signal: General Trip L2
V[1].Trip L3 Signal: General Trip L3
V[1].Trip Signal: Trip
V[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
V[1].ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
V[1].ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking2
V[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip
Command
V[2].active Signal: active
V[2].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
V[2].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
V[2].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
V[2].Alarm L1 Signal: Alarm L1
V[2].Alarm L2 Signal: Alarm L2
V[2].Alarm L3 Signal: Alarm L3
V[2].Alarm Signal: Alarm voltage stage
V[2].Trip L1 Signal: General Trip L1
V[2].Trip L2 Signal: General Trip L2
V[2].Trip L3 Signal: General Trip L3
V[2].Trip Signal: Trip
V[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
V[2].ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
V[2].ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking2
V[2].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip
Command
V[3].active Signal: active
V[3].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
V[3].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
V[3].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
V[3].Alarm L1 Signal: Alarm L1
V[3].Alarm L2 Signal: Alarm L2
V[3].Alarm L3 Signal: Alarm L3
V[3].Alarm Signal: Alarm voltage stage
V[3].Trip L1 Signal: General Trip L1
V[3].Trip L2 Signal: General Trip L2
V[3].Trip L3 Signal: General Trip L3

Page 110 EN MRA4 04/09

Assignment List

Name Description
V[3].Trip Signal: Trip
V[3].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
V[3].ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
V[3].ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking2
V[3].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip
Command
V[4].active Signal: active
V[4].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
V[4].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
V[4].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
V[4].Alarm L1 Signal: Alarm L1
V[4].Alarm L2 Signal: Alarm L2
V[4].Alarm L3 Signal: Alarm L3
V[4].Alarm Signal: Alarm voltage stage
V[4].Trip L1 Signal: General Trip L1
V[4].Trip L2 Signal: General Trip L2
V[4].Trip L3 Signal: General Trip L3
V[4].Trip Signal: Trip
V[4].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
V[4].ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
V[4].ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking2
V[4].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip
Command
VE[1].active Signal: active
VE[1].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
VE[1].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
VE[1].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
VE[1].Alarm Signal: Alarm Residual Voltage Supervision-stage
VE[1].Trip Signal: Trip
VE[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
VE[1].ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
VE[1].ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking2
VE[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip
Command
VE[2].active Signal: active
VE[2].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
VE[2].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
VE[2].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
VE[2].Alarm Signal: Alarm Residual Voltage Supervision-stage
VE[2].Trip Signal: Trip
VE[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
VE[2].ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 111

Assignment List

Name Description
VE[2].ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking2
VE[2].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip
Command
f[1].active Signal: active
f[1].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
f[1].Blo by V< Signal: Module is blocked by undervoltage.
f[1].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
f[1].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
f[1].Alarm f Signal: Alarm Frequency Protection
f[1].Alarm df/dt | DF/DT Alarm instantaneous or average value of the rate-of-
frequency-change
f[1].Alarm delta phi Signal: Alarm Vector Surge
f[1].Alarm Signal: Alarm Frequency Protection (collective signal)
f[1].Trip f Signal: Frequency has exceeded the limit.
f[1].Trip df/dt | DF/DT Signal: Trip df/dt or DF/DT
f[1].Trip delta phi Signal: Trip delta phi
f[1].Trip Signal: Trip Frequency Protection (collective signal)
f[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
f[1].ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
f[1].ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking2
f[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip
Command
f[2].active Signal: active
f[2].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
f[2].Blo by V< Signal: Module is blocked by undervoltage.
f[2].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
f[2].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
f[2].Alarm f Signal: Alarm Frequency Protection
f[2].Alarm df/dt | DF/DT Alarm instantaneous or average value of the rate-of-
frequency-change
f[2].Alarm delta phi Signal: Alarm Vector Surge
f[2].Alarm Signal: Alarm Frequency Protection (collective signal)
f[2].Trip f Signal: Frequency has exceeded the limit.
f[2].Trip df/dt | DF/DT Signal: Trip df/dt or DF/DT
f[2].Trip delta phi Signal: Trip delta phi
f[2].Trip Signal: Trip Frequency Protection (collective signal)
f[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
f[2].ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
f[2].ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking2
f[2].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip
Command
f[3].active Signal: active

Page 112 EN MRA4 04/09

Assignment List

Name Description
f[3].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
f[3].Blo by V< Signal: Module is blocked by undervoltage.
f[3].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
f[3].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
f[3].Alarm f Signal: Alarm Frequency Protection
f[3].Alarm df/dt | DF/DT Alarm instantaneous or average value of the rate-of-
frequency-change
f[3].Alarm delta phi Signal: Alarm Vector Surge
f[3].Alarm Signal: Alarm Frequency Protection (collective signal)
f[3].Trip f Signal: Frequency has exceeded the limit.
f[3].Trip df/dt | DF/DT Signal: Trip df/dt or DF/DT
f[3].Trip delta phi Signal: Trip delta phi
f[3].Trip Signal: Trip Frequency Protection (collective signal)
f[3].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
f[3].ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
f[3].ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking2
f[3].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip
Command
f[4].active Signal: active
f[4].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
f[4].Blo by V< Signal: Module is blocked by undervoltage.
f[4].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
f[4].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
f[4].Alarm f Signal: Alarm Frequency Protection
f[4].Alarm df/dt | DF/DT Alarm instantaneous or average value of the rate-of-
frequency-change
f[4].Alarm delta phi Signal: Alarm Vector Surge
f[4].Alarm Signal: Alarm Frequency Protection (collective signal)
f[4].Trip f Signal: Frequency has exceeded the limit.
f[4].Trip df/dt | DF/DT Signal: Trip df/dt or DF/DT
f[4].Trip delta phi Signal: Trip delta phi
f[4].Trip Signal: Trip Frequency Protection (collective signal)
f[4].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
f[4].ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
f[4].ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking2
f[4].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip
Command
f[5].active Signal: active
f[5].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
f[5].Blo by V< Signal: Module is blocked by undervoltage.
f[5].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
f[5].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 113

Assignment List

Name Description
f[5].Alarm f Signal: Alarm Frequency Protection
f[5].Alarm df/dt | DF/DT Alarm instantaneous or average value of the rate-of-
frequency-change
f[5].Alarm delta phi Signal: Alarm Vector Surge
f[5].Alarm Signal: Alarm Frequency Protection (collective signal)
f[5].Trip f Signal: Frequency has exceeded the limit.
f[5].Trip df/dt | DF/DT Signal: Trip df/dt or DF/DT
f[5].Trip delta phi Signal: Trip delta phi
f[5].Trip Signal: Trip Frequency Protection (collective signal)
f[5].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
f[5].ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
f[5].ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking2
f[5].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip
Command
f[6].active Signal: active
f[6].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
f[6].Blo by V< Signal: Module is blocked by undervoltage.
f[6].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
f[6].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
f[6].Alarm f Signal: Alarm Frequency Protection
f[6].Alarm df/dt | DF/DT Alarm instantaneous or average value of the rate-of-
frequency-change
f[6].Alarm delta phi Signal: Alarm Vector Surge
f[6].Alarm Signal: Alarm Frequency Protection (collective signal)
f[6].Trip f Signal: Frequency has exceeded the limit.
f[6].Trip df/dt | DF/DT Signal: Trip df/dt or DF/DT
f[6].Trip delta phi Signal: Trip delta phi
f[6].Trip Signal: Trip Frequency Protection (collective signal)
f[6].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
f[6].ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
f[6].ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking2
f[6].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip
Command
V 012 [1].active Signal: active
V 012 [1].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
V 012 [1].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
V 012 [1].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
V 012 [1].Alarm Signal: Alarm voltage asymmetry
V 012 [1].Trip Signal: Trip
V 012 [1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
V 012 [1].ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
V 012 [1].ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking2

Page 114 EN MRA4 04/09

Assignment List

Name Description
V 012 [1].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip
Command
V 012 [2].active Signal: active
V 012 [2].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
V 012 [2].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
V 012 [2].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
V 012 [2].Alarm Signal: Alarm voltage asymmetry
V 012 [2].Trip Signal: Trip
V 012 [2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
V 012 [2].ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
V 012 [2].ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking2
V 012 [2].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip
Command
V 012 [3].active Signal: active
V 012 [3].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
V 012 [3].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
V 012 [3].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
V 012 [3].Alarm Signal: Alarm voltage asymmetry
V 012 [3].Trip Signal: Trip
V 012 [3].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
V 012 [3].ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
V 012 [3].ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking2
V 012 [3].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip
Command
V 012 [4].active Signal: active
V 012 [4].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
V 012 [4].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
V 012 [4].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
V 012 [4].Alarm Signal: Alarm voltage asymmetry
V 012 [4].Trip Signal: Trip
V 012 [4].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
V 012 [4].ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
V 012 [4].ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking2
V 012 [4].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip
Command
V 012 [5].active Signal: active
V 012 [5].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
V 012 [5].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
V 012 [5].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
V 012 [5].Alarm Signal: Alarm voltage asymmetry
V 012 [5].Trip Signal: Trip
V 012 [5].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 115

Assignment List

Name Description
V 012 [5].ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
V 012 [5].ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking2
V 012 [5].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip
Command
V 012 [6].active Signal: active
V 012 [6].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
V 012 [6].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
V 012 [6].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
V 012 [6].Alarm Signal: Alarm voltage asymmetry
V 012 [6].Trip Signal: Trip
V 012 [6].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
V 012 [6].ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
V 012 [6].ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking2
V 012 [6].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip
Command
PQS [1].active Signal: active
PQS [1].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
PQS [1].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
PQS [1].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
PQS [1].Alarm Signal: Alarm Power Protection
PQS [1].Trip Signal: Trip Power Protection
PQS [1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
PQS [1].ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking
PQS [1].ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking
PQS [1].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip
Command
PQS [2].active Signal: active
PQS [2].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
PQS [2].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
PQS [2].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
PQS [2].Alarm Signal: Alarm Power Protection
PQS [2].Trip Signal: Trip Power Protection
PQS [2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
PQS [2].ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking
PQS [2].ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking
PQS [2].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip
Command
PQS [3].active Signal: active
PQS [3].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
PQS [3].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
PQS [3].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
PQS [3].Alarm Signal: Alarm Power Protection

Page 116 EN MRA4 04/09

Assignment List

Name Description
PQS [3].Trip Signal: Trip Power Protection
PQS [3].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
PQS [3].ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking
PQS [3].ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking
PQS [3].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip
Command
PQS [4].active Signal: active
PQS [4].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
PQS [4].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
PQS [4].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
PQS [4].Alarm Signal: Alarm Power Protection
PQS [4].Trip Signal: Trip Power Protection
PQS [4].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
PQS [4].ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking
PQS [4].ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking
PQS [4].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip
Command
PQS [5].active Signal: active
PQS [5].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
PQS [5].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
PQS [5].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
PQS [5].Alarm Signal: Alarm Power Protection
PQS [5].Trip Signal: Trip Power Protection
PQS [5].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
PQS [5].ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking
PQS [5].ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking
PQS [5].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip
Command
PQS [6].active Signal: active
PQS [6].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
PQS [6].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
PQS [6].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
PQS [6].Alarm Signal: Alarm Power Protection
PQS [6].Trip Signal: Trip Power Protection
PQS [6].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
PQS [6].ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking
PQS [6].ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking
PQS [6].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip
Command
PF[1].active Signal: active
PF[1].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
PF[1].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 117

Assignment List

Name Description
PF[1].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
PF[1].Alarm Signal: Alarm Power Factor
PF[1].Trip Signal: Trip Power Factor
PF[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
PF[1].Compensator Signal: Compensation Signal
PF[1].Impossible Signal: Alarm Power Factor Impossible
PF[1].ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking
PF[1].ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking
PF[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip
Command
PF[2].active Signal: active
PF[2].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
PF[2].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
PF[2].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
PF[2].Alarm Signal: Alarm Power Factor
PF[2].Trip Signal: Trip Power Factor
PF[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
PF[2].Compensator Signal: Compensation Signal
PF[2].Impossible Signal: Alarm Power Factor Impossible
PF[2].ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking
PF[2].ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking
PF[2].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip
Command
AR.active Signal: active
AR.ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
AR.CB ON Cmd Signal: CB switch ON Command
AR.Abort Blo Signal: AR - The AR was aborted or blocked by an
active function of the menu "Abort"
AR.running Signal: Auto Reclosing running
AR.t-Superv Signal: AR Supervision (blocking) time
AR.Service Alarm Signal: AR - Alarm, too many switching operations
AR.Service Blo Signal: AR - Service blocking - too many switching
operations
AR.successful Signal: Auto Reclosing successful
AR.failed Signal: Auto Reclosing failure
AR.t-dead Signal: Dead time between trip and reclosure attempt
AR.Res Statistics Cr Signal: Reset all statistic AR counters: Total number of
AR, successful and unsuccessful no of AR.
AR.Res Service Cr Signal: Reset the Service Counters for Alarm and
Blocking
AR.AR Shot No.0 Signal: Auto Reclosure Attempt No.
AR.AR Shot No.1 Signal: Auto Reclosure Attempt No.
AR.AR Shot No.2 Signal: Auto Reclosure Attempt No.

Page 118 EN MRA4 04/09

Assignment List

Name Description
AR.AR Shot No.3 Signal: Auto Reclosure Attempt No.
AR.AR Shot No.4 Signal: Auto Reclosure Attempt No.
AR.AR Shot No.5 Signal: Auto Reclosure Attempt No.
AR.AR Shot No.6 Signal: Auto Reclosure Attempt No.
AR.in Preparation in Preparation
AR.ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
AR.ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking2
AR.Ex Sync running-I Module input state: External synchronism signal
AR.Ready-I Module input state: CB ready
AR.1.FT Signal: Fast Trip
AR.1.FT Cmd Signal: Trip Command for Fast Tripping
AR.2.FT Signal: Fast Trip
AR.2.FT Cmd Signal: Trip Command for Fast Tripping
AR.3.FT Signal: Fast Trip
AR.3.FT Cmd Signal: Trip Command for Fast Tripping
AR.4.FT Signal: Fast Trip
AR.4.FT Cmd Signal: Trip Command for Fast Tripping
AR.5.FT Signal: Fast Trip
AR.5.FT Cmd Signal: Trip Command for Fast Tripping
AR.6.FT Signal: Fast Trip
AR.6.FT Cmd Signal: Trip Command for Fast Tripping
ExP[1].active Signal: active
ExP[1].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
ExP[1].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
ExP[1].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
ExP[1].Alarm Signal: External Alarm
ExP[1].Trip Signal: External Trip
ExP[1].TripCmd Signal: External Trip Command
ExP[1].ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
ExP[1].ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking2
ExP[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip
Command
ExP[1].Alarm-I Module input state: External Alarm
ExP[1].Trip-I Module input state: External Trip
ExP[2].active Signal: active
ExP[2].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
ExP[2].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
ExP[2].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
ExP[2].Alarm Signal: External Alarm
ExP[2].Trip Signal: External Trip
ExP[2].TripCmd Signal: External Trip Command

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 119

Assignment List

Name Description
ExP[2].ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
ExP[2].ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking2
ExP[2].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip
Command
ExP[2].Alarm-I Module input state: External Alarm
ExP[2].Trip-I Module input state: External Trip
ExP[3].active Signal: active
ExP[3].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
ExP[3].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
ExP[3].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
ExP[3].Alarm Signal: External Alarm
ExP[3].Trip Signal: External Trip
ExP[3].TripCmd Signal: External Trip Command
ExP[3].ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
ExP[3].ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking2
ExP[3].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip
Command
ExP[3].Alarm-I Module input state: External Alarm
ExP[3].Trip-I Module input state: External Trip
ExP[4].active Signal: active
ExP[4].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
ExP[4].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
ExP[4].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
ExP[4].Alarm Signal: External Alarm
ExP[4].Trip Signal: External Trip
ExP[4].TripCmd Signal: External Trip Command
ExP[4].ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
ExP[4].ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking2
ExP[4].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip
Command
ExP[4].Alarm-I Module input state: External Alarm
ExP[4].Trip-I Module input state: External Trip
SOTF.active Signal: active
SOTF.ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
SOTF.Ex rev Interl Signal: External reverse Interlocking
SOTF.enabled Signal: Switch Onto Fault enabled. This Signal can be
used to modify Overcurrent Protection Settings.
SOTF.AR Blo Signal: Blocked by AR
SOTF.I< Signal: No Load Current.
SOTF.ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking
SOTF.ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking
SOTF.Ex rev Interl-I Module input state: External reverse interlocking

Page 120 EN MRA4 04/09

Assignment List

Name Description
SOTF.Manual ON-I Module input state: Circuit breaker was switched on
manually
SOTF.Ext SOTF-I Module input state: External Switch Onto Fault Alarm
CLPU.active Signal: active
CLPU.ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
CLPU.Ex rev Interl Signal: External reverse Interlocking
CLPU.enabled Signal: Cold Load enabled
CLPU.detected Signal: Cold Load detected
CLPU.AR Blo Module input state: AR Blo
CLPU.I< Signal: No Load Current.
CLPU.ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking
CLPU.ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking
CLPU.Ex rev Interl-I Module input state: External reverse interlocking
CBF.active Signal: active
CBF.ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
CBF.running Signal: CBF-Module started
CBF.Alarm Signal: Circuit Breaker Failure
CBF.ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
CBF.ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking2
TCS.active Signal: active
TCS.ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
TCS.Alarm Signal: Alarm Trip Circuit Supervision
TCS.ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
TCS.ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking2
CTS.active Signal: active
CTS.ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
CTS.Alarm Signal: Alarm Current Transformer Measuring Circuit
Supervision
CTS.ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
CTS.ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking2
VTS.active Signal: active
VTS.ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
VTS.Alarm ΔV Signal: Alarm ΔV Voltage Transformer Measuring
Circuit Supervision
VTS.Alarm Signal: Alarm Voltage Transformer Measuring Circuit
Supervision
VTS.Ex FF VT Signal: Alarm Fuse Failure Voltage Transformers
VTS.Ex FF EVT Signal: Alarm Fuse Failure Earth Voltage
Transformers
VTS.Ex Fuse Fail VT-I Module input state: External fuse failure voltage
transformers
VTS.Ex Fuse Fail EVT-I Module input state: External fuse failure earth voltage
transformer

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 121

Assignment List

Name Description
VTS.ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
VTS.ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking2
DI Slot X1.DI 1 Signal: Digital Input
DI Slot X1.DI 2 Signal: Digital Input
DI Slot X1.DI 3 Signal: Digital Input
DI Slot X1.DI 4 Signal: Digital Input
DI Slot X1.DI 5 Signal: Digital Input
DI Slot X1.DI 6 Signal: Digital Input
DI Slot X1.DI 7 Signal: Digital Input
DI Slot X1.DI 8 Signal: Digital Input
DI Slot X6.DI 1 Signal: Digital Input
DI Slot X6.DI 2 Signal: Digital Input
DI Slot X6.DI 3 Signal: Digital Input
DI Slot X6.DI 4 Signal: Digital Input
DI Slot X6.DI 5 Signal: Digital Input
DI Slot X6.DI 6 Signal: Digital Input
DI Slot X6.DI 7 Signal: Digital Input
DI Slot X6.DI 8 Signal: Digital Input
BO Slot X2.BO 1 Signal: Binary Output Relay
BO Slot X2.BO 2 Signal: Binary Output Relay
BO Slot X2.BO 3 Signal: Binary Output Relay
BO Slot X2.BO 4 Signal: Binary Output Relay
BO Slot X2.BO 5 Signal: Binary Output Relay
BO Slot X2.BO 6 Signal: Binary Output Relay
BO Slot X5.BO 1 Signal: Binary Output Relay
BO Slot X5.BO 2 Signal: Binary Output Relay
BO Slot X5.BO 3 Signal: Binary Output Relay
BO Slot X5.BO 4 Signal: Binary Output Relay
BO Slot X5.BO 5 Signal: Binary Output Relay
BO Slot X5.BO 6 Signal: Binary Output Relay
Event rec.Reset all records Signal: All records deleted
Disturb rec.recording Signal: Recording
Disturb rec.Write err Signal: Writing error in memory
Disturb rec.memory full Signal: Memory full
Disturb rec.Clear fail Signal: Clear failure in memory
Disturb rec.Reset all records Signal: All records deleted
Disturb rec.Reset rec Signal: Delete record
Disturb rec.Man Trigger Signal: Manual Trigger
Disturb rec.Start1-I State of the module input: Trigger event / start
recording if:

Page 122 EN MRA4 04/09

Assignment List

Name Description
Disturb rec.Start2-I State of the module input: Trigger event / start
recording if:
Disturb rec.Start3-I State of the module input: Trigger event / start
recording if:
Disturb rec.Start4-I State of the module input: Trigger event / start
recording if:
Disturb rec.Start5-I State of the module input: Trigger event / start
recording if:
Disturb rec.Start6-I State of the module input: Trigger event / start
recording if:
Disturb rec.Start7-I State of the module input: Trigger event / start
recording if:
Disturb rec.Start8-I State of the module input: Trigger event / start
recording if:
Fault rec.Reset rec Signal: Delete record
Fault rec.Man Trigger Signal: Manual Trigger
Fault rec.Start1-I State of the module input: Trigger event / start
recording if:
Fault rec.Start2-I State of the module input: Trigger event / start
recording if:
Fault rec.Start3-I State of the module input: Trigger event / start
recording if:
Fault rec.Start4-I State of the module input: Trigger event / start
recording if:
Fault rec.Start5-I State of the module input: Trigger event / start
recording if:
Fault rec.Start6-I State of the module input: Trigger event / start
recording if:
Fault rec.Start7-I State of the module input: Trigger event / start
recording if:
Fault rec.Start8-I State of the module input: Trigger event / start
recording if:
PowerCr.Cr Overflow Wp+ Signal: Counter Overflow Wp+
PowerCr.Cr Overflow Wp- Signal: Counter Overflow Wp-
PowerCr.Cr Overflow Wq+ Signal: Counter Overflow Wq+
PowerCr.Cr Overflow Wq- Signal: Counter Overflow Wq-
PowerCr.Wp+ Reset Cr Signal: Wp+ Reset Counter
PowerCr.Wp- Reset Cr Signal: Wp- Reset Counter
PowerCr.Wq+ Reset Cr Signal: Wq+ Reset Counter
PowerCr.Wq- Reset Cr Signal: Wq- Reset Counter
PowerCr.Res all Energy Cr Signal: Reset of all Energy Counters
Modbus.Transmission Signal: SCADA active
Modbus.Scada Cmd 1 Scada Command
Modbus.Scada Cmd 2 Scada Command
Modbus.Scada Cmd 3 Scada Command
Modbus.Scada Cmd 4 Scada Command

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 123

Assignment List

Name Description
Modbus.Scada Cmd 5 Scada Command
Modbus.Scada Cmd 6 Scada Command
Modbus.Scada Cmd 7 Scada Command
Modbus.Scada Cmd 8 Scada Command
Modbus.Scada Cmd 9 Scada Command
Modbus.Scada Cmd 10 Scada Command
Modbus.Scada Cmd 11 Scada Command
Modbus.Scada Cmd 12 Scada Command
Modbus.Scada Cmd 13 Scada Command
Modbus.Scada Cmd 14 Scada Command
Modbus.Scada Cmd 15 Scada Command
Modbus.Scada Cmd 16 Scada Command
IEC 103.Scada Cmd 1 Scada Command
IEC 103.Scada Cmd 2 Scada Command
IEC 103.Scada Cmd 3 Scada Command
IEC 103.Scada Cmd 4 Scada Command
IEC 103.Scada Cmd 5 Scada Command
IEC 103.Scada Cmd 6 Scada Command
IEC 103.Scada Cmd 7 Scada Command
IEC 103.Scada Cmd 8 Scada Command
IEC 103.Scada Cmd 9 Scada Command
IEC 103.Scada Cmd 10 Scada Command
IEC 103.Transmission Signal: SCADA active
IEC 103.Fail phy Interf Failure in the physical interface
IEC 103.Failure Event lost Failure event lost
Statistics.Reset Signal: Reset of statistics
Statistics.StartFct-I Module input state: Start statistics Module input signal
Statistics.ResetFct-I Module input state: Reset statistics Module input signal
Sys.PS 1 Signal: Parameter Set 1
Sys.PS 2 Signal: Parameter Set 2
Sys.PS 3 Signal: Parameter Set 3
Sys.PS 4 Signal: Parameter Set 4
Sys.PSS manual Signal: Manual Switch over of a Parameter Set
Sys.PSS via Scada Signal: Parameter Set Switch via Scada
Sys.PSS via Inp fct Signal: Parameter Set Switch via input function
Sys.min 1 param changed Signal: At least one parameter has been changed
Sys.Ack LED Signal: LEDs acknowledgment
Sys.Ack BO Signal: Acknowledgment of the Binary Outputs
Sys.Ack Scada Signal: Acknowledge Scada
Sys.Ack TripCmd Signal: Reset Trip Command
Sys.Ack LED-HMI Signal: LEDs acknowledgment :HMI

Page 124 EN MRA4 04/09

Assignment List

Name Description
Sys.Ack BO-HMI Signal: Acknowledgment of the Binary Outputs :HMI
Sys.Ack Scada-HMI Signal: Acknowledge Scada :HMI
Sys.Ack TripCmd-HMI Signal: Reset Trip Command :HMI
Sys.Ack LED-Sca Signal: LEDs acknowledgment :SCADA
Sys.Ack BO-Sca Signal: Acknowledgment of the Binary
Outputs :SCADA
Sys.Ack Counter-Sca Signal: Reset of all Counters :SCADA
Sys.Ack Scada-Sca Signal: Acknowledge Scada :SCADA
Sys.Ack TripCmd-Sca Signal: Reset Trip Command :SCADA
Sys.Ack LED-I Module input state: LEDs acknowledgment by digital
input
Sys.Ack BO-I Module input state: Acknowledgment of the binary
Output Relays
Sys.Ack Scada-I Module input state: Acknowledge Scada via digital
input. The replica that SCADA has got from the device
is to be reset.
Sys.PS1-I State of the module input respectively of the signal,
that should activate this Parameter Setting Group.
Sys.PS2-I State of the module input respectively of the signal,
that should activate this Parameter Setting Group.
Sys.PS3-I State of the module input respectively of the signal,
that should activate this Parameter Setting Group.
Sys.PS4-I State of the module input respectively of the signal,
that should activate this Parameter Setting Group.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 125

Status Display

Status Display
In the status display within the menu »Operation« the present state of all signals of the »ASSIGNMENT LIST« can be
viewed. This means you are able to see if the individual signals are active or inactive at that moment. You can
choose whether you want to see all signals in an overall status or whether you want to view the signals sorted by
modules.

State of the module input/signal is... Is shown at the panel as...

false / »0«

true / »1«

Status Display via Smart View

• In case Smart view is not running – please start it.

• If the device data were not yet loaded – select »Receive Data From The Device« from menu »Device«.

• Double click on icon »Operation« in the navigation tree

• Double click on icon »Status Display« within the operational data

• Double click the »Overall status« if you want to see all signals at once or call up a module of which you
want to see the states.

• You can see the state of all corresponding signals on the window.

To have the status display updated in a cyclic manner select »Automatic

Up-Date« in menu »VIEW«.

State of the module input/signal is... Is shown in Smart view as...

false / »0« 0
true / »1« 1
No connection to the device ?

Page 126 EN MRA4 04/09

Module: Digital Inputs (DIs)

Module: Digital Inputs (DIs)

Based on the »assignment list«, the states of digital inputs are allocated to
the module inputs.

Set the following parameters for each of the digital inputs:

• »Nominal voltage«

• »Debouncing time«: A state change will only be adopted by the digital input after the debouncing time has
expired.

• »Inverting« (where necessary)

Inverting =1 DI Slot X.DI x

State of the digital input

Nom voltage Debouncing time

Input Signal t 0

The debouncing time will be started each time the state of the input signal
alternates.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 127

Module: Digital Inputs (DIs)

Digital Inputs (Standard)

DI Slot X1

Global Protection Parameters of the Digital Inputs (Standards)

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
Nom voltage Nominal voltage of 24 V DC, 24 V DC [Device Para
the digital inputs
48 V DC, /Digital Inputs
60 V DC, /DI Slot X1
110 V DC, /Group 1]
230 V DC,
110 V AC,
230 V AC
Inverting 1 Inverting the input inactive, inactive [Device Para
signals.
active /Digital Inputs
/DI Slot X1
/Group 1]
Debouncing time 1 A change of the no debouncing time, no debouncing time [Device Para
state of a digital
input will only be 20 ms, /Digital Inputs
recognized after the 50 ms, /DI Slot X1
debouncing time has
expired (become 100 ms /Group 1]
effective). Thus,
wipers will not be
misinterpreted.

Nom voltage Nominal voltage of 24 V DC, 24 V DC [Device Para

the digital inputs
48 V DC, /Digital Inputs
60 V DC, /DI Slot X1
110 V DC, /Group 2]
230 V DC,
110 V AC,
230 V AC
Inverting 2 Inverting the input inactive, inactive [Device Para
signals.
active /Digital Inputs
/DI Slot X1
/Group 2]

Page 128 EN MRA4 04/09

Module: Digital Inputs (DIs)

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

Debouncing time 2 A change of the no debouncing time, no debouncing time [Device Para
state of a digital
input will only be 20 ms, /Digital Inputs
recognized after the 50 ms, /DI Slot X1
debouncing time has
expired (become 100 ms /Group 2]
effective). Thus,
wipers will not be
misinterpreted.

Nom voltage Nominal voltage of 24 V DC, 24 V DC [Device Para

the digital inputs
48 V DC, /Digital Inputs
60 V DC, /DI Slot X1
110 V DC, /Group 3]
230 V DC,
110 V AC,
230 V AC
Inverting 3 Inverting the input inactive, inactive [Device Para
signals.
active /Digital Inputs
/DI Slot X1
/Group 3]
Debouncing time 3 A change of the no debouncing time, no debouncing time [Device Para
state of a digital
20 ms, /Digital Inputs
input will only be
recognized after the 50 ms, /DI Slot X1
debouncing time has
expired (become 100 ms /Group 3]
effective). Thus,
wipers will not be
misinterpreted.

Inverting 4 Inverting the input inactive, inactive [Device Para

signals.
active /Digital Inputs
/DI Slot X1
/Group 3]
Debouncing time 4 A change of the no debouncing time, no debouncing time [Device Para
state of a digital
20 ms, /Digital Inputs
input will only be
recognized after the 50 ms, /DI Slot X1
debouncing time has
expired (become 100 ms /Group 3]
effective). Thus,
wipers will not be
misinterpreted.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 129

Module: Digital Inputs (DIs)

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

Inverting 5 Inverting the input inactive, inactive [Device Para
signals.
active /Digital Inputs
/DI Slot X1
/Group 3]
Debouncing time 5 A change of the no debouncing time, no debouncing time [Device Para
state of a digital
20 ms, /Digital Inputs
input will only be
recognized after the 50 ms, /DI Slot X1
debouncing time has
expired (become 100 ms /Group 3]
effective). Thus,
wipers will not be
misinterpreted.

Inverting 6 Inverting the input inactive, inactive [Device Para

signals.
active /Digital Inputs
/DI Slot X1
/Group 3]
Debouncing time 6 A change of the no debouncing time, no debouncing time [Device Para
state of a digital
input will only be 20 ms, /Digital Inputs
recognized after the 50 ms, /DI Slot X1
debouncing time has
expired (become 100 ms /Group 3]
effective). Thus,
wipers will not be
misinterpreted.

Inverting 7 Inverting the input inactive, inactive [Device Para

signals.
active /Digital Inputs
/DI Slot X1
/Group 3]
Debouncing time 7 A change of the no debouncing time, no debouncing time [Device Para
state of a digital
20 ms, /Digital Inputs
input will only be
recognized after the 50 ms, /DI Slot X1
debouncing time has
expired (become 100 ms /Group 3]
effective). Thus,
wipers will not be
misinterpreted.

Inverting 8 Inverting the input inactive, inactive [Device Para

signals.
active /Digital Inputs
/DI Slot X1
/Group 3]

Page 130 EN MRA4 04/09

Module: Digital Inputs (DIs)

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

Debouncing time 8 A change of the no debouncing time, no debouncing time [Device Para
state of a digital
input will only be 20 ms, /Digital Inputs
recognized after the 50 ms, /DI Slot X1
debouncing time has
expired (become 100 ms /Group 3]
effective). Thus,
wipers will not be
misinterpreted. 8

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 131

Module: Digital Inputs (DIs)

Digital Inputs Signals (Outputs States)

Name Description
DI 1 Signal: Digital Input
DI 2 Signal: Digital Input
DI 3 Signal: Digital Input
DI 4 Signal: Digital Input
DI 5 Signal: Digital Input
DI 6 Signal: Digital Input
DI 7 Signal: Digital Input
DI 8 Signal: Digital Input

Page 132 EN MRA4 04/09

Module: Digital Inputs (DIs)

Optional Digital Inputs

DI Slot X6

Global Protection Parameters of the Optional Digital Inputs

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

Nom voltage Nominal voltage of 24 V DC, 24 V DC [Device Para
the digital inputs
48 V DC, /Digital Inputs
60 V DC, /DI Slot X6
110 V DC, /Group 1]
230 V DC,
110 V AC,
230 V AC
Inverting 1 Inverting the input inactive, inactive [Device Para
signals.
active /Digital Inputs
/DI Slot X6
/Group 1]
Debouncing time 1 A change of the no debouncing time, no debouncing time [Device Para
state of a digital
input will only be 20 ms, /Digital Inputs
recognized after the 50 ms, /DI Slot X6
debouncing time has
expired (become 100 ms /Group 1]
effective). Thus,
wipers will not be
misinterpreted.

Inverting 2 Inverting the input inactive, inactive [Device Para

signals.
active /Digital Inputs
/DI Slot X6
/Group 1]
Debouncing time 2 A change of the no debouncing time, no debouncing time [Device Para
state of a digital
20 ms, /Digital Inputs
input will only be
recognized after the 50 ms, /DI Slot X6
debouncing time has
expired (become 100 ms /Group 1]
effective). Thus,
wipers will not be
misinterpreted.

Inverting 3 Inverting the input inactive, inactive [Device Para

signals.
active /Digital Inputs
/DI Slot X6
/Group 1]

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 133

Module: Digital Inputs (DIs)

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

Debouncing time 3 A change of the no debouncing time, no debouncing time [Device Para
state of a digital
input will only be 20 ms, /Digital Inputs
recognized after the 50 ms, /DI Slot X6
debouncing time has
expired (become 100 ms /Group 1]
effective). Thus,
wipers will not be
misinterpreted.

Inverting 4 Inverting the input inactive, inactive [Device Para

signals.
active /Digital Inputs
/DI Slot X6
/Group 1]
Debouncing time 4 A change of the no debouncing time, no debouncing time [Device Para
state of a digital
20 ms, /Digital Inputs
input will only be
recognized after the 50 ms, /DI Slot X6
debouncing time has
expired (become 100 ms /Group 1]
effective). Thus,
wipers will not be
misinterpreted.

Inverting 5 Inverting the input inactive, inactive [Device Para

signals.
active /Digital Inputs
/DI Slot X6
/Group 1]
Debouncing time 5 A change of the no debouncing time, no debouncing time [Device Para
state of a digital
input will only be 20 ms, /Digital Inputs
recognized after the 50 ms, /DI Slot X6
debouncing time has
expired (become 100 ms /Group 1]
effective). Thus,
wipers will not be
misinterpreted.

Inverting 6 Inverting the input inactive, inactive [Device Para

signals.
active /Digital Inputs
/DI Slot X6
/Group 1]

Page 134 EN MRA4 04/09

Module: Digital Inputs (DIs)

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

Debouncing time 6 A change of the no debouncing time, no debouncing time [Device Para
state of a digital
input will only be 20 ms, /Digital Inputs
recognized after the 50 ms, /DI Slot X6
debouncing time has
expired (become 100 ms /Group 1]
effective). Thus,
wipers will not be
misinterpreted.

Inverting 7 Inverting the input inactive, inactive [Device Para

signals.
active /Digital Inputs
/DI Slot X6
/Group 1]
Debouncing time 7 A change of the no debouncing time, no debouncing time [Device Para
state of a digital
20 ms, /Digital Inputs
input will only be
recognized after the 50 ms, /DI Slot X6
debouncing time has
expired (become 100 ms /Group 1]
effective). Thus,
wipers will not be
misinterpreted.

Inverting 8 Inverting the input inactive, inactive [Device Para

signals.
active /Digital Inputs
/DI Slot X6
/Group 1]
Debouncing time 8 A change of the no debouncing time, no debouncing time [Device Para
state of a digital
input will only be 20 ms, /Digital Inputs
recognized after the 50 ms, /DI Slot X6
debouncing time has
expired (become 100 ms /Group 1]
effective). Thus,
wipers will not be
misinterpreted. 8

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 135

Module: Digital Inputs (DIs)

Optional Digital Input Signals (Outputs States)

Name Description
DI 1 Signal: Digital Input
DI 2 Signal: Digital Input
DI 3 Signal: Digital Input
DI 4 Signal: Digital Input
DI 5 Signal: Digital Input
DI 6 Signal: Digital Input
DI 7 Signal: Digital Input
DI 8 Signal: Digital Input

Page 136 EN MRA4 04/09

Binary Output Relays

Binary Output Relays

BO Slot X2 ,BO Slot X5

The conditions of module outputs and signals/protective functions (such as reverse interlocking) can be passed
by means of alarm relays. The alarm relays are potential-free contacts (which can be used as opening or closing
contact). Each alarm relay can be assigned up to 7 functions out of the »assignment list«.

Set the following parameters for each of the binary output relays:

• Up to 7 signals from the »assignment list« (OR-connected)

• Each of the assigned signals can be inverted.

• The (collective) state of the binary output relay can be inverted (open or closed circuit current principle)

• »Latched« active or inactive

• »Latched = inactive«:
If the latching function is »inactive«, the alarm relay respectively the alarm contact will adopt the
state of those alarms that were assigned.

• »Latched = active«
If the »latching function« is »active«, the state of the alarm relay respectively alarm contact that
was set by the alarms will be stored.

The alarm relay can only be acknowledged after reset of those signals that had
initiated setting of the relay and after expiry of the minimum retention time.

• »Hold time«: At signal changes, the minimal latching time ensures that the relay will be maintained
picked-up or released for at least this period.

If binary outputs are parameterized »Latched=active«, they will keep (return

into) their position even if there is a break within the power supply.

If binary output relays are parameterized »Latched=active«, The binary

output will also retain, if the binary output is reprogrammed in another way.
This applies also if »Latched is set to inactive«. Resetting a binary output
that has latched a signal will always require an acknowledgment.

The »System OK Relay« (watchdog) cannot be configured.

Acknowledgment options

Binary output relays can be acknowledged:

• Via the push-button »C« at the operating panel.

• Each binary output relay can be acknowledged by a signal of the »assignment list« (If »Latched is active«).

• Via the module »Ex Acknowledge« all binary output relays can be acknowledged at once, if the signal for
external acknowledgment that was selected from the »assignment list« becomes true. (e.g the state of a
digital input).

• Via SCADA, all output relays can be acknowledged at once.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 137

 =1 hold time
Inverting
>1

Page 138
1
>1 State of the binary
t-hold output relay
Assignment 1 =1

Inverting 1
Binary Output Relays

Assignment 2 =1

Inverting 2
>1

Assignment 3 =1 & S1 1

Inverting 3 R 1

Assignment 4 =1

Inverting 4

Assignment 5 =1

Inverting 5

Assignment 6 =1

Inverting 6

Assignment 7 =1

Inverting 7

Latched

inactive

active

Acknowledge -HMI >1

Acknowledge-1..n, Assignment List
Acknowledge-Scada

EN MRA4 04/09
Binary Output Relays

System Contact
The System OK alarm relay (SC) is the devices »LIFE CONTACT«. Its installation location depends on the housing
type. Please refer to the wiring diagram of the device (WDC-contact).

The System-OK relay (SC) cannot be parameterized. The system contact is an operating current contact that
picks-up, when the device is free from internal faults. While the device is booting up, the System OK relay (SC)
remains dropped-off. As soon as the system was duly started up, the relay picks up and the assigned LED is
activated accordingly (please refer to chapter Self Supervision).

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 139

Binary Output Relays

Global Protection Parameters of the Binary Output Relays

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
t-hold To clearly identify the 0.00 - 300.00s 0.03s [Device Para
state transition of a
/Binary Outputs
binary output relay,
the "new state" is /BO Slot X2
being hold, at least
for the duration of /BO 1]
the hold time.

Latched Defines whether the inactive, BO Slot X2: active [Device Para
Binary Output Relay
active BO Slot X5: inactive /Binary Outputs
will be
acknowledged /BO Slot X2
automatically if the
event is gone or /BO 1]
whether the Binary
Output Relay is to be
acknowledged by a
signal/manually.

Acknowledgment Acknowledgment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para

Signal - An
acknowledgment /Binary Outputs
signal (that /BO Slot X2
acknowledges the
corresponding binary /BO 1]
output relay) can be
assigned to each
output relay. The
acknowledgment-
signal is only
effective if the
parameter "Latched"
is set to active.

Only available if:

Latched = active
Inverting Inverting of the inactive, inactive [Device Para
Binary Output Relay.
active /Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 1]
Assignment 1 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List BO Slot X2: TripCmd [Device Para
BO Slot X5: - /Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 1]
Inverting 1 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /Binary Outputs
signal.
/BO Slot X2
/BO 1]

Page 140 EN MRA4 04/09

Binary Output Relays

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

Assignment 2 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 1]
Inverting 2 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /Binary Outputs
signal.
/BO Slot X2
/BO 1]
Assignment 3 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 1]
Inverting 3 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /Binary Outputs
signal.
/BO Slot X2
/BO 1]
Assignment 4 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 1]
Inverting 4 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /Binary Outputs
signal.
/BO Slot X2
/BO 1]
Assignment 5 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 1]
Inverting 5 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /Binary Outputs
signal.
/BO Slot X2
/BO 1]
Assignment 6 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 1]
Inverting 6 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /Binary Outputs
signal.
/BO Slot X2
/BO 1]

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 141

Binary Output Relays

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

Assignment 7 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 1]
Inverting 7 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /Binary Outputs
signal.
/BO Slot X2
/BO 1]
t-hold To clearly identify the 0.00 - 300.00s 0.03s [Device Para
state transition of a
binary output relay, /Binary Outputs
the "new state" is /BO Slot X2
being hold, at least
for the duration of /BO 2]
the hold time.

Latched Defines whether the inactive, inactive [Device Para

Binary Output Relay
will be active /Binary Outputs
acknowledged /BO Slot X2
automatically if the
event is gone or /BO 2]
whether the Binary
Output Relay is to be
acknowledged by a
signal/manually.

Acknowledgment Acknowledgment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para

Signal - An
/Binary Outputs
acknowledgment
signal (that /BO Slot X2
acknowledges the
corresponding binary /BO 2]
output relay) can be
assigned to each
output relay. The
acknowledgment-
signal is only
effective if the
parameter "Latched"
is set to active.

Only available if:

Latched = active
Inverting Inverting of the inactive, inactive [Device Para
Binary Output Relay.
active /Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 2]

Page 142 EN MRA4 04/09

Binary Output Relays

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

Assignment 1 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List BO Slot X2: Alarm [Device Para
BO Slot X5: - /Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 2]
Inverting 1 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /Binary Outputs
signal.
/BO Slot X2
/BO 2]
Assignment 2 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 2]
Inverting 2 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /Binary Outputs
signal.
/BO Slot X2
/BO 2]
Assignment 3 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 2]
Inverting 3 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /Binary Outputs
signal.
/BO Slot X2
/BO 2]
Assignment 4 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 2]
Inverting 4 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /Binary Outputs
signal.
/BO Slot X2
/BO 2]
Assignment 5 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 2]
Inverting 5 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /Binary Outputs
signal.
/BO Slot X2
/BO 2]

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 143

Binary Output Relays

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

Assignment 6 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 2]
Inverting 6 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /Binary Outputs
signal.
/BO Slot X2
/BO 2]
Assignment 7 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 2]
Inverting 7 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /Binary Outputs
signal.
/BO Slot X2
/BO 2]
t-hold To clearly identify the 0.00 - 300.00s 0.03s [Device Para
state transition of a
binary output relay, /Binary Outputs
the "new state" is /BO Slot X2
being hold, at least
for the duration of /BO 3]
the hold time.

Latched Defines whether the inactive, inactive [Device Para

Binary Output Relay
will be active /Binary Outputs
acknowledged /BO Slot X2
automatically if the
event is gone or /BO 3]
whether the Binary
Output Relay is to be
acknowledged by a
signal/manually.

Page 144 EN MRA4 04/09

Binary Output Relays

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

Acknowledgment Acknowledgment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
Signal - An
acknowledgment /Binary Outputs
signal (that /BO Slot X2
acknowledges the
corresponding binary /BO 3]
output relay) can be
assigned to each
output relay. The
acknowledgment-
signal is only
effective if the
parameter "Latched"
is set to active.

Only available if:

Latched = active
Inverting Inverting of the inactive, inactive [Device Para
Binary Output Relay.
active /Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 3]
Assignment 1 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 3]
Inverting 1 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /Binary Outputs
signal.
/BO Slot X2
/BO 3]
Assignment 2 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 3]
Inverting 2 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /Binary Outputs
signal.
/BO Slot X2
/BO 3]
Assignment 3 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 3]
Inverting 3 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /Binary Outputs
signal.
/BO Slot X2
/BO 3]

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 145

Binary Output Relays

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

Assignment 4 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 3]
Inverting 4 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /Binary Outputs
signal.
/BO Slot X2
/BO 3]
Assignment 5 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 3]
Inverting 5 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /Binary Outputs
signal.
/BO Slot X2
/BO 3]
Assignment 6 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 3]
Inverting 6 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /Binary Outputs
signal.
/BO Slot X2
/BO 3]
Assignment 7 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 3]
Inverting 7 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /Binary Outputs
signal.
/BO Slot X2
/BO 3]
t-hold To clearly identify the 0.00 - 300.00s 0.03s [Device Para
state transition of a
/Binary Outputs
binary output relay,
the "new state" is /BO Slot X2
being hold, at least
for the duration of /BO 4]
the hold time.

Page 146 EN MRA4 04/09

Binary Output Relays

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

Latched Defines whether the inactive, inactive [Device Para
Binary Output Relay
will be active /Binary Outputs
acknowledged /BO Slot X2
automatically if the
event is gone or /BO 4]
whether the Binary
Output Relay is to be
acknowledged by a
signal/manually.

Acknowledgment Acknowledgment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para

Signal - An
/Binary Outputs
acknowledgment
signal (that /BO Slot X2
acknowledges the
corresponding binary /BO 4]
output relay) can be
assigned to each
output relay. The
acknowledgment-
signal is only
effective if the
parameter "Latched"
is set to active.

Only available if:

Latched = active
Inverting Inverting of the inactive, inactive [Device Para
Binary Output Relay.
active /Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 4]
Assignment 1 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 4]
Inverting 1 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /Binary Outputs
signal.
/BO Slot X2
/BO 4]
Assignment 2 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 4]
Inverting 2 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /Binary Outputs
signal.
/BO Slot X2
/BO 4]

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 147

Binary Output Relays

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

Assignment 3 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 4]
Inverting 3 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /Binary Outputs
signal.
/BO Slot X2
/BO 4]
Assignment 4 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 4]
Inverting 4 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /Binary Outputs
signal.
/BO Slot X2
/BO 4]
Assignment 5 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 4]
Inverting 5 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /Binary Outputs
signal.
/BO Slot X2
/BO 4]
Assignment 6 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 4]
Inverting 6 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /Binary Outputs
signal.
/BO Slot X2
/BO 4]
Assignment 7 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 4]
Inverting 7 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /Binary Outputs
signal.
/BO Slot X2
/BO 4]

Page 148 EN MRA4 04/09

Binary Output Relays

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

t-hold To clearly identify the 0.00 - 300.00s 0.03s [Device Para
state transition of a
binary output relay, /Binary Outputs
the "new state" is /BO Slot X2
being hold, at least
for the duration of /BO 5]
the hold time.

Latched Defines whether the inactive, inactive [Device Para

Binary Output Relay
will be active /Binary Outputs
acknowledged /BO Slot X2
automatically if the
event is gone or /BO 5]
whether the Binary
Output Relay is to be
acknowledged by a
signal/manually.

Acknowledgment Acknowledgment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para

Signal - An
/Binary Outputs
acknowledgment
signal (that /BO Slot X2
acknowledges the
corresponding binary /BO 5]
output relay) can be
assigned to each
output relay. The
acknowledgment-
signal is only
effective if the
parameter "Latched"
is set to active.

Only available if:

Latched = active
Inverting Inverting of the inactive, inactive [Device Para
Binary Output Relay.
active /Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 5]
Assignment 1 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 5]
Inverting 1 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /Binary Outputs
signal.
/BO Slot X2
/BO 5]

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 149

Binary Output Relays

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

Assignment 2 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 5]
Inverting 2 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /Binary Outputs
signal.
/BO Slot X2
/BO 5]
Assignment 3 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 5]
Inverting 3 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /Binary Outputs
signal.
/BO Slot X2
/BO 5]
Assignment 4 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 5]
Inverting 4 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /Binary Outputs
signal.
/BO Slot X2
/BO 5]
Assignment 5 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 5]
Inverting 5 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /Binary Outputs
signal.
/BO Slot X2
/BO 5]
Assignment 6 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 5]
Inverting 6 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /Binary Outputs
signal.
/BO Slot X2
/BO 5]

Page 150 EN MRA4 04/09

Binary Output Relays

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

Assignment 7 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 5]
Inverting 7 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /Binary Outputs
signal.
/BO Slot X2
/BO 5]
t-hold To clearly identify the 0.00 - 300.00s 0.03s [Device Para
state transition of a
binary output relay, /Binary Outputs
the "new state" is /BO Slot X2
being hold, at least
for the duration of /BO 6]
the hold time.

Latched Defines whether the inactive, inactive [Device Para

Binary Output Relay
will be active /Binary Outputs
acknowledged /BO Slot X2
automatically if the
event is gone or /BO 6]
whether the Binary
Output Relay is to be
acknowledged by a
signal/manually.

Acknowledgment Acknowledgment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para

Signal - An
/Binary Outputs
acknowledgment
signal (that /BO Slot X2
acknowledges the
corresponding binary /BO 6]
output relay) can be
assigned to each
output relay. The
acknowledgment-
signal is only
effective if the
parameter "Latched"
is set to active.

Only available if:

Latched = active
Inverting Inverting of the inactive, inactive [Device Para
Binary Output Relay.
active /Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 6]

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 151

Binary Output Relays

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

Assignment 1 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 6]
Inverting 1 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /Binary Outputs
signal.
/BO Slot X2
/BO 6]
Assignment 2 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 6]
Inverting 2 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /Binary Outputs
signal.
/BO Slot X2
/BO 6]
Assignment 3 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 6]
Inverting 3 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /Binary Outputs
signal.
/BO Slot X2
/BO 6]
Assignment 4 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 6]
Inverting 4 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /Binary Outputs
signal.
/BO Slot X2
/BO 6]
Assignment 5 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 6]
Inverting 5 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /Binary Outputs
signal.
/BO Slot X2
/BO 6]

Page 152 EN MRA4 04/09

Binary Output Relays

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

Assignment 6 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 6]
Inverting 6 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /Binary Outputs
signal.
/BO Slot X2
/BO 6]
Assignment 7 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 6]
Inverting 7 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /Binary Outputs
signal.
/BO Slot X2
/BO 6]

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 153

Binary Output Relays

Binary Output Relay Input States

Name Description Assignment via
BO1.1 Module input state: Assignment [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 1]
BO1.2 Module input state: Assignment [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 1]
BO1.3 Module input state: Assignment [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 1]
BO1.4 Module input state: Assignment [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 1]
BO1.5 Module input state: Assignment [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 1]
BO1.6 Module input state: Assignment [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 1]
BO1.7 Module input state: Assignment [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 1]
Ack signal BO 1 Module input state: [Device Para
Acknowledgment signal for the
/Binary Outputs
binary output relay. If latching is set
to active, the binary output relay can /BO Slot X2
only be acknowledged if those
signals that initiated the setting are /BO 1]
fallen back and the hold time is
expired.
BO2.1 Module input state: Assignment [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 2]

Page 154 EN MRA4 04/09

Binary Output Relays

Name Description Assignment via

BO2.2 Module input state: Assignment [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 2]
BO2.3 Module input state: Assignment [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 2]
BO2.4 Module input state: Assignment [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 2]
BO2.5 Module input state: Assignment [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 2]
BO2.6 Module input state: Assignment [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 2]
BO2.7 Module input state: Assignment [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 2]
Ack signal BO 2 Module input state: [Device Para
Acknowledgment signal for the
binary output relay. If latching is set /Binary Outputs
to active, the binary output relay can /BO Slot X2
only be acknowledged if those
signals that initiated the setting are /BO 2]
fallen back and the hold time is
expired.
BO3.1 Module input state: Assignment [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 3]
BO3.2 Module input state: Assignment [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 3]

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 155

Binary Output Relays

Name Description Assignment via

BO3.3 Module input state: Assignment [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 3]
BO3.4 Module input state: Assignment [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 3]
BO3.5 Module input state: Assignment [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 3]
BO3.6 Module input state: Assignment [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 3]
BO3.7 Module input state: Assignment [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 3]
Ack signal BO 3 Module input state: [Device Para
Acknowledgment signal for the
/Binary Outputs
binary output relay. If latching is set
to active, the binary output relay can /BO Slot X2
only be acknowledged if those
signals that initiated the setting are /BO 3]
fallen back and the hold time is
expired.
BO4.1 Module input state: Assignment [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 4]
BO4.2 Module input state: Assignment [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 4]
BO4.3 Module input state: Assignment [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 4]

Page 156 EN MRA4 04/09

Binary Output Relays

Name Description Assignment via

BO4.4 Module input state: Assignment [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 4]
BO4.5 Module input state: Assignment [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 4]
BO4.6 Module input state: Assignment [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 4]
BO4.7 Module input state: Assignment [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 4]
Ack signal BO 4 Module input state: [Device Para
Acknowledgment signal for the
binary output relay. If latching is set /Binary Outputs
to active, the binary output relay can /BO Slot X2
only be acknowledged if those
signals that initiated the setting are /BO 4]
fallen back and the hold time is
expired.
BO5.1 Module input state: Assignment [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 5]
BO5.2 Module input state: Assignment [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 5]
BO5.3 Module input state: Assignment [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 5]
BO5.4 Module input state: Assignment [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 5]

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 157

Binary Output Relays

Name Description Assignment via

BO5.5 Module input state: Assignment [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 5]
BO5.6 Module input state: Assignment [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 5]
BO5.7 Module input state: Assignment [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 5]
Ack signal BO 5 Module input state: [Device Para
Acknowledgment signal for the
/Binary Outputs
binary output relay. If latching is set
to active, the binary output relay can /BO Slot X2
only be acknowledged if those
signals that initiated the setting are /BO 5]
fallen back and the hold time is
expired.
BO6.1 Module input state: Assignment [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 6]
BO6.2 Module input state: Assignment [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 6]
BO6.3 Module input state: Assignment [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 6]
BO6.4 Module input state: Assignment [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 6]
BO6.5 Module input state: Assignment [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 6]

Page 158 EN MRA4 04/09

Binary Output Relays

Name Description Assignment via

BO6.6 Module input state: Assignment [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 6]
BO6.7 Module input state: Assignment [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 6]
Ack signal BO 6 Module input state: [Device Para
Acknowledgment signal for the
binary output relay. If latching is set /Binary Outputs
to active, the binary output relay can /BO Slot X2
only be acknowledged if those
signals that initiated the setting are /BO 6]
fallen back and the hold time is
expired.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 159

Binary Output Relays

Binary Output Relay Signals

Name Description
BO 1 Signal: Binary Output Relay
BO 2 Signal: Binary Output Relay
BO 3 Signal: Binary Output Relay
BO 4 Signal: Binary Output Relay
BO 5 Signal: Binary Output Relay
BO 6 Signal: Binary Output Relay

Page 160 EN MRA4 04/09

Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)

Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)

LEDs group A ,LEDs group B

Attention must be paid that there are no overlapping functions due to

double or multiple LED assignment of colors and flashing codes.

If LEDs are parameterized »Latched=active«, they will keep (return into)

their blink code/color even if there is a break within the power supply.

If LEDs are parameterized »Latched=active«, The LED blink code will also
retain, if the LED is reprogrammed in another way. This applies also if
»Latched is set to inactive«. Resetting a LED that has latched a signal will
always require an acknowledgment.

This chapter contains information on the LEDs that are placed on the left
hand of the display (group A).

If your device is also equipped with LEDs on the right hand of the display
(group B), the information in this chapter is valid analog. The only
difference is “group A” and “group B” within the menu paths.

Via push button »INFO« it is always possible to display the current alarms/alarm texts that are assigned to an
LED. Please refer to chapter Navigation (description of the »INFO-key«).

Set the following parameters for each LED:

• »Latching/self holding function«: If »Latching« is set to »active«, the state that is set by the alarms will be
stored. If latching »Latching« is set to »inactive«, the LED always adopts the state of those alarms that
were assigned.

• »Acknowledgment« (signal from the »assignment list«)

• »LED active color«, LED lights up in this color in case that at least one of the allocated functions is valid
(red, red flashing, green, green flashing, off).

• »LED inactive color«, LED lights up in this color in case that none of the allocated functions is valid (red,
red flashing, green, green flashing, off).

• Apart from the LED for System OK, each LED can be assigned up to five functions/alarms out of the
»assignment list«.

• »Inverting« (of the signals), if necessary.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 161

Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)

Acknowledgment options

LEDs can be acknowledged by:

• Via the push-button »C« at the operating panel.

• Each LED can be acknowledged by a signal of the »assignment list« (If »Latched = active«).

• Via the module »Ex Acknowledge« all LEDs can be acknowledged at once, if the signal for external
acknowledgment that was selected from the »assignment list« becomes true (e.g. the state of a digital
input).

• Via SCADA, all LEDs can be acknowledged at once.

Via the Internet you can download a PDF-Template in order to create and
print out self adhesive films for LED assignment texts (front foil) by means
of a laser printer. Recommendation: (AVERY Zweckform Art.Nr.3482)

Page 162 EN MRA4 04/09

EN MRA4 04/09
Assignment 1 =1

Inverting 1

Assignment 2 =1
Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)

Inverting 2
>1

Assignment 3 =1
>1 LED active color
Inverting 3

Assignment 4 =1 LED inactive color

1
Inverting 4

Assignment 5 =1

Inverting 5
& S1 1

R 1
Latched

inactive

active

Acknowledge -HMI >1

Acknowledge-1..n, Assignment List
Acknowledge-Scada

Page 163
Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)

The »System OK« LED

This LED flashes green while the device is booting. After completed booting, the LED for System OK lights up in
green thus signalizing that the protection (function) is »activated«. If, however, in spite of successful booting, or
after the third unsuccessful reboot caused by the module self supervision the System OK – LED flashes in red
or is red illuminated, please contact the Woodward SEG – Service Dept (See also chapter Self Supervision).

LED System OK cannot be parameterized.

Page 164 EN MRA4 04/09

Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)

Global Protection Parameters of the LED Module

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
Latched Defines whether the inactive, inactive [Device Para
LED will be
active /LEDs
acknowledged
automatically if the /LEDs group A
event is gone or
whether the LED is /LED 1]
to be acknowledged
by a signal/manually.

Ack signal Acknowledgment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para

signal for the LED. If
latching is set to /LEDs
active the LED can /LEDs group A
only be
acknowledged if /LED 1]
those signals that
initiated the setting
are fallen back.

Dependency Only
available if: Latched
= active
LED active color The LED lights up in green, LEDs group A: green [Device Para
this color if the state
of the OR- red, LEDs group B: red /LEDs
assignment of the red flash, /LEDs group A
signals is true.
green flash, /LED 1]
-
LED inactive color The LED lights up in green, - [Device Para
this color if the state
of the OR- red, /LEDs
assignment of the red flash, /LEDs group A
signals is untrue.
green flash, /LED 1]
-
Assignment 1 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List LEDs group A: active [Device Para
LEDs group B: - /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
Inverting 1 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /LEDs
signal.
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
Assignment 2 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 165

Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

Inverting 2 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /LEDs
signal.
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
Assignment 3 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
Inverting 3 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /LEDs
signal.
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
Assignment 4 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
Inverting 4 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /LEDs
signal.
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
Assignment 5 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
Inverting 5 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /LEDs
signal.
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
Latched Defines whether the inactive, LEDs group A: active [Device Para
LED will be
active LEDs group B: /LEDs
acknowledged
inactive
automatically if the /LEDs group A
event is gone or
whether the LED is /LED 2]
to be acknowledged
by a signal/manually.

Page 166 EN MRA4 04/09

Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

Ack signal Acknowledgment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
signal for the LED. If
latching is set to /LEDs
active the LED can /LEDs group A
only be
acknowledged if /LED 2]
those signals that
initiated the setting
are fallen back.

Only available if:

Latched = active
LED active color The LED lights up in green, red [Device Para
this color if the state
red, /LEDs
of the OR-
assignment of the red flash, /LEDs group A
signals is true.
green flash, /LED 2]
-
LED inactive color The LED lights up in green, - [Device Para
this color if the state
red, /LEDs
of the OR-
assignment of the red flash, /LEDs group A
signals is untrue.
green flash, /LED 2]
-
Assignment 1 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List LEDs group A: [Device Para
TripCmd
/LEDs
LEDs group B: -
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]
Inverting 1 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /LEDs
signal.
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]
Assignment 2 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]
Inverting 2 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /LEDs
signal.
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]
Assignment 3 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 167

Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

Inverting 3 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /LEDs
signal.
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]
Assignment 4 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]
Inverting 4 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /LEDs
signal.
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]
Assignment 5 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]
Inverting 5 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /LEDs
signal.
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]
Latched Defines whether the inactive, inactive [Device Para
LED will be
active /LEDs
acknowledged
automatically if the /LEDs group A
event is gone or
whether the LED is /LED 3]
to be acknowledged
by a signal/manually.

Ack signal Acknowledgment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para

signal for the LED. If
/LEDs
latching is set to
active the LED can /LEDs group A
only be
acknowledged if /LED 3]
those signals that
initiated the setting
are fallen back.

Only available if:

Latched = active
LED active color The LED lights up in green, LEDs group A: red [Device Para
this color if the state flash
red, /LEDs
of the OR-
LEDs group B: red
assignment of the red flash, /LEDs group A
signals is true.
green flash, /LED 3]
-

Page 168 EN MRA4 04/09

Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

LED inactive color The LED lights up in green, - [Device Para
this color if the state
red, /LEDs
of the OR-
assignment of the red flash, /LEDs group A
signals is untrue.
green flash, /LED 3]
-
Assignment 1 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List LEDs group A: Alarm [Device Para
LEDs group B: - /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]
Inverting 1 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /LEDs
signal.
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]
Assignment 2 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]
Inverting 2 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /LEDs
signal.
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]
Assignment 3 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]
Inverting 3 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /LEDs
signal.
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]
Assignment 4 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]
Inverting 4 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /LEDs
signal.
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 169

Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

Assignment 5 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]
Inverting 5 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /LEDs
signal.
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]
Latched Defines whether the inactive, inactive [Device Para
LED will be
acknowledged active /LEDs
automatically if the /LEDs group A
event is gone or
whether the LED is /LED 4]
to be acknowledged
by a signal/manually.

Ack signal Acknowledgment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para

signal for the LED. If
/LEDs
latching is set to
active the LED can /LEDs group A
only be
acknowledged if /LED 4]
those signals that
initiated the setting
are fallen back.

Only available if:

Latched = active
LED active color The LED lights up in green, red [Device Para
this color if the state
of the OR- red, /LEDs
assignment of the red flash, /LEDs group A
signals is true.
green flash, /LED 4]
-
LED inactive color The LED lights up in green, - [Device Para
this color if the state
red, /LEDs
of the OR-
assignment of the red flash, /LEDs group A
signals is untrue.
green flash, /LED 4]
-
Assignment 1 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]

Page 170 EN MRA4 04/09

Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

Inverting 1 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /LEDs
signal.
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]
Assignment 2 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]
Inverting 2 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /LEDs
signal.
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]
Assignment 3 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]
Inverting 3 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /LEDs
signal.
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]
Assignment 4 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]
Inverting 4 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /LEDs
signal.
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]
Assignment 5 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]
Inverting 5 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /LEDs
signal.
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 171

Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

Latched Defines whether the inactive, inactive [Device Para
LED will be
acknowledged active /LEDs
automatically if the /LEDs group A
event is gone or
whether the LED is /LED 5]
to be acknowledged
by a signal/manually.

Ack signal Acknowledgment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para

signal for the LED. If
/LEDs
latching is set to
active the LED can /LEDs group A
only be
acknowledged if /LED 5]
those signals that
initiated the setting
are fallen back.

Only available if:

Latched = active
LED active color The LED lights up in green, red [Device Para
this color if the state
of the OR- red, /LEDs
assignment of the red flash, /LEDs group A
signals is true.
green flash, /LED 5]
-
LED inactive color The LED lights up in green, - [Device Para
this color if the state
of the OR- red, /LEDs
assignment of the red flash, /LEDs group A
signals is untrue.
green flash, /LED 5]
-
Assignment 1 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
Inverting 1 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /LEDs
signal.
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
Assignment 2 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]

Page 172 EN MRA4 04/09

Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

Inverting 2 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /LEDs
signal.
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
Assignment 3 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
Inverting 3 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /LEDs
signal.
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
Assignment 4 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
Inverting 4 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /LEDs
signal.
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
Assignment 5 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
Inverting 5 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /LEDs
signal.
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
Latched Defines whether the inactive, inactive [Device Para
LED will be
active /LEDs
acknowledged
automatically if the /LEDs group A
event is gone or
whether the LED is /LED 6]
to be acknowledged
by a signal/manually.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 173

Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

Ack signal Acknowledgment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
signal for the LED. If
latching is set to /LEDs
active the LED can /LEDs group A
only be
acknowledged if /LED 6]
those signals that
initiated the setting
are fallen back.

Only available if:

Latched = active
LED active color The LED lights up in green, red [Device Para
this color if the state
red, /LEDs
of the OR-
assignment of the red flash, /LEDs group A
signals is true.
green flash, /LED 6]
-
LED inactive color The LED lights up in green, - [Device Para
this color if the state
red, /LEDs
of the OR-
assignment of the red flash, /LEDs group A
signals is untrue.
green flash, /LED 6]
-
Assignment 1 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
Inverting 1 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /LEDs
signal.
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
Assignment 2 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
Inverting 2 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /LEDs
signal.
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
Assignment 3 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]

Page 174 EN MRA4 04/09

Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

Inverting 3 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /LEDs
signal.
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
Assignment 4 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
Inverting 4 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /LEDs
signal.
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
Assignment 5 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
Inverting 5 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /LEDs
signal.
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
Latched Defines whether the inactive, inactive [Device Para
LED will be
active /LEDs
acknowledged
automatically if the /LEDs group A
event is gone or
whether the LED is /LED 7]
to be acknowledged
by a signal/manually.

Ack signal Acknowledgment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para

signal for the LED. If
/LEDs
latching is set to
active the LED can /LEDs group A
only be
acknowledged if /LED 7]
those signals that
initiated the setting
are fallen back.

Only available if:

Latched = active
LED active color The LED lights up in green, red [Device Para
this color if the state
red, /LEDs
of the OR-
assignment of the red flash, /LEDs group A
signals is true.
green flash, /LED 7]
-

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 175

Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

LED inactive color The LED lights up in green, - [Device Para
this color if the state
red, /LEDs
of the OR-
assignment of the red flash, /LEDs group A
signals is untrue.
green flash, /LED 7]
-
Assignment 1 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]
Inverting 1 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /LEDs
signal.
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]
Assignment 2 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]
Inverting 2 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /LEDs
signal.
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]
Assignment 3 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]
Inverting 3 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /LEDs
signal.
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]
Assignment 4 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]
Inverting 4 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /LEDs
signal.
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]

Page 176 EN MRA4 04/09

Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

Assignment 5 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]
Inverting 5 Inverting of the state inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the assigned
active /LEDs
signal.
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 177

Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)

LED Module Input States

Name Description Assignment via
LED1.1 Module input state: LED [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
LED1.2 Module input state: LED [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
LED1.3 Module input state: LED [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
LED1.4 Module input state: LED [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
LED1.5 Module input state: LED [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
Acknow Sig 1 Module input state: [Device Para
Acknowledgment Signal (only for
/LEDs
automatic acknowledgment)
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
LED2.1 Module input state: LED [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]
LED2.2 Module input state: LED [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]
LED2.3 Module input state: LED [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]

Page 178 EN MRA4 04/09

Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)

Name Description Assignment via

LED2.4 Module input state: LED [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]
LED2.5 Module input state: LED [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]
Acknow Sig 2 Module input state: [Device Para
Acknowledgment Signal (only for
/LEDs
automatic acknowledgment)
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]
LED3.1 Module input state: LED [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]
LED3.2 Module input state: LED [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]
LED3.3 Module input state: LED [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]
LED3.4 Module input state: LED [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]
LED3.5 Module input state: LED [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]
Acknow Sig 3 Module input state: [Device Para
Acknowledgment Signal (only for
/LEDs
automatic acknowledgment)
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]
LED4.1 Module input state: LED [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 179

Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)

Name Description Assignment via

LED4.2 Module input state: LED [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]
LED4.3 Module input state: LED [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]
LED4.4 Module input state: LED [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]
LED4.5 Module input state: LED [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]
Acknow Sig 4 Module input state: [Device Para
Acknowledgment Signal (only for
/LEDs
automatic acknowledgment)
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]
LED5.1 Module input state: LED [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
LED5.2 Module input state: LED [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
LED5.3 Module input state: LED [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
LED5.4 Module input state: LED [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
LED5.5 Module input state: LED [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]

Page 180 EN MRA4 04/09

Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)

Name Description Assignment via

Acknow Sig 5 Module input state: [Device Para
Acknowledgment Signal (only for
/LEDs
automatic acknowledgment)
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
LED6.1 Module input state: LED [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
LED6.2 Module input state: LED [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
LED6.3 Module input state: LED [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
LED6.4 Module input state: LED [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
LED6.5 Module input state: LED [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
Acknow Sig 6 Module input state: [Device Para
Acknowledgment Signal (only for
/LEDs
automatic acknowledgment)
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
LED7.1 Module input state: LED [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]
LED7.2 Module input state: LED [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]
LED7.3 Module input state: LED [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 181

Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)

Name Description Assignment via

LED7.4 Module input state: LED [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]
LED7.5 Module input state: LED [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]
Acknow Sig 7 Module input state: [Device Para
Acknowledgment Signal (only for
/LEDs
automatic acknowledgment)
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]

Page 182 EN MRA4 04/09

Operating Panel (HMI)

Operating Panel (HMI)

HMI

Special Parameters of the Panel

This menu »Device Parameter/HMI« is used to define the contrast of the display, the maximum admissible edit
time and the menu language (after expiry of which, all unsaved parameter changes will be rejected).

Direct Commands of the Panel

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
Contrast Contrast 30 - 60 50 [Device Para
/HMI]

Global Protection Parameters of the Panel

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
t-max Edit If no other key(s) is 20 - 3600s 180s [Device Para
pressed at the panel,
/HMI]
after expiration of
this time, all cached
(changed)
parameters are
cancelled.

Menu language Selection of the English, English [Device Para

language
German /HMI]

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 183

Module: Disturbance Recorder

Module: Disturbance Recorder

Disturb rec

The disturbance recorder works with 32 samples per cycle. The disturbance recorder can be started by one of
eight start events (selection from the »assignment list«/OR-Logic).

The disturbance record contains the measuring values inclusively pre-trigger-time. By means of Smart
view/Datavisualizer (option) the oscillographic curves of the analogue (current, voltage) and digital
channels/traces can be shown and evaluated in a graphical form.

The disturbance recorder has a storage capacity of 120s. The disturbance recorder is able to record up to 10 s
(adjustable) per record. The amount of records depends on the file size of each record.

The disturbance recorder can be parameterized in the menu »Device Parameter/Recorder/Disturb rec«.

Determine the max. recording time to register a disturbance event. The max. total length of a recording is 10s
(inclusive pre-trigger and post-trigger time).

To trigger the disturbance recorder, up to 8 signals can be selected from the »assignment list«. The trigger
events are OR-linked. If a disturbance record is written, a new disturbance record cannot be triggered until all
trigger signals, which have triggered the previous disturbance record, are gone.

Recording is only done for the time the assigned event exists (event controlled), plus the time for the pre- and
post-trigger, but not longer than 10s. The time for forward run and tracking of the disturbance recorder is shown
in percent of the total recording length.

Example
The disturbance recorder is started by the general activation facility. After the fault has been cancelled
(+ follow-up time), the recording process is stopped (but after 10s at the latest).

The parameter »Auto Delete« defines how the device shall react if there is no saving place available. In case
»Auto Delete« is »active«, the first recorded disturbance will be overwritten according to the FIFO principle. If the
parameter is set to »inactive«, recording of the disturbance events will be stopped until the storage location is
released manually.

>1
Start: 1
Trigger

Start: 2
Trigger

Start: 3
Trigger

Start: 4
Trigger

>1
Recording
Start: 5
Trigger

Start: 6
Trigger

Start: 7
Trigger

Start: 8
Trigger

Man Trigger

Page 184 EN MRA4 04/09

Module: Disturbance Recorder

Example Disturbance Recorder Timing Chart I

Start 1 = Prot.Trip
Start 2 = -.-
Start 3 = -.-
Start 4 = -.-
Start 5 = -.-
Start 6 = -.-
Start 7 = -.-
Start 8 = -.-
t-rec < Max file size
Auto overwriting = active
Follow-up time = 25%

Start 1 Pre-trigger time = 15%

200 ms Max file size = 2s

Pre-trigger time

300 ms
1

Follow-up time

500 ms
1

t-rec

1000 ms
1

Max file size

2000 ms
1

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 185

Module: Disturbance Recorder

Example Disturbance Recorder Timing Chart II

Start 1 = Prot.Alarm
Start 2 = -.-
Start 3 = -.-
Start 4 = -.-
Start 5 = -.-
Start 6 = -.-
Start 7 = -.-
Start 8 = -.-
Auto overwriting = active

t-rec = Max file size Follow-up time = 25%

Pre-trigger time = 15%

Max file size = 2s
Start 1

1335 ms

Pre-trigger time

300 ms
1

Follow-up time

365 ms
1

t-rec

2000 ms
1

Max file size

2000 ms
1

Page 186 EN MRA4 04/09

Module: Disturbance Recorder

Read Out Disturbance Records

Within the Menu Operation/Disturb rec you can

• Detect accumulated Disturbance Records.

Within the Menu »Operation/Recorders/Man Trigger« you can trigger the

disturbance recorder manually.

Disturbance Recorder to be Read Out by Smart view

• In case Smart view is not running – please start it.

• If device data has not been loaded yet – click »Receive Data From The Device« in menu »Device«.

• Double click the »Operation« icon in the navigation tree.

• Double click the »Recorders« icon in the navigation tree.

• Double click the »Disturb rec-Icon«.

• In the window the disturbance records are shown in tabular form.

• A popup will be appear by a double click onto a disturbance record. Choose a folder where the
disturbance record is to be saved to.

• You can analyze the disturbance records by means of the optionally available Data Visualizer by clicking
on Yes when you are asked “Shall the received disturbance record be opened by the Data Visualizer?"

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 187

Module: Disturbance Recorder

Deleting Disturbance Records

Within the Menu Operation/Disturb rec you can

• Delete Disturbance Records.

• Choose via »SOFTKEY« »up« and »SOFTKEY« »down« the disturbance record that is to be deleted.

• Call up the detailed view of the disturbance record via »SOFTKEY« »right«.

• Confirm by pressing »SOFTKEY« »delete«

• Enter your password followed by pressing the key »OK«

• Choose whether only the current of whether all disturbance records should be deleted.

• Confirm by pressing »SOFTKEY« »OK«

Deleting Disturbance Records via Smart view

• In case Smart view is not running – please start it.

• If device data has not been loaded yet – click »Receive Data From The Device« in menu »Device«.

• Double click the »Operation« icon in the navigation tree.

• Double click the »Recorders« icon in the navigation tree.

• Double click the »Disturb rec-Icon«.

• In the window the disturbance records are shown in tabular form.

• In order to delete a disturbance record double click on:

(the red x) in front of the disturbance record and confirm.

Page 188 EN MRA4 04/09

Module: Disturbance Recorder

Direct Commands of the Disturbance Recorder Module

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
Man Trigger Manual Trigger Untrue, Untrue [Operation
True /Recorders
/Man Trigger]
Reset all rec Reset all records inactive, inactive [Operation
active /Reset]

Global Protection Parameters of the Disturbance Recorder Module

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
Start: 1 Start recording if the 1..n, Assignment List Alarm [Device Para
assigned signal is
/Recorders
true.
/Disturb rec]

Start: 2 Start recording if the 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para

assigned signal is
/Recorders
true.
/Disturb rec]

Start: 3 Start recording if the 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para

assigned signal is
/Recorders
true.
/Disturb rec]

Start: 4 Start recording if the 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para

assigned signal is
/Recorders
true.
/Disturb rec]

Start: 5 Start recording if the 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para

assigned signal is
/Recorders
true.
/Disturb rec]

Start: 6 Start recording if the 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para

assigned signal is
/Recorders
true.
/Disturb rec]

Start: 7 Start recording if the 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para

assigned signal is
/Recorders
true.
/Disturb rec]

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 189

Module: Disturbance Recorder

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

Start: 8 Start recording if the 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
assigned signal is
/Recorders
true.
/Disturb rec]

Auto overwriting If there is no more inactive, active [Device Para

free memory
active /Recorders
capacity left, the
oldest file will be /Disturb rec]
overwritten.

Follow-up time Follow-up time 0 - 50% 20% [Device Para

/Recorders
/Disturb rec]
Pre-trigger time Pre-trigger time 0 - 50% 20% [Device Para
/Recorders
/Disturb rec]
Max file size Maximum duration of 0.1 - 10.0s 2s [Device Para
the record
/Recorders
/Disturb rec]

Page 190 EN MRA4 04/09

Module: Disturbance Recorder

Disturbance Recorder Module Input States

Name Description Assignment via
Start1-I State of the module input: Trigger [Device Para
event / start recording if:
/Recorders
/Disturb rec]
Start2-I State of the module input: Trigger [Device Para
event / start recording if:
/Recorders
/Disturb rec]
Start3-I State of the module input: Trigger [Device Para
event / start recording if:
/Recorders
/Disturb rec]
Start4-I State of the module input: Trigger [Device Para
event / start recording if:
/Recorders
/Disturb rec]
Start5-I State of the module input: Trigger [Device Para
event / start recording if:
/Recorders
/Disturb rec]
Start6-I State of the module input: Trigger [Device Para
event / start recording if:
/Recorders
/Disturb rec]
Start7-I State of the module input: Trigger [Device Para
event / start recording if:
/Recorders
/Disturb rec]
Start8-I State of the module input: Trigger [Device Para
event / start recording if:
/Recorders
/Disturb rec]

Disturbance Recorder Module Signals

Name Description
recording Signal: Recording
Write err Signal: Writing error in memory
memory full Signal: Memory full
Clear fail Signal: Clear failure in memory
Reset all records Signal: All records deleted
Reset rec Signal: Delete record
Man Trigger Signal: Manual Trigger

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 191

Module: Disturbance Recorder

Special Parameters of the Disturbance Recorder

Value Description Default Size Menu path
Rec state Recording state Ready Ready, [Operation
Recording, /Status display
Writing file, /Disturb rec]
Trigger Blo
Error code Error code OK OK, [Operation
Write err, /Status display
Clear fail, /Disturb rec]
Calculation err,
File not found,
Auto overwriting off

Page 192 EN MRA4 04/09

Module: Fault Recorder

Module: Fault Recorder

Fault rec

The fault recorder can be started by one of eight start events (selection from the »assignment list«/OR-Logic).
The fault recorder can register up to 20 faults. The last of the recorded faults is stored in a fail-safe manner.

If one of the assigned trigger events becomes true, the fault recorder will be started. Each fault is saved inclusive
module and name, fault number, mains fault number and record number at that time one of the trigger events
becomes true. To each of the faults the measuring values (at the time when the trigger event became true) can
be viewed.

Up to 8 signals to trigger the fault recorder can be selected from the »assignment list«. The trigger events are
OR-linked.

The parameter »Auto Delete« defines how the device shall react if there is no saving place available. In case
»Auto Delete« is »active«, the first recorded fault will be overwritten according to the FIFO principle. If the
parameter is set to »inactive«, recording of the fault events will be stopped until the storage location is released
manually.

>1
Start: 1
Trigger

Start: 2
Trigger

Start: 3
Trigger

Start: 4
Trigger

>1
Recording
Start: 5
Trigger

Start: 6
Trigger

Start: 7
Trigger

Start: 8
Trigger

Man Trigger

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 193

Module: Fault Recorder

Read Out the Fault Recorder

The measured values at the time of tripping are saved (failure safe) within the fault recorder. If there is no more
memory free, the oldest record will be overwritten (FIFO).

In order to read out a failure record:

• call up the main menu,

• call up the submenu Operation/Recorders/Fault rec.,

• select a fault record,

• analyze the corresponding measured values.

Read Out the Fault Recorder via Smart View

• In case Smart view is not running – please start it.

• If device data has not been loaded yet – click »Receive Data From The Device« in menu »Device«.

• Double click the »Operation« icon in the navigation tree.

• Double click the »Fault Rec« icon within the tree »Operation/Recorders«.

• In the window the fault recordings are shown in tabular form.

• In order to receive more detailed information on a fault, click the »Plus Sign« in front of the fault number.

Page 194 EN MRA4 04/09

Module: Fault Recorder

Via the print menu you can export the data into a file. Please proceed
as follows:

• Call up the data as described above.

• Call up the menu [File/Print].

• Choose »Print Actual Working Window« within the popup.

• Press the »Print« button.

• Press the »Export to File« button.

• Enter a file name.

• Choose a location where to save the file.

• Confirm the »Save« button.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 195

Module: Fault Recorder

Direct Commands of the Fault Recorder Module

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
Reset all rec Reset all records inactive, inactive [Operation
active /Reset]

Man Trigger Manual Trigger Untrue, Untrue [Operation

True /Recorders
/Man Trigger]

Global Protection Parameters of the Fault Recorder Module

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
Start: 1 Start recording if the 1..n, Assignment List Trip [Device Para
assigned signal is true.
/Recorders
/Fault rec]
Start: 2 Start recording if the 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
assigned signal is true.
/Recorders
/Fault rec]
Start: 3 Start recording if the 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
assigned signal is true.
/Recorders
/Fault rec]
Start: 4 Start recording if the 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
assigned signal is true.
/Recorders
/Fault rec]
Start: 5 Start recording if the 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
assigned signal is true.
/Recorders
/Fault rec]
Start: 6 Start recording if the 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
assigned signal is true.
/Recorders
/Fault rec]
Start: 7 Start recording if the 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
assigned signal is true.
/Recorders
/Fault rec]
Start: 8 Start recording if the 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
assigned signal is true.
/Recorders
/Fault rec]
Auto overwriting If there is no more free inactive, active [Device Para
memory capacity left,
active /Recorders
the oldest file will be
overwritten. /Fault rec]

Page 196 EN MRA4 04/09

Module: Fault Recorder

Fault Recorder Module Input States

Name Description Assignment via
Start1-I State of the module input: Trigger [Device Para
event / start recording if:
/Recorders
/Fault rec]
Start2-I State of the module input: Trigger [Device Para
event / start recording if:
/Recorders
/Fault rec]
Start3-I State of the module input: Trigger [Device Para
event / start recording if:
/Recorders
/Fault rec]
Start4-I State of the module input: Trigger [Device Para
event / start recording if:
/Recorders
/Fault rec]
Start5-I State of the module input: Trigger [Device Para
event / start recording if:
/Recorders
/Fault rec]
Start6-I State of the module input: Trigger [Device Para
event / start recording if:
/Recorders
/Fault rec]
Start7-I State of the module input: Trigger [Device Para
event / start recording if:
/Recorders
/Fault rec]
Start8-I State of the module input: Trigger [Device Para
event / start recording if:
/Recorders
/Fault rec]

Fault Recorder Module Signals

Name Description
Reset rec Signal: Delete record
Man Trigger Signal: Manual Trigger

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 197

Module: Event Recorder

Module: Event Recorder

Event rec

The event recorder can register up to 300 events and the last (minimum) 50 saved events are recorded fail-safe.
The following information is provided for any of the events:

Events are logged as follows:

Record No. Fault No. Netfault No. Date of Record Module.Name State
Sequential Number of the A Netfault No. can Time stamp What has Changed
Number ongoing fault have several Fault changed? Value
No.

This counter will

be incremented This counter will be
by each General incremented by each
Alarm General Alarm.
(Prot.Alarm).
(Exception AR: this
applies only to
devices that offer
auto reclosing).

There are three different classes of events:

• Alternation of binary states are shown as:

• 0->1 if the signal changes physically from »0« to »1«.
• 1->0 if the signal changes physically from »1« to »0«.

• Counters increment is shown as:

• Old Counter state -> New Counter state (e.g. 3->4)

• Alternation of multiple states are shown as:

• Old state -> New state (e.g. 0->2)

Page 198 EN MRA4 04/09

Module: Event Recorder

Read Out the Event Recorder

• Call up the »main menu«.

• Call up the submenu »Operation/Recorders/Event rec«.

• Select an event.

Read Out the Event Recorder via Smart View

• In case Smart view is not running – please start it.

• If device data has not been loaded yet – click »Receive Data From The Device« in menu »Device.

• Double click the »Operation« icon in the navigation tree.

• Double click the »Event Rec« icon within the »OPERATION/RECORDERS« menu.

• In the window the events are shown in tabular form.

To have the event recorder up-dated in a cyclic manner, select »Automatic

Up-Date« in menu View.

Smart view is able to record more events than the device itself, if the
window of the event recorder is opened and »Automatic Up-Date« is set to
active.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 199

Module: Event Recorder

Via the print menu you can export the data into a file. Please proceed as
follows:

• Call up the data as described above.

• Call up the menu [File/Print].

• Choose »Print Actual Working Window« within the popup.

• Press the »Print« button.

• Press the »Export to File« button.

• Enter a file name.

• Choose a location where to save the file.

• Confirm the »Save« button.

Page 200 EN MRA4 04/09

Module: Event Recorder

Direct Commands of the Event Recorder Module

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
Reset all rec Reset all records inactive, inactive [Operation
active /Reset]

Event Recorder Module Signals

Name Description
Reset all records Signal: All records deleted

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 201

Module: SCADA

Module: SCADA
X103

Device Planning Parameters of the Serial Scada Interface

Parameter Description Options Default Menu path
Protocol Caution! Changing -, Modbus [Device planning]
the protocol will
Modbus,
cause a restart of
the device IEC 103

Global Protection Parameters of the Serial Scada Interface

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
Optical rest position Optical rest position Light off, Light on [Device Para
Light on /X103]

Page 202 EN MRA4 04/09

Module: Modbus® (Modbus)

Module: Modbus® (Modbus)

Modbus

Modbus® Protocol Configuration

The time-controlled Modbus® protocol is based on the Master-Slave working principle. This means that the
substation control and protection system sends an enquiry or instruction to a certain device (slave address)
which will then be answered or carried out accordingly. If the enquiry/instruction cannot be answered/carried out
(e.g. because of an invalid slave address), a failure message is returned to the master.

The Master (substation control and protection system) can query information from the device, such as:

• Type of unit version

• Measuring values/Statistical measured values
• Switch operating position (in preparation)
• State of device
• Time and date
• State of the device’s digital inputs
• Protection-/State alarms

The Master (control system) can give commands/instructions to the device, such as:

• Control of switchgear (where applicable, i.e. each acc. to the applied device version)
• Change-over of parameter set
• Reset and acknowledgement of alarms/signals
• Adjustment of date and time
• Control of alarm relays

For detailed information on data point lists and error handling, please refer to the Modbus® documentation.

To allow configuration of the devices for Modbus® connection, some default values of the control system must be
available.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 203

Module: Modbus® (Modbus)

Modbus RTU
Part 1: Configuration of the Devices

Call up »Device parameter/Modbus« and set the following communication parameters there:

• Slave-address, to allow clear identification of the device.

• Baud-Rate

Also, select below indicated RS485 interface-related parameters from there, such as:

• Number of data bits

• One of the following supported communication variants: Number of data bits, even, odd, parity or no
parity, number of stop bits.

• »t-timeout«: communication errors are only identified after expiry of a supervision time »t-timeout«.

• Response time (defining the period within which an enquiry from the master has to be answered).

Part 2: Hardware Connection

• For hardware connection to the control system, there is an RS485 interface at the rear side of the device
(RS485, fiber optic or terminals).

• Connect bus and device (wiring).

Error Handling - Hardware Errors

Information on physical communication errors, such as:

• Baudrate Error
• Parity Error ...

can be obtained from the event recorder.

Error Handling – Errors on protocol level

If, for example, an invalid memory address is enquired, error codes will be returned by the device that need to be
interpreted.

Page 204 EN MRA4 04/09

Module: Modbus® (Modbus)

Modbus TCP
Establishing a connection via TCP/IP to the device is only possible if your
device is equipped with an Ethernet Interface (RJ45).

Contact your IT administrator in order to establish the network connection.

Part 1: Setting the TCP/IP Parameters

Call up »Device parameter/TCP/IP« at the HMI (panel) and set the following parameters:

• TCP/IP address

• Subnetmask

• Gateway

Part 2: Configuration of the Devices

Call up »Device parameter/Modbus« and set the following communication parameters:

• Setting a Unit Identifier is only necessary if a TCP network should be coupled to a RTU network.

• If a different port than the default port 502 should be used please proceed as follows:

• Choose “Private” within the TCP-Port-Configuration.

• Set the port-number.

• Set the maximum accepted time of “no communication”. If this time has expired – without any
comunication, the device concludes a failure within the master system.

• Allow or disallow the blocking of SCADA commands.

Part 3: Hardware Connection

• There is a RJ45 interface at the rear side of the device for the hardware connection to the control system.

• Establish the connection to the device by means of a proper Ethernet cable.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 205

Module: Modbus® (Modbus)

Direct Commands of the Modbus®

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
Reset Diagn Cr All Modbus Diagnosis inactive, inactive [Operation
Counters will be reset.
active /Reset]

Global Protection Parameters of the Modbus®

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
Slave ID Device address (Slave ID) within the bus 1 - 247 1 [Device Para
system. Each device address has to be
/Modbus]
unique within a bus system.

Only available if:Device planning = RTU

Unit ID The Unit Identifier is used for routing. 1 - 255 255 [Device Para
This parameter is to be set, if a Modbus
/Modbus]
RTU and a Modbus TCP network should
be coupled.

Only available if:Device planning = TCP

TCP Port Config TCP Port Configuration. This parameter Default, Default [Device Para
is to be set only if the default Modubs
Private /Modbus]
TCP Port should not be used.

Only available if:Device planning = TCP

Port Port number 502 - 65535 502 [Device Para
/Modbus]
Only available if:Device planning = TCP
Only available if: TCP Port Config =
Private
t-timeout Within this time the answer has to be 0.01 - 10.00s 1s [Device Para
received by the SCADA system,
/Modbus]
otherwise the request will be
disregarded. In that case the Scada
system detects a communication failure
and the Scada System has to send a
new request.

Only available if:Device planning = RTU

Baud rate Baud rate 1200, 19200 [Device Para
2400, /Modbus]
Only available if:Device planning = RTU
4800,
9600,
19200,
38400

Page 206 EN MRA4 04/09

Module: Modbus® (Modbus)

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

Physical Settings Digit 1: Number of bits. Digit 2: E=even 8E1, 8E1 [Device Para
parity, O=odd parity, N=no parity. Digit 3:
8O1, /Modbus]
Number of stop bits. More information on
the parity: It is possible that the last data 8N1,
bit is followed by a parity bit which is
8N2
used for recognition of communication
errors. The parity bit ensures that with
even parity ("EVEN") always an even
number of bits with valence "1" or with
odd parity ("ODD") an odd number of "1"
valence bits are transmitted. But it is also
possible to transmit no parity bits (here
the setting is "Parity = None"). More
information on the stop-bits: The end of a
data byte is terminated by the stop-bits.

Only available if:Device planning = RTU

t-call If there is no request telegram sent from 1 - 3600s 10s [Device Para
Scada to the device after expiry of this
/Modbus]
time - the device concludes a
communication failure within the Scada
system.

Scada CmdBlo Activating (allowing)/ Deactivating inactive, inactive [Device Para

(disallowing) the blocking of the Scada
active /Modbus]
Commands

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 207

Module: Modbus® (Modbus)

Modbus® Module Signals (Output States)

Some signals (that are for a short time active only) have to be acknowledged
separately (e.g. Trip signals) by the Communication System.

Name Description
Transmission Signal: SCADA active
Scada Cmd 1 Scada Command
Scada Cmd 2 Scada Command
Scada Cmd 3 Scada Command
Scada Cmd 4 Scada Command
Scada Cmd 5 Scada Command
Scada Cmd 6 Scada Command
Scada Cmd 7 Scada Command
Scada Cmd 8 Scada Command
Scada Cmd 9 Scada Command
Scada Cmd 10 Scada Command
Scada Cmd 11 Scada Command
Scada Cmd 12 Scada Command
Scada Cmd 13 Scada Command
Scada Cmd 14 Scada Command
Scada Cmd 15 Scada Command
Scada Cmd 16 Scada Command

Page 208 EN MRA4 04/09

Module: Modbus® (Modbus)

Modbus® Module Values

Value Description Default Size Menu path
NoOfRequestsTotal Total number of requests. Includes 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
requests for other slaves.
/Count and RevData
/Modbus]

NoOfRequestsForMe Total Number of requests for this slave. 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation

/Count and RevData
/Modbus]
NoOfRespons Total number of requests. 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
/Count and RevData
Only available if:Device planning = TCP
/Modbus]
NoOfResponsTimeOverr Total number of requests with exceeded 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
uns response time. Physically corrupted
/Count and RevData
Frame.
/Modbus]
Only available if:Device planning = RTU
NoOfOverrunErros Total Number of Overrun Failures. 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
Physically corrupted Frame.
/Count and RevData
/Modbus]
Only available if:Device planning = RTU
NoOfParityErrors Total number of parity errors. Physically 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
corrupted Frame.
/Count and RevData
/Modbus]
Only available if:Device planning = RTU
NoOfFrameErrors Total Number of Frame Errors. Physically 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
corrupted Frame.
/Count and RevData
/Modbus]
Only available if:Device planning = RTU
NoOfBreaks Number of detected communication aborts 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
/Count and RevData
Only available if:Device planning = RTU
/Modbus]
NoOfQueryInvalid Total number of Request errors. Request 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
could not be interpreted
/Count and RevData
/Modbus]

NoOfInternalError Total Number of Internal errors while 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation

interpreting the request.
/Count and RevData
/Modbus]

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 209

Module: IEC60870-5-103

Module: IEC60870-5-103
IEC 103

IEC60870-5-103 Protocol Configuration

In order to use the IEC60870-5-103 protocol it has to be assigned to the X103 Interface within the Device
Planning. The device will reboot after setting this parameter.

The parameter X103 is only available if the device is at the rear side
equipped with an interface like RS485 or Fiber Optic.

If the device is equipped with an Fiber Optic Interface, the Optical Rest
Position has to be set within the Device Parameters .

The time-controlled IEC60870-5-103 protocol is based on the Master-Slave working principle. This means that
the substation control and protection system sends an enquiry or instruction to a certain device (slave address)
which will then be answered or carried out accordingly.
The device meets the compatibility mode 2. Compatibility mode 3 is not supported.

The following IEC60870-5-103-functions will be supported:

• Initialization (Reset)
• Time Synchronization
• Reading out of time stamped, instantaneous signals
• General Queries
• Cyclic Signals
• General Commands
• Transmission of Disturbance Data

Initialization
The communication has to be reset by a Reset Command each time that the device is turned on or that
communication parameters have been changed. The “Reset CU” Command resets. The relay acts on both
Reset Commands (Reset CU or Reset FCB).

The relay acts on the reset command by an identification signal ASDU 5 (Application Service Data Unit), as a
reason (Cause Of Transmission, COT) for the transmission of the answer either a “Reset CU” or a “Reset FCB”
will be sent depending on the type of the reset command. This information can be part of the data section of the
ASDU-signal.

Name of the Manufacturer

The section for the identification of the software contains three digits of the device code for the identification of
the device type. Beside the upper mentioned identification number the device generates a communication start
event.

Time Synchronization
Time and date of the relay can be set by means of the time synchronization function of the IEC60870-5-103
protocol. If the time synchronization signal is send out with a confirmation request, the device will answer with a
confirmation signal.

Page 210 EN MRA4 04/09

Module: IEC60870-5-103

Spontaneous Events
The events that are generated by the device will be forwarded to the master with numbers for standard function
types / standard information. The data point list comprises all events that can be generated by the device.

Cyclic Measurement
The device generates on a cyclic base measured values by means of ASDU 9. They can be read out via a class
2 query. Please take into account that the measured values will be send out as multiples (1.2 or 2.4 times the
rated value). How to set 1.2 or 2.4 as multiplier for a value can be taken from the data point list.

The parameter “Transm priv meas val” defines if additional measurement values should be transmitted in the
private part. Public and private measured values are transmitted by ASDU9. That means that either a “private” or
a “public” ASDU9 will be transmitted. If this parameter is set, the ASDU9 will contain additional measured values
that are an enhancement of the standard. The “private” ASDU9 is send with a fixed function type and information
number that does not depend the type of device. Please refer to the data point list.

Commands
The data point list comprises a list of the supported commands. Any command will be responded by the device
with a positve or negative confirmation. If the command is executable, the execution with the corresponding
reason for the transmission (COT) will be lead in at first, and subsequently the execution will be confirmed with
COT1 within a ASDU9.

Disturbance Recording
The disturbances recorded by the device can be read out by means described in standard IEC60870-5-103.
The device is in compliance with the VDEW-Control System by transmission of an ASDU 23 without disturbance
records at the beginning of an GI-Cycle.

A disturbance record contains the following information:

• Analog Measured Values, IL1, IL2, IL3, IN, Voltages VL1, VL2, VL3, VEN;
• Binary States, transmitted as marks, eg Alarms and Trips.
• Das Transmission ratio will not be supported. The transmission ratio is included in the “Multiplier”.

Blocking the Transmission Direction

The relay does not support functions to block the transmission in a certain direction (supervision direction).

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 211

Module: IEC60870-5-103

Global Protection Parameters of the IEC60870-5-103

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
Slave ID Device address (Slave ID) 1 - 247 1 [Device Para
within the bus system. Each
/IEC 103]
device address has to be
unique within a bus system.

t-call If there is no request telegram 1 - 3600s 60s [Device Para

sent from Scada to the device
/IEC 103]
after expiry of this time - the
device concludes a
communication failure within
the Scada system.

Transm priv meas Transmit additional (private) inactive, inactive [Device Para
val measuring values
active /IEC 103]

Baud rate Baud rate 1200, 19200 [Device Para

2400, /IEC 103]
4800,
9600,
19200,
38400,
57600
Physical Settings Digit 1: Number of bits. Digit 8E1, 8E1 [Device Para
2: E=even parity, O=odd
8O1, /IEC 103]
parity, N=no parity. Digit 3:
Number of stop bits. More 8N1,
information on the parity: It is
possible that the last data bit 8N2
is followed by a parity bit
which is used for recognition
of communication errors. The
parity bit ensures that with
even parity ("EVEN") always
an even number of bits with
valence "1" or with odd parity
("ODD") an odd number of "1"
valence bits are transmitted.
But it is also possible to
transmit no parity bits (here
the setting is "Parity = None").
More information on the stop-
bits: The end of a data byte is
terminated by the stop-bits.

Page 212 EN MRA4 04/09

Module: IEC60870-5-103

IEC60870-5-103 Module Signals (Output States)

Name Description
Scada Cmd 1 Scada Command
Scada Cmd 2 Scada Command
Scada Cmd 3 Scada Command
Scada Cmd 4 Scada Command
Scada Cmd 5 Scada Command
Scada Cmd 6 Scada Command
Scada Cmd 7 Scada Command
Scada Cmd 8 Scada Command
Scada Cmd 9 Scada Command
Scada Cmd 10 Scada Command
Transmission Signal: SCADA active
Fail phy Interf Failure in the physical interface
Failure Event lost Failure event lost

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 213

Module: IEC60870-5-103

IEC60870-5-103 Module Values

Value Description Default Size Menu path
Internal erorrs Internal erorrs 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
/Count and RevData
/IEC 103]
NReceived Total Number of 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
received Messages
/Count and RevData
/IEC 103]
NSent Total Number of sent 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
Messages
/Count and RevData
/IEC 103]
NBadFramings Number of bad 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
Messages
/Count and RevData
/IEC 103]
NBadParities Number of Parity 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
Errors
/Count and RevData
/IEC 103]
NBreakSignals Number of 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
Communication
/Count and RevData
Interrupts
/IEC 103]
NInternalError Number of Internal 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
Errors
/Count and RevData
/IEC 103]
NBadCharChecksu Number of 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
m Checksum Errors
/Count and RevData
/IEC 103]

Page 214 EN MRA4 04/09

Parameters

Parameters
Parameter setting and planning can be done:

• directly at the device or

• by way of the Smart view software.

Parameter Definitions

Device Parameters
Device Parameters are part of the Device Parameter Tree. By means of them you can (depending on the type
of device):

• Set cutoff levels,

• Assign Digital Inputs,
• Assign LEDs,
• Assign Acknowledgment Signals,
• Configure Statistics,
• Adapt HMI Settings,
• Configure Recorders (reports),
• Set Date and Time,
• Change Passwords,
• Check the version (build) of the device.

Field Parameters
Field Parameters are part of the Device Parameter Tree. Field Parameters comprise the essential, basic
settings of your switchboard such as rated frequency, transformer ratios.

Protection Parameters
Protection Parameters are part of the Device Parameter Tree. This tree comprises:

• Global Protection Parameters are part of the Protection Parameters: All settings and assignments
that are done within the Global Parameter Tree are valid independent of the Setting Groups. They have
to be set once only. In addition to that they comprise the CB Management.

• The Parameter Setting Switch is part of the Protection Parameters: You can either direct switch
onto a certain parameter setting group or you can determine the conditions for switching onto another
parameter setting group.

• Setting Group Parameters are part of the Protection Parameters: By means of the Parameter
Setting Group Parameters you can individually adapt you protective device to the current conditions or
grid conditions. They can be individually set in each Setting group.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 215

Parameters

Device Planning Parameters

Device Planning Parameters are part of the Device Parameter Tree.

• Improving the Usability (clearness): All protection modules that are currently not needed can be
• de-protected (switched to invisible) by means of Device Planning. In Menu Device Planning you can
adapt the scope of functionality of the protective device exactly to your needs. You can improve the
usability by de-projecting all modules that are currently not needed.

• Adapting the device to your application: For those modules that you need, determine how they
should work (e.g. directional, non-directional, <, >...).

Direct Commands
Direct Commands are NOT part of the Device Parameter Tree. They will be executed directly (e.g. Resetting of
a Counter).

State of the Module Inputs

Module Inputs are part of the Device Parameter Tree. The State of the Module Input is context-dependent.

By means of the Module Inputs influence can be taken on the Modules. You can assign Signals onto Module
Inputs. The state of the signals that are assigned to an input can be taken from the Status Display. Module
Inputs can be identified by an „-I“ at the end of the name.

Signals
Signals are part of the Device Parameter Tree. The state of the signal is context-dependent.

• Signals represent the state of your installation/equipment (e.g. Position Indicators of the Circuit
Breaker).

• Signals are assessments of the state of the grid and the equipment (System OK, Transformer failure
detected...).

• Signals represent decisions that are taken by the device (e.g. Trip command) based on your parameter
settings.

Page 216 EN MRA4 04/09

 Parameters

EN MRA4 04/09
Protection Para/Global Prot Para / I-Prot / I[1]...[n] / AdaptSet...
AdaptSet 4
&
1..n, Assignment List

AdaptSet 3

1..n, Assignment List &

et
tS
AdaptSet 2 ap
Ad
1..n, Assignment List &
Protection Para

AdaptSet 1

1..n, Assignment List

PSet-Switch
&
AdaptSet 4
AdaptSet 3
PSet-Switch.Mode AdaptSet 2
AdaptSet 1
PS1
Standard [0…*In] [1...n] [0…s] [0.05...n] [1...n] [0…s] active/inactive active/inactive
PS2
[0…*In] [1...n] [0…s] [0.05...n] [1...n] [0…s] active/inactive active/inactive
PS3
[0…*In] [1...n] [0…s] [0.05...n] [1...n] [0…s] active/inactive active/inactive
PS4
[0…*In] [1...n] [0…s] [0.05...n] [1...n] [0…s] active/inactive active/inactive
PSS via Inp fct
Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard
PSS via Scada
Function ExBlo Fc Ex rev Interl Fc Blo TripCmd ExBlo TripCmd Fc I> Char t t-char Reset Mode t-reset IH2 Blo nondir Trip at V=0
Adaptive Parameter Sets

Parameter Set 1 active/inactive active/inactive active/inactive active/inactive active/inactive [0…*In] [1...n] [0…s] [0.05...n] [1...n] [0…s] active/inactive active/inactive

Parameter Set 2 active/inactive active/inactive active/inactive active/inactive active/inactive [0…*In] [1...n] [0…s] [0.05...n] [1...n] [0…s] active/inactive active/inactive

Parameter Set 3 active/inactive active/inactive active/inactive active/inactive active/inactive [0…*In] [1...n] [0…s] [0.05...n] [1...n] [0…s] active/inactive active/inactive

Parameter Set 4 active/inactive active/inactive active/inactive active/inactive active/inactive [0…*In] [1...n] [0…s] [0.05...n] [1...n] [0…s] active/inactive active/inactive

Page 217
Parameters

Adaptive Parameter Sets are part of the Device Parameter Tree.

By means of Adaptive Parameter Sets you can temporarily modify single parameters within the parameter
setting groups.

Application Examples

• The output signal of the Switch Onto Fault module can be used to activate an Adaptive Parameter Set
that sensibilizes the overcurrent protection.

• The output signal of the Cold Load Pickup module can be used to activate an Adaptive Parameter Set
that desensitizes the overcurrent protection.

• By means of Adaptive Parameter Sets an Adaptive Auto Reclosure can be realized. After an reclosure
attempt the tripping thresholds or tripping curves of the overcurrent protection can be adapted.

• Depending on undervoltage the overcurrent protection can be modified (Voltage Controlled).

Adaptive Parameter Sets are only available for devices with current
protection modules.

Name Description
-.- No assignment
V[1].Alarm Signal: Alarm voltage stage
V[2].Alarm Signal: Alarm voltage stage
V[3].Alarm Signal: Alarm voltage stage
V[4].Alarm Signal: Alarm voltage stage
VE[1].Alarm Signal: Alarm Residual Voltage Supervision-stage
VE[2].Alarm Signal: Alarm Residual Voltage Supervision-stage
V 012 [1].Alarm Signal: Alarm voltage asymmetry
V 012 [2].Alarm Signal: Alarm voltage asymmetry
V 012 [3].Alarm Signal: Alarm voltage asymmetry
V 012 [4].Alarm Signal: Alarm voltage asymmetry
V 012 [5].Alarm Signal: Alarm voltage asymmetry
V 012 [6].Alarm Signal: Alarm voltage asymmetry
AR.running Signal: Auto Reclosing running
AR.AR Shot No.0 Signal: Auto Reclosure Attempt No.
AR.AR Shot No.1 Signal: Auto Reclosure Attempt No.
AR.AR Shot No.2 Signal: Auto Reclosure Attempt No.
AR.AR Shot No.3 Signal: Auto Reclosure Attempt No.
AR.AR Shot No.4 Signal: Auto Reclosure Attempt No.
AR.AR Shot No.5 Signal: Auto Reclosure Attempt No.
AR.AR Shot No.6 Signal: Auto Reclosure Attempt No.
SOTF.enabled Signal: Switch Onto Fault enabled. This Signal can be
used to modify Overcurrent Protection Settings.
CLPU.enabled Signal: Cold Load enabled

Page 218 EN MRA4 04/09

Parameters

Name Description
DI Slot X1.DI 1 Signal: Digital Input
DI Slot X1.DI 2 Signal: Digital Input
DI Slot X1.DI 3 Signal: Digital Input
DI Slot X1.DI 4 Signal: Digital Input
DI Slot X1.DI 5 Signal: Digital Input
DI Slot X1.DI 6 Signal: Digital Input
DI Slot X1.DI 7 Signal: Digital Input
DI Slot X1.DI 8 Signal: Digital Input
DI Slot X6.DI 1 Signal: Digital Input
DI Slot X6.DI 2 Signal: Digital Input
DI Slot X6.DI 3 Signal: Digital Input
DI Slot X6.DI 4 Signal: Digital Input
DI Slot X6.DI 5 Signal: Digital Input
DI Slot X6.DI 6 Signal: Digital Input
DI Slot X6.DI 7 Signal: Digital Input
DI Slot X6.DI 8 Signal: Digital Input

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 219

Parameters

Operational Modes (access authorization)

Operational Mode – »Display Only«

• The protection is activated.

• All data, measuring values, records and counters/meters can be viewed.

Operation Mode – »Parameter Setting and Planning«

In this mode you are able to:

• edit and set parameters.

• change device planning details and

• parameterize and reset operational data (event recorder/fault recorder/power meter/switching cycles).

If the device was not active within the parameter setting mode for a longer
time (can be set between 20 – 3600 seconds) it changes automatically into
»Display Only« mode. (Please refer to the appendix Module Panel).

As long as you are within the parameter setting mode you cannot
acknowledge.

In order to change into operation mode »Parameter Setting« please proceed as follows:

1. Mark in the device display the parameter you want to change.

2. Press the softkey »Wrench« to change temporarily into the parameter setting mode.

3. Enter the parameter password.

4. Change the parameter.

5. Change perhaps additional parameters.

As long as you are within the parameter setting mode a wrench icon will be
shown in the upper right corner of the display.

6. For saving the altered parameter:

• press the »OK« key,
• confirm by pressing the softkey »Yes«.

7. Then the device changes into mode »Display Only«.

Page 220 EN MRA4 04/09

Parameters

Password

Password Entry at the Panel

Passwords can be entered by way of the softkeys.

1 2 3 4

Example: For password (3244) press successively:

• Softkey 3
• Softkey 2
• Softkey 4
• Softkey 4

Password Changes
Passwords can be changed at the device in menu »Device Para/Password« or by means of the Smart view
software.

A password must be a user-defined combination of the numerics 1, 2, 3 and

4.
All other characters and keys won´t be accepted.

The password of operation mode »Parameter setting and planning« enables you to transfer parameters from the
Smart view software into the device.

When you want to change a password, the existing one has to be entered firstly. The new password (up to 8
digits) is then to be confirmed twice. Please proceed as follows:

• In order to change the password please enter your old password followed by pressing the »OK«-key.
• Afterwards enter the new password and press the »OK«-key.
• Finally confirm your new password and press the »OK-key«.

Password Forgotten
All passwords can be reset to the fail-safe adjustment »1234« by pressing the »C« key during cold booting. For
this procedure confirm the inquiry »Shall All Passwords Be Reset?« with »Yes«.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 221

Parameters

Changing of Parameters - Example

• Move to the parameter you want to change by using the softkeys .

• Press the softkey »Wrench«.

• Enter the password for parameter setting.

• Edit/change the parameter.

Now you can:

• save the change you made and have them adopted by the system or:

• change additional parameters and save finally all the altered parameters and have them adopted by the
system.

To save parameter changes immediately,

• press the »OK« key for saving changed parameters directly and to have them adopted by the device.
Confirm the parameter changes by pressing the »Yes« softkey or dismiss by pressing »No«.

To change additional parameters and save afterwards,

• move to other parameters and change them

A star symbol in front of the changed parameters indicates that the

modifications have only temporarily been saved, they are not yet finally
stored and adopted by the device.
In order to make things easier to follow, especially where complex
parameter changes are involved, on every superior/higher-ranking menu
level the intended change of the parameter is indicated by the star symbol
(star trace). This makes it possible to control or follow from the main menu
level at any time where parameter changes have been made and have not
finally been saved.
In addition to the star trace to the temporarily saved parameter changes, a
general parameter changing symbol is faded-in at the left corner of the
display, and so it is possible from each point of the menu tree to see that
there are parameter changes still not adopted by the device.

Press the »OK« key to initiate the final storage of all parameter changes. Confirm the parameter changes by
pressing the »Yes« softkey or dismiss by pressing Softkey »No«.

Page 222 EN MRA4 04/09

Parameters

Plausibility check: In order to prevent obvious wrong settings the device

monitors constantly all temporarily saved parameter changes. If the device
detects an implausibility, this is indicated by a question mark in front of the
respective parameter.
In order to make things easier to follow, especially where complex
parameter changes are involved, on every superior/higher-ranking menu
level, above the temporarily saved parameters an invalidity is indicated by
the question mark (plausibility trace). This makes it possible to control or
follow from the main menu level at any time where implausibilities are
intended to be saved.

In addition to the question mark trace to the temporarily saved implausible

parameter changes a general implausibility symbol/question mark is faded-
in at the left corner of the display, and so it is possible to see from each
point of the menu tree that implausibility have been detected by the device.

A star/parameter change indication is always overwritten by the question

mark/implausibility symbol.

If a device detects an implausibility, it rejects saving and adopting of the

parameters.

Example: If the residual voltage has been parameterized as

»calculated« (»EVTcon = calculated«), then the device recognizes an
implausibility in case voltage measuring is parameterized as »phase to
phase« (»VTcon = Phase to Phase«). The calculation of the residual voltage
is physically not possible by means of phase-to-phase voltages.

Changing of Parameters when using the Smart View - Example

Example: Changing of a protective parameter (to alter the characteristic for the overcurrent protection function
I[1] in parameter set 1).

• In case Smart view is not in operation – start this software.

• In case the device data has not been loaded – select »Data To Be Received From The Device« in menu
»Device«.

• Double-click the »Protection Para Icon« in the navigation tree.

• Double-click the »Protection Para Set Icon« in the navigation tree.

• Double-click the »Set 1 Icon« in the navigation tree.

• Double-click the »protection stage I[1]« in the navigation tree.

• In the working window a tabulated overview appears, showing the parameters assigned to this protective
function.

• In this table double-click the value/parameter you want to change (here: »Char«).

• Another window (popup) is opened where you can select the required characteristic.

• Close this window by clicking the »OK« key.

A star symbol in front of the changed parameters indicates that the alterations

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 223

Parameters

have only temporarily been saved. They are not yet finally stored and adopted by
the software/device.
In order to make things easier to follow, especially where complex parameter
changes are involved, on every superior/higher menu level, the intended change
of the parameter is indicated by the star symbol (star trace). This makes it
possible to control or follow from the main menu level at any time where
parameter changes have been made and have not finally been saved.

Plausibility check: In order to prevent obvious wrong settings the software

monitors constantly all temporarily saved parameter changes. If it detects an
implausibility, this is indicated by a question mark in front of the respective
parameter.
In order to make things easier to follow, especially where complex parameter
changes are involved, on every superior/higher menu level above of the
temporarily saved parameters, an implausibility is indicated by a question mark
(plausibility trace). This makes it possible to control or follow from the main menu
level at any time where implausibilities exist.

So it is possible to see from each point of the menu tree that implausibilities have
been detected by the software.

A star/parameter change indication is always overwritten by the question

mark/implausibility symbol.

If the software detects an implausibility it rejects saving and adopting of the

parameters.

Example: If the residual voltage has been parameterized as calculated (»EVTcon

= calculated«), then the software recognizes an implausibility in case voltage
measuring is parameterized as »phase to phase« (»VTcon = Phase to Phase«).
The calculation of the residual voltage is physically not possible by means of
phase-to-phase voltages.

• Additional parameters can be changed if required.

• In order to transfer changed parameters into the device, please select »Transfer all parameters into the
device« in menu »Device«.

• Confirm the safety inquiry »Shall The Parameters Be Overwritten?«.

• Enter the password for setting parameters in the popup window.

• Confirm the inquiry »Shall The Data Be Saved Locally?« with »Yes« (recommended). Select a suitable
storing location on your hard disk.

• Confirm the chosen storing location by clicking »Save«.

• The changed parameter data is now saved in the data file chosen by you. Thereafter the changed data is
transferred to the device and adopted. .

Once you have entered the parameter setting password, Smart view wont
ask you again for the password for at least 10 minutes. This time interval
will start again, each time parameters are transmitted into the device. If for
more than 10 minutes no parameters are transmitted into the device, Smart
view will ask you again for the password, when you are trying to transmit
parameters into the device.

Page 224 EN MRA4 04/09

Parameters

Protection Parameters

It has to be taken into account that by deactivating, for instance, protective

functions, you also change the functionality of the device.

The manufacturer does not accept liability for any personal or material
damage as a result of wrong planning.

A planning/parameter setting service is also offered by Woodward SEG.

The protection parameters include the following protection parameter trees:

• Global Protection Parameters: »Global Prot Para«: Here you can find all protection parameters that are
universally valid, that means that they are valid independent of the protection parameter sets.

• Setting Group Parameters: »Set1..4«: The protection parameters that you set within a parameter set are
only valid, if the parameter set where you set them is switched to active.

Setting Groups
Setting Group Switch
Within the menu »Protection Para/P-Set Switch« you have the following possibilities:

• To set one of the four setting groups active manually.

• To assign a signal to each setting group that sets this group to active.
• Scada switches the setting groups.

Setting Group Switch

Manual Selection Via Input Function Via Scada

(e.g. Digital Input)
Switching Options Switch over, if another Switch over not until the Switch over if there is a
setting group is chosen request is clear. clear Scada request.
manually within the menu
That means, if there is Otherwise no switch over
»Protection Para/P-Set
more or less than one will be executed.
Switch«
request signal active, no
switch over will be
executed.

The description of the parameters can be found within chapter System

Parameters.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 225

Parameters

Setting Group Switch via Smart View

• In case Smart view is not running – please start it.

• If device data has not been loaded yet – click »Receive Data From The Device« in menu »Device«.

• Double click the »Protection Para« icon in the navigation tree.

• Double click the »P-Set Switch« within the protection parameters.

• Configure the Setting Group Switch respectively choose an active set manually.

The description of the parameters can be found within chapter System

Parameters.

Page 226 EN MRA4 04/09

Parameters

Copying Setting Groups (Parameter Sets) via Smart View

Setting groups can only be copied if there are no implausibilities (no red
question mark).

It is not necessary to set up two setting groups that only differ in few parameters.

With the help of „Smart view“ you can simply copy an existing setting group to another (not yet configured) one.
You only need to change those parameters where the two setting groups are different.

To efficiently establish a second parameter set where only few parameters are different, proceed as follows:

• In case Smart view is not running – please start it.

• Open an (offline) parameter file of a device or load data of a connected device.

• By way of precaution, save (the relevant) device parameters [File\Save as].

• Select »Copy Parameter Sets« out of the menu “Edit”.

• Then define both, source and destination of the parameter sets to be copied (source = copy from;
destination: copy to ).

• Mouse click on »OK« to start copy procedure.

• The copied parameter set is now cached (not yet saved!).

• Then, modify the copied parameter set(s), if applicable.

• Assign a new file name to the revised device parameter file and save it on your hard disk (backup copy).

• To transfer the modified parameters back to the device, click on menu item »Device« and select
»Transfer All Parameters into the Device«.

Comparing Setting Groups via Smart View

• In case Smart view is not running – please start it.

• Click on menu item »Edit« and select »Compare Parameter Sets«.

• Select the two parameter sets from the (two) drop down menus you would like to have compared with
each other.

• Press the pushbutton »compare«.

• The values that are different from the set parameters will be listed in tabular form.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 227

Parameters

Comparing Parameter Files via Smart view

With the help of „Smart view“ you can simply compare/diff the currently open parameter/device file against a file
on your hard disk. The precondition is that the versions and type of devices match. Please proceed as follows:

• Click on »Compare with a Parameter File« within the menu »Device«.

• Click on the Folder icon in order to select a file on your hard disk.

• The differences will be shown in tabular form.

Converting Parameter Files via Smart view

Parameter files of the same type can be up- or downgraded (converted). As many parameters as possible will be
taken over.

• Parameters, that are newly added, will be set to default.

• Parameters, that are not included in the target file version, will be deleted.

In order to convert a parameter file please proceed as follows:

• In case Smart view is not in operation – start this software.

• Open a parameter file or load the parameters from a device that should be converted.

• Make a backup of this file at a fail safe place.

• Choose »Save as« from menu »File«

• Enter a new file name (in order to prevent overwriting the original file)

• Choose the new file type from drop down menu »File Type«.

• Confirm the security check by clicking on »yes« if and only you are sure that the file conversion should be
executed.

• In tabular form the modifications will be shown as follows.

Added parameter:

Deleted parameter:

Page 228 EN MRA4 04/09

Field Parameters

Field Parameters
Field Para

Within the field parameters you can set all parameters, that are relevant for the primary side and the mains
operational method like frequency, primary and secondary values and the star point treatment.

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

Phase Sequence Phase Sequence direction ABC, ABC [Field Para]
ACB

f Nominal frequency 50Hz, 50Hz [Field Para]

60Hz

VT pri Nominal voltage of the 60 - 500000V 10000V [Field Para]

Voltage Transformers at the
primary side

VT sec Nominal voltage of the 60.00 - 400.00V 100V [Field Para]

Voltage Transformers at the
secondary side.

VT con This parameter has to be set Phase to Earth, Phase to Earth [Field Para]
in order to ensure the correct
assignment of the voltage Phase to
Phase
measurement channels in the
device.

EVT pri Primary nominal voltage of the 60 - 500000V 10000V [Field Para]
e-n winding of the voltage
transformers, which is only
taken into account in the
direct measurement of the
residual voltage (EVT
con=measured/open delta).

EVT sec Secondary nominal voltage of 35.00 - 400.00V 100V [Field Para]
the e-n winding of the voltage
transformers, which is only
taken into account in the
direct measurement of the
residual voltage (EVT
con=measured/open delta).

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 229

Field Parameters

EVT con Method how the residual measured, measured [Field Para]
voltage is to be detected.
calculated
Calculation is only possible, if
the device is connected to
phase-to-earth voltages.
Calculated: that means that
the residual voltage is
calculated from the
geometrical sum of the phase-
to-neutral voltages.
WARNING! For V-
connections no calculation of
the residual voltage is
possible. Measured: The e-n-
windings are connected to the
measuring inputs for the
residual voltage (open delta).
The primary and secondary
rated data (EVT pri and EVT
sec) of the voltage
transformers have to be taken
into account.

Calculation of the residual

voltage is only possible if: VT
con = Phase to Earth
V Block f Threshold for the release of 0.15 - 1.00Vn 0.5Vn [Field Para]
the frequency stages

I MTA Maximum Torque Angle: 0 - 355° 45° [Field Para]

Angle between phase current
and reference voltage in case
of a short circuit. This angle is
needed to determine the fault
direction in case of short
circuits.

Star point treatm Star point treatment sin (-90°), SOLI-RESI [Field Para]
cos (180°),
SOLI-RESI
IG MTA Maximum Torque Angle: 0 - 355° 110° [Field Para]
Angle between earth current
and residual voltage in case of
a short circuit. This angle is
needed to determine the fault
direction in case of short
circuits.

Only available if: Star point

treatment = Solidly or low
resistance earthed

Page 230 EN MRA4 04/09

Field Parameters

EVT Angle Cor Fine adjustment of the -45 - 45° 0° [Field Para]
measuring angle of the earth
current transformers. By
means of the Angle
Correction, faults of the earth
voltage transformers can be
taken into account.

V Cutoff Level The Phase Voltage shown in 0.0 - 0.100Vn 0.005Vn [Device Para
the Display or within the PC
/Measurem Display]
Software will be displayed as
zero, if the Phase Voltage falls
below this Cutoff Level. This
parameter has no impact on
recorders. This parameter is
related to the voltage that is
connected to the device
(phase-to-phase or phase-to-
earth).

VE meas Cutoff The measured Residual 0.0 - 0.100Vn 0.005Vn [Device Para
Level Voltage shown in the Display
/Measurem Display]
or within the PC Software will
be displayed as zero, if the
measured Residual Voltage
falls below this Cutoff Level.
This parameter has no impact
on recorders.

VE calc Cutoff Level The calculated Residual 0.0 - 0.100Vn 0.005Vn [Device Para
Voltage shown in the Display
or within the PC Software will /Measurem Display]
be displayed as zero, if the
calculated Residual Voltage
falls below this Cutoff Level.
This parameter has no impact
on recorders.

V012 Comp Cutoff The Symmetrical Component 0.0 - 0.100Vn 0.005Vn [Device Para
Level shown in the Display or within
/Measurem Display]
the PC Software will be
displayed as zero, if the
Symmetrical Component falls
below this Cutoff Level. This
parameter has no impact on
recorders.

CT pri Nominal current of the primary 1 - 50000A 1000A [Field Para]

side of the current
transformers.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 231

Field Parameters

CT sec Nominal current of the 1A, 1A [Field Para]

secondary side of the current
5A
transformers.

CT dir Protection functions with 0°, 0° [Field Para]

directional feature can only
180°
work properly if the
connection of the current
transformers is free of wiring
errors. If all current
transformers are connected to
the device with a wrong
polarity, the wiring error can
be compensated by this
parameter. This parameter
turns the current vectors by
180 degrees.

ECT pri This parameter defines the 1 - 50000A 1000A [Field Para]
primary nominal current of the
connected earth current
transformer. If the earth
current is measured via the
Holmgreen connection, the
primary value of the phase
current transformer must be
entered here.

ECT sec This parameter defines the 1A, 1A [Field Para]

secondary nominal current of
5A
the connected earth current
transformer. If the earth
current is done via the
Holmgreen connection, the
primary value of the phase
current transformer must be
entered here.

ECT dir Earth fault protection with 0°, 0° [Field Para]

directional feature depends
180°
also on the correct wiring of
the earth current transformer.
A wrong polarity/wiring can be
corrected by means of the
settings "0°" or "180°". The
operator has the possibility of
turning the current vector by
180 degrees (change of sign)
without modification of the
wiring. This means, that – in
terms of figures - the
determined current indicator
was turned by 180° by the
device.

Page 232 EN MRA4 04/09

Field Parameters

ECT con Earth current measured or measured, measured [Field Para]

calculated.
calculated

IL1, IL2, IL3 Cutoff The Current shown in the 0.0 - 0.100In 0.005In [Device Para
Level Display or within the PC
/Measurem Display]
Software will be displayed as
zero, if the Current falls below
this Cutoff Level. This
parameter has no impact on
recorders.

IG meas Cutoff The measured Earth Current 0.0 - 0.100In 0.005In [Device Para
Level shown in the Display or within
/Measurem Display]
the PC Software will be
displayed as zero, if the
measured Earth Current falls
below this Cutoff Level. This
parameter has no impact on
recorders.

IG calc Cutoff Level The calculated Earth Current 0.0 - 0.100In 0.005In [Device Para
shown in the Display or within
the PC Software will be /Measurem Display]
displayed as zero, if the
calculated Earth Current falls
below this Cutoff Level. This
parameter has no impact on
recorders.

I012 Cutoff Level The Symmetrical Component 0.0 - 0.100In 0.005In [Device Para
shown in the Display or within
/Measurem Display]
the PC Software will be
displayed as zero, if the
Symmetrical Component falls
below this Cutoff Level. This
parameter has no impact on
recorders.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 233

Blockings

Blockings
The device provides a function for temporary and permanent blocking of the complete protection functionality or
of single protection stages.

Make absolutely sure that no illogical or even life-threatening blockings are

allocated.

Make sure that you do not carelessly deactivate protection functions which
have to be available according to the protection concept.

Permanent Blocking
Switching ON or OFF the complete protection functionality
In module »Protection« the complete protection of the device can be switched on or off. Set the parameter
Function to »active« or »inactive« in module »Prot«.

Only if in module »Prot« the parameter »Function« is = »active«, the

protection is activated; i.e. with »Function« = »inactive«, no protection
function is operating. Then the device cannot protect any components.

Switching modules ON or OFF

Each of the modules can be switched on or off (permanently). This is achieved when the parameter »Function«
is set to »active« or »inactive« in the respective module.

Activating or deactivating the tripping command of a protection stage permanently

In each of the protection stages the tripping command to the CB can be permanently blocked. For this purpose
the parameter »TripCmd Blo« has to be set to »active«.

Temporary Blocking
To block the complete protection of the device temporarily by a signal
In module »Prot« the complete protection of the device can be blocked temporarily by a signal. On condition that
a module-external blocking is permitted »ExBlo Fc=active«. In addition to this, a related blocking signal from the
»assignment list« must have been assigned. For the time the allocated blocking signal is active, the module is
blocked.

If the module »Prot« is blocked, the complete protection function does not
work. As long as the blocking signal is active, the device cannot protect
any components.

To block a complete protection module temporarily by an active assignment

• In order to establish a temporary blockage of a protection module, the parameter »ExBlo Fc« of the
module has to be set to »active«. This gives the permission: »This module can be blocked«.

• Within the general protection parameters a signal has to be additionally chosen from the »ASSIGNMENT
LIST«. The blocking only becomes active when the assigned signal is active.

Page 234 EN MRA4 04/09

Blockings

To block the tripping command of a protection stage temporarily by an active assignment.

The tripping command of any of the protection modules can be blocked from external. In this case, external does
not only mean from outside the device, but also from outside the module. Not only real external signals are
permitted to be used as blocking signals, as for example, the state of a digital input, but you can also choose any
other signal from the »assignment list«.

• In order to establish a temporary blockage of a protection stage, the parameter »ExBlo TripCmd Fc« of
the module has to be set to »active«. This gives the permission: »The tripping command of this stage
can be blocked«.

• Within the general protection parameters, a signal has to be chosen additionally and assigned to the
parameter »ExBlo« from the »assignment list«. If the selected signal is activated, the temporary blockage
becomes effective.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 235

Page 236
Blockings

Inrush
signal is true.

I[x]=active/inactive

blocking signal is active.

Blocking, if the assigned signal is active

Global Protection activating/deactivating

Global Protection blocked, if the assigned
I[x]: permanent blocking of the trip command
Blocking the CB trip command if the assigned

Projected direction and Act at no voltage=0 is set

Reverse interlocking if the assigned signal is true.

I[x].ExBlo TripCmd
I[x].ExBlo Fc Device planning.I[x].direction
Prot.ExBlo Fc Fc
Prot.Function I[x].Function I[x].Ex rev Interl Fc I[x].IH2 Blo decision I[x]..Blo TripCmd

non Trip Command given out to the

active inactive active inactive inactive inactive inactive inactive
directional Circuit Breaker
I[x].Tripping criterion fulfilled: Trip

inactive active inactive active active active directional active active

no no no no yes no
I[x].Ex rev I[x].ExBlo
Prot.ExBlo
Interl TripCmd
Fault in
I[x].ExBlo1 Inrush
1..n, projected
1..n, detected 1..n,
Assignment direction
Assignment Assignment
List=active oder
List=active List=active
I[x].ExBlo1
yes 1..n, yes yes yes
Assignment no
List=active

V=0 yes
And

Tripping criterion fulfilled for I. How could the trip command be blocked?
nondir Trip at
V=0=active
yes

no
yes
Fault in
projected
direction

no
permanent temporarily permanent temporarily temporarily temporarily temporarily permanent temporarily
blocking blocking blocking blocking blocking blocking blocking blocking blocking

No Trip Command given out to the

Circuit Breaker

EN MRA4 04/09
 Blockings

EN MRA4 04/09
signal is true.

V[x]=active/inactive

blocking signal is active.

Blocking, if the assigned signal is active

Global Protection activating/deactivating

Global Protection blocked, if the assigned
V[x]: permanent blocking of the trip command
Blocking the CB trip command if the assigned

V[x].ExBlo TripCmd
Prot.ExBlo Fc V[x].ExBlo Fc V[x].Blo TripCmd Fc
Prot.Function V[x].Function

active inactive active inactive inactive inactive Trip Command given out to the
Circuit Breaker
V[x].Tripping criterion fulfilled:
Trip

inactive active inactive active active active

no no no
V[x].ExBlo
Prot.ExBlo
TripCmd
V[x].ExBlo1
1..n,
1..n,

Tripping criterion fulfilled for V. How could the trip command be blocked?
Assignment oder Assignment
List=active
List=active
V[x].ExBlo2

yes 1..n, yes

Assignment
List=active

yes
permanent temporarily permanent temporarily permanent temporarily
blocking blocking blocking blocking blocking blocking

No Trip Command given out to the

Circuit Breaker

Page 237
Page 238
Blockings

T rip b lo c k in g s

n a m e = a ll m o d u le s th a t a re b lo c k a b le

P r o t.B lo T r ip C m d
in a c tiv e
a c tiv e >1 P ro t.B lo T rip C m d

n a m e .B lo T rip C m d
in a c tiv e
a c tiv e

P ro t . E x B lo T rip C m d F c
in a c tiv e
a c tiv e P ro t.E x B lo T rip C m d
32

P ro t.E x B lo T rip C m d P ro t.E x B lo T rip C m d -I

1 ..n , A s s ig n m e n t L is t

& >1 n a m e .B lo T rip C m d

n a m e . E x B lo T r ip C m d F c
3
in a c tiv e
a c tiv e &
n a m e .E x B lo T rip C m d

n a m e .E x B lo T r ip C m d
n a m e .E x B lo T rip C m d -I
1 ..n , A s s ig n m e n t L is t
To Activate or Deactivate the Tripping Command of a Protection Module

EN MRA4 04/09
 Blockings

EN MRA4 04/09
Blockings

name =all modules that are blockable

Please Refer To Diagram: Prot

Prot. active
1 (The General Protection module is not deactivated or blocked)

name.Function

inactive
name.active
active & 2

name.ExBlo Fc

inactive

active
& name.ExBlo

name.ExBlo 1
name.ExBlo1-I
1..n, Assignment List

>1

name.ExBlo 2
name.ExBlo2-I
1..n, Assignment List
Activate, Deactivate Respectively Block Temporarily Protection Functions

Page 239
Page 240
Blockings

Blockings **
name = I[1]...[n], IG[1]...[n]

Please Refer To Diagram: Prot

Prot. active
1 (The General Protection module is not deactivated or blocked)

name.Function

inactive

active
& name.active
4

name.ExBlo Fc

inactive

active
& name.ExBlo

name.ExBlo 1
name.ExBlo1-I
1..n, Assignment List

>1

name.ExBlo 2
name.ExBlo2-I
1..n, Assignment List
blocking signal from the »assignment list«, but also by »reverse Interlocking«.

name.Ex rev Interl Fc

inactive

active
name.Ex rev Interl
&

name.Ex rev Interl

name.Ex rev Interl-I
All other protection functions can be activated, deactivated or blocked in the same manner.

1..n, Assignment List

Current protective functions cannot only be blocked permanently (»function = inactive«) or temporarily by any

EN MRA4 04/09
Module: Protection (Prot)

Module: Protection (Prot)

Prot

The module »Protection« serves as outer frame for all other protection modules, i.e. they are all enclosed by the
module »Protection«. All alarms and tripping commands are combined in module »Protection« by an OR-logic.

If in module »Protection« the parameter »Function« is set on »inactive« or

in case the module is blocked, then the complete protective function of the
device does not work anymore.

Protection inactive
If the master module »Protection« was permanently deactivated or if a temporary blockage of this module has
occurred and the allocated blocking signal is still active, then the complete functionality (protection) of the device
is zero. In such a case the protective function is »inactive«.

Protection active
If the master module »Protection« was activated and a blockade for this module was not activated respectively
the assigned blocking signal is inactive at that moment, then the »Protection« is »active«.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 241

Page 242
Prot - active
Module: Protection (Prot)

At the moment no parameter is being changed (except parameter set

parameters)
&
Prot.available
Measured values: OK

Prot.Function

inactive

active

&
Prot.active
1

Prot.ExBlo Fc

inactive

active &
Prot.ExBlo

Prot.ExBlo 1
Prot.ExBlo1-I
1..n, Assignment List

>1

Prot.ExBlo 2
Prot.ExBlo2-I
1..n, Assignment List

EN MRA4 04/09
Module: Protection (Prot)

Each protection stage can decide automatically about a trip. The trip decision is passed on to module »Prot« and
The tripping commands of all protection stages are combined in module »Prot« by an OR logic (Collective
signals, direction decisions, information about phases). The tripping commands are executed by the module
»TripControl«.

The tripping commands are executed by the module »TripControl«

If a protection module is activated respectively issues a trip command to the CB two alarm signals will be
created:

1. The module or the protection stage issues an alarm e.g. »I[1].ALARM« or »I[1].TRIP«.

2. The master module »Prot« collects/summarizes the signals and issues an alarm or a trip signal
»PROT.ALARM« »PROT.TRIP«.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 243

Page 244
Module: Protection (Prot)

Prot.Trip

name = Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module will lead to a general trip.

>1
name.Trip
15
name.Trip
15 Prot.Trip
...
name[n].Trip
15

EN MRA4 04/09
EN MRA4 04/09
Prot.Alarm
Module: Protection (Prot)

name = Each alarm of a module (except from supervision modules but including CBF) will lead to a general alarm (collective alarm).

>1
name.Alarm
14
name.Alarm
14 Prot.Alarm
...
name.Alarm
14

Page 245
Page 246
Prot.Trip

Each phase selective trip of a trip authorized module (I, IG, V, VE depending on the device type) will lead to a phase
selective general trip.

I[1].Trip L1 >1
16
Module: Protection (Prot)

...
I[n].Trip L1
16
Prot.Trip L1
V[1].Trip L1
20
...
V[n].Trip L1
20

I[1].Trip L2 >1
17
...
I[n].Trip L2
17
Prot.Trip L2
V[1].Trip L2
21
...
V[n].Trip L2
21

I[1].Trip L3 >1
18
...
I[n].Trip L3
18
Prot.Trip L3
V[1].Trip L3
22
...
V[n].Trip L3
22

IG[1].Trip
19 >1
IG[n].Trip
... Prot.Trip G
19
VE[n].TripCmd
23

EN MRA4 04/09
 Prot.Alarm

Each phase selective alarm of a module (I, IG, V, VE depending on the

EN MRA4 04/09
device type) will lead to a phase selective general alarm (collective
alarm).
I[1].Alarm L1 >1
24
...
Module: Protection (Prot)

I[n].Alarm L1
24
Prot.Alarm L1

V[1].Alarm L1
28
...
V[n].Alarm L1
28

I[1].Alarm L2 >1
25
...
I[n].Alarm L2
25
Prot.Alarm L2

V[1].Alarm L2
29
...
V[n].Alarm L2
29

I[1].Alarm L3 >1
26
...
I[n].Alarm L3
26
Prot.Alarm L3

V[1].Alarm L3
30
...
V[n].Alarm L3
30

IG[1].Alarm
27 >1
IG[n].Alarm
... Prot.Alarm G
27
VE[n].Alarm
31

Page 247
Module: Protection (Prot)

Direct Commands of the Protection Module

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
Res Fault a Mains Resetting of fault inactive, inactive [Operation
No number and mains
active /Reset]
fault number.

Global Protection Parameters of the Protection Module

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
Function Permanent activation inactive, active [Protection Para
or deactivation of
active /Global Prot Para
module/stage.
/Prot]

ExBlo Fc Activate (allow) the inactive, inactive [Protection Para

external blocking of
active /Global Prot Para
the global protection
functionality of the /Prot]
device.

ExBlo1 If external blocking 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para

of this module is
activated (allowed), /Global Prot Para
the global protection /Prot]
functionality of the
device will be
blocked if the state
of the assigned
signal becomes true.

ExBlo2 If external blocking 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para

of this module is
/Global Prot Para
activated (allowed),
the global protection /Prot]
functionality of the
device will be
blocked if the state
of the assigned
signal becomes true.

Blo TripCmd Permanent blocking inactive, inactive [Protection Para

of the Trip
active /Global Prot Para
Command of the
entire Protection. /Prot]

Page 248 EN MRA4 04/09

Module: Protection (Prot)

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

ExBlo TripCmd Fc Activate (allow) the inactive, inactive [Protection Para
external blocking of
active /Global Prot Para
the trip command of
the entire device. /Prot]

ExBlo TripCmd If external blocking 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para

of the tripping
/Global Prot Para
command is
activated (allowed), /Prot]
the tripping
command of the
entire device will be
blocked if the state
of the assigned
signal becomes true.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 249

Module: Protection (Prot)

Protection Module Input States

Name Description Assignment via
ExBlo1-I Module input state: External [Protection Para
blocking1
/Global Prot Para
/Prot]
ExBlo2-I Module input state: External [Protection Para
blocking2
/Global Prot Para
/Prot]
ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External [Protection Para
Blocking of the Trip Command
/Global Prot Para
/Prot]

Protection Module Signals (Output States)

Name Description
available Signal: Protection is available
active Signal: active
ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
Alarm L1 Signal: General-Alarm L1
Alarm L2 Signal: General-Alarm L2
Alarm L3 Signal: General-Alarm L3
Alarm G Signal: General-Alarm - Earth fault
Alarm Signal: General Alarm
Trip L1 Signal: General Trip L1
Trip L2 Signal: General Trip L2
Trip L3 Signal: General Trip L3
Trip G Signal: General Trip Ground fault
Trip Signal: General Trip
Res Fault a Mains No Signal: Resetting of fault number and mains fault
number.
I dir fwd Signal: Phase current failure forward direction
I dir rev Signal: Phase current failure reverse direction
I dir n poss Signal: Phase fault - missing reference voltage
IG dir fwd Signal: Earth fault forward
IG rev dir Signal: Earth fault reverse direction
IG dir n poss Signal: Earth fault direction detection not possible

Page 250 EN MRA4 04/09

Module: Protection (Prot)

Protection Module Values

Value Description Menu path
FaultNo Disturbance No [Operation
/Count and RevData
/Prot]
MainsFaultNo Mains disturbance No [Operation
/Count and RevData
/Prot]

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 251

Module: Trip Control (TripControl)

Module: Trip Control (TripControl)

CB

The tripping commands of all protection modules are combined in module »TripLogic« by an OR logic. The
command for tripping can come from each of the protection modules, but the actual tripping command to the CB
is only given by the module »TripLogic«.
In addition to that you can set within this module the minimum hold time of the tripping command and define
whether the tripping command is latched or not.

Page 252 EN MRA4 04/09

EN MRA4 04/09
CB.Trip CB
name =Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module will lead to a general trip.

name.TripCmd
Module: Trip Control (TripControl)

15 >1
name.TripCmd
15
name.TripCmd
15 . CB.t-TripCmd
. >1 1
. t >1
. CB.Trip CB
name.TripCmd
11
15
name.TripCmd
15

&
CB.Latched
S1 1
active
R 1
inactive

Acknowledge -HMI
>1
Acknowledge-1..n, Assignment List

Acknowledge-Scada
+ TripCmd Cr

CB.Res TripCmd Cr
R

Page 253
Module: Trip Control (TripControl)

Direct Commands of the Trip Control Module

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
Ack TripCmd Acknow TripCmd inactive, inactive [Operation
active /Acknowledge]

Res TripCmd Cr Resetting of the inactive, inactive [Operation

Counter: total
active /Reset]
number of trip
commands

Res Sum trip Reset summation of inactive, inactive [Operation

the tripping currents
active /Reset]

Global Protection Parameters of the Trip Control Module

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
t-TripCmd Minimum hold time 0.1 - 10.0s 0.2s [Protection Para
of the OFF-
command (circuit /Global Prot Para
breaker, load break /CB
switch)
/CB TripLogic]

Latched Defines whether the inactive, inactive [Protection Para

Binary Output Relay
will be active /Global Prot Para
acknowledged /CB
automatically if the
event is gone or /CB TripLogic]
whether the Binary
Output Relay is to be
acknowledged by a
signal/manually.

Ack TripCmd Acknow TripCmd 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para

/Global Prot Para
/CB
/CB TripLogic]
tmax-OFF Within this time the 0.00 - 10.00s 0.10s [Protection Para
OFF command has
/Global Prot Para
to be carried out by
the CB. Within this /CB
time the position
indicators (check /CB Manager]
back signals) have to
change from ON to
OFF.

Page 254 EN MRA4 04/09

Module: Trip Control (TripControl)

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

tmax-ON Within this time the 0.00 - 10.00s 0.10s [Protection Para
ON command has to
be carried out by the /Global Prot Para
CB. Within this time /CB
the position
indicators (check /CB Manager]
back signals) have to
change from OFF to
ON.

Aux ON The CB is in ON- -.-, - [Protection Para

position if the state
DI Slot X1.DI 1, /Global Prot Para
of the assigned
signal is true (52a). DI Slot X1.DI 2, /CB
DI Slot X1.DI 3, /CB Manager]
DI Slot X1.DI 4,
DI Slot X1.DI 5,
DI Slot X1.DI 6,
DI Slot X1.DI 7,
DI Slot X1.DI 8,
DI Slot X6.DI 1,
DI Slot X6.DI 2,
DI Slot X6.DI 3,
DI Slot X6.DI 4,
DI Slot X6.DI 5,
DI Slot X6.DI 6,
DI Slot X6.DI 7,
DI Slot X6.DI 8

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 255

Module: Trip Control (TripControl)

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

Aux OFF The CB is in OFF- -.-, - [Protection Para
position if the state
DI Slot X1.DI 1, /Global Prot Para
of the assigned
signal is true (52b). DI Slot X1.DI 2, /CB
DI Slot X1.DI 3, /CB Manager]
DI Slot X1.DI 4,
DI Slot X1.DI 5,
DI Slot X1.DI 6,
DI Slot X1.DI 7,
DI Slot X1.DI 8,
DI Slot X6.DI 1,
DI Slot X6.DI 2,
DI Slot X6.DI 3,
DI Slot X6.DI 4,
DI Slot X6.DI 5,
DI Slot X6.DI 6,
DI Slot X6.DI 7,
DI Slot X6.DI 8
Manual ON The circuit breaker -.-, - [Protection Para
was switched on
manually if the state DI Slot X1.DI 1, /Global Prot Para
of the assigned DI Slot X1.DI 2, /CB
signal is true.
DI Slot X1.DI 3, /CB Manager]
DI Slot X1.DI 4,
DI Slot X1.DI 5,
DI Slot X1.DI 6,
DI Slot X1.DI 7,
DI Slot X1.DI 8,
DI Slot X6.DI 1,
DI Slot X6.DI 2,
DI Slot X6.DI 3,
DI Slot X6.DI 4,
DI Slot X6.DI 5,
DI Slot X6.DI 6,
DI Slot X6.DI 7,
DI Slot X6.DI 8

Page 256 EN MRA4 04/09

Module: Trip Control (TripControl)

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

Manual OFF The circuit breaker -.-, - [Protection Para
was switched off
DI Slot X1.DI 1, /Global Prot Para
manually if the state
of the assigned DI Slot X1.DI 2, /CB
signal is true.
DI Slot X1.DI 3, /CB Manager]
DI Slot X1.DI 4,
DI Slot X1.DI 5,
DI Slot X1.DI 6,
DI Slot X1.DI 7,
DI Slot X1.DI 8,
DI Slot X6.DI 1,
DI Slot X6.DI 2,
DI Slot X6.DI 3,
DI Slot X6.DI 4,
DI Slot X6.DI 5,
DI Slot X6.DI 6,
DI Slot X6.DI 7,
DI Slot X6.DI 8
Ready Circuit breaker is -.-, - [Protection Para
ready for operation if
the state of the DI Slot X1.DI 1, /Global Prot Para
assigned signal is DI Slot X1.DI 2, /CB
true.
DI Slot X1.DI 3, /CB Manager]
DI Slot X1.DI 4,
DI Slot X1.DI 5,
DI Slot X1.DI 6,
DI Slot X1.DI 7,
DI Slot X1.DI 8,
DI Slot X6.DI 1,
DI Slot X6.DI 2,
DI Slot X6.DI 3,
DI Slot X6.DI 4,
DI Slot X6.DI 5,
DI Slot X6.DI 6,
DI Slot X6.DI 7,
DI Slot X6.DI 8

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 257

Module: Trip Control (TripControl)

Trip Control Module Input States

Name Description Assignment via
Acknow Sig-I Module input state: [Protection Para
Acknowledgment Signal (only for
/Global Prot Para
automatic acknowledgment) Module
input signal /CB
/CB TripLogic]
Aux ON-I Position indicator/check-back signal [Protection Para
of the CB (52a)
/Global Prot Para
/CB
/CB Manager]
Aux OFF-I Module input state: Position [Protection Para
indicator/check-back signal of the
/Global Prot Para
CB (52b)
/CB
/CB Manager]
Manual ON-I Module input state: Circuit breaker [Protection Para
was switched on manually
/Global Prot Para
/CB
/CB Manager]
Manual OFF-I Module input state: Circuit breaker [Protection Para
was switched off manually
/Global Prot Para
/CB
/CB Manager]
Ready-I Module input state: CB ready [Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/CB
/CB Manager]

Page 258 EN MRA4 04/09

Module: Trip Control (TripControl)

Trip Control Module Signals (Outputs States)

Name Description
TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
Res TripCmd Cr Signal: Resetting of the Counter: total number of trip
commands
Ack TripCmd Signal: Acknow TripCmd
Res Sum trip Signal: Reset summation of the tripping currents
Pos Signal: Circuit Breaker Position (0 = Indeterminate, 1 =
OFF, 2 = ON, 3 = Disturbed)
Ready Signal: Circuit breaker is ready for operation.
Manual OFF Signal: Circuit breaker was switched off manually.
Manual ON Signal: Circuit breaker was switched on manually
Pos OFF Signal: Circuit Breaker is in OFF-Position
Pos ON Signal: Circuit Breaker is in ON-Position
Pos Indeterm Signal: Circuit Breaker is in Indeterminate Position
Pos Disturb Signal: Circuit Breaker Disturbed - Undefined Circuit
Breaker Position. The Position Indicators contradict
themselfes. After expiring of a supervision timer the
Position Indicators indicate that the circuit breaker is in
the ON and OFF-Position at the same time.

Trip Control Module – Sum of Tripping Currents

Value Description Menu path
Sum trip I L1 Summation of the tripping currents [Operation
phase1
/Count and RevData
/CB]
Sum trip I L2 Summation of the tripping currents [Operation
phase2
/Count and RevData
/CB]
Sum trip I L3 Summation of the tripping currents [Operation
phase3
/Count and RevData
/CB]

Trip Control Module Values

Value Description Default Size Menu path
TripCmd Cr Counter: Total 0 0 - 65535 [Operation
number of trips of
/Count and RevData
the switchgear
(circuit breaker, load /CB]
break switch…).

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 259

I-Protection Module – Overcurrent Protection [ANSI 50, 51, 67]

I-Protection Module – Overcurrent Protection [ANSI 50,

51, 67]
Available stages:
I[1] ,I[2] ,I[3] ,I[4] ,I[5] ,I[6]

If you are using inrush blockings the tripping delay of the current
protection functions must be at least 30ms or more in order to prevent
faulty trippings.

In order to ensure correct functioning of the directional detection after

single-phase short-circuits, the following reference voltage is used: For
phase current I1 it is the line-to-line voltage U23, for phase current I2 the
line-to-line voltage U31 and for phase current I3 the line-to-line voltage U12.

In case the fault happens to be near the measuring location and there is no
reference voltage for directional recognition available any more (neither
measured or from history (voltage memory)), then the module will -
depending on the parameter setting - either trip non-directional or it will be
blocked.

All overcurrent protective elements I[1]..I[6] are identically structured.

This module offers Adaptive Parameter Sets.

Parameters can be modified within parameter sets dynamically by means of
Adaptive Parameter Sets.
Please refer to chapter Parameter / Adaptive Parameter Sets.

All I[1]...I[6] overcurrent protective elements can be planned as non-directional or optionally as directional
elements. This means, all 6 elements can be planned user defined in forward/reverse or non directional. For
each element the following characteristics are available:

• DEFT (UMZ)
• NINV (IEC/AMZ)
• VINV (IEC/AMZ)
• LINV (IEC/AMZ)
• EINV (IEC/AMZ)
• MINV (ANSI/AMZ)
• VINV (ANSI/AMZ)
• EINV (ANSI/AMZ)
• Thermal Flat
• IT
• I2T
• I4T

Page 260 EN MRA4 04/09

I-Protection Module – Overcurrent Protection [ANSI 50, 51, 67]

Explanation:
t = Tripping delay

t-char = Time multiplier/tripping characteristic factor

I = Fault current

I> = If the pick-up value is exceeded, the module/stage will be started.

By using the projecting parameters each of the overcurrent protective elements can be defined as »forward«,
»reverse« or »non-directional«. The forward or reverse direction is based on the characteristic angle for the
phase direction specified by the field parameter »I MTA«. No directional information will be taken into account if
the current protective element is planned as »non-directional«

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 261

I-Protection Module – Overcurrent Protection [ANSI 50, 51, 67]

DEFT

100

I
I>
0.01 40
10

t [s]

300 s

t
0.1

0.0 s

0.01
1 10
I
I>

Page 262 EN MRA4 04/09

I-Protection Module – Overcurrent Protection [ANSI 50, 51, 67]

IEC NINV
Notice!
Various reset modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed and
instantaneous.

Reset Trip

0.14 0.14
t= 2 *t-char [s] t= 0.02 *t-char [s]
I I
( I> ) -1 ( I> ) -1

t [s] t-char

x * I> (multiples of pickup)

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 263

I-Protection Module – Overcurrent Protection [ANSI 50, 51, 67]

IEC VINV
Notice!
Various reset modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed and
instantaneous.

Reset Trip

13.5 13.5
t= *t-char [s] t= *t-char [s]
I 2 I
( I> )-1 ( I> )-1

t [s]
t-char

x * I> (multiples of pickup)

Page 264 EN MRA4 04/09

I-Protection Module – Overcurrent Protection [ANSI 50, 51, 67]

IEC LINV
Notice!
Various reset modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed and
instantaneous.

Reset Trip

120 120
t= *t-char [s] t= *t-char [s]
I 2 I
( I> )-1 ( I> )-1

t [s] t-char

x * I> (multiples of pickup)

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 265

I-Protection Module – Overcurrent Protection [ANSI 50, 51, 67]

IEC EINV
Notice!
Various reset modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed and
instantaneous.

Reset Trip

80 80
t= 2
*t-char [s] t= 2
*t-char [s]
I I
( I> ) -1 ( I> ) -1

t [s] t-char

x * I> (multiples of pickup)

Page 266 EN MRA4 04/09

I-Protection Module – Overcurrent Protection [ANSI 50, 51, 67]

ANSI MINV
Notice!
Various reset modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed and
instantaneous.

Reset Trip

t=
( I
I>
4.85
2
) -1
*t-char [s] t=
( (
0.0515
I
I> )
0.02
-1
+ 0.1140
) *t-char [s]

t [s] t-char

x * I> (multiples of pickup)

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 267

I-Protection Module – Overcurrent Protection [ANSI 50, 51, 67]

ANSI VINV
Notice!
Various reset modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed and
instantaneous.

Reset Trip

t=
(
21.6
I
I> )
2
-1
*t-char [s] t=
(( I
I>
19.61

)
2
-1
+ 0.491
) *t-char [s]

t [s] t-char

x * I> (multiples of pickup)

Page 268 EN MRA4 04/09

I-Protection Module – Overcurrent Protection [ANSI 50, 51, 67]

ANSI EINV
Notice!
Various reset modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed and
instantaneous.

Reset Trip

t=
(
29.1
I
I> )
2
-1
*t-char [s] t=
(( I
I>
28.2
2
) -1
+ 0.1217
) *t-char [s]

t [s] t-char

x * I> (multiples of pickup)

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 269

I-Protection Module – Overcurrent Protection [ANSI 50, 51, 67]

Therm Flat
Notice!
Various reset modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed and
instantaneous.

Reset Trip
2 2
5*3 5*1
t= 0
*t-char [s] t= 0
*t-char [s]
I I
( In ) ( In )
t = 45 *t-char [s]

t [s] t-char

x * In (multiples of the nominal current)

Page 270 EN MRA4 04/09

I-Protection Module – Overcurrent Protection [ANSI 50, 51, 67]

IT
Notice!
Various reset modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed and
instantaneous.

Reset Trip

2 1
5*3 5*3
t= 0 *t-char [s] t= *t-char [s]
I 1
( In ) ( I
)
In

t [s] t-char

x * In (multiples of the nominal current)

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 271

I-Protection Module – Overcurrent Protection [ANSI 50, 51, 67]

I2T
Notice!
Various reset modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed and
instantaneous.

Reset Trip

2 2
5*3 5*3
t= *t-char [s] t= 2 *t-char [s]
I 0
I
( In ) ( In )

t [s] t-char

x * In (multiples of the nominal current)

Page 272 EN MRA4 04/09

I-Protection Module – Overcurrent Protection [ANSI 50, 51, 67]

I4T
Notice!
Various reset modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed and
instantaneous.

Reset Trip

2 4
5*3 5*3
t= 0 *t-char [s] t= *t-char [s]
I I
4
( In ) ( In )

t [s] t-char

x *In (multiples of the nominal current)

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 273

Page 274
Prot - phase failure direction detection

Prot.I I MTA

VL1
φ
VL2
VL3 Voltage memory &
I-Protection Module – Overcurrent Protection [ANSI 50, 51, 67]

IL1 Prot.I dir fwd

(forward)
IL2
IL3 VL1
VL12

I1

I MTA
&
Prot.I dir rev
(reverse)

VL23

Prot.Phase Sequence
VL31
VL2
&
VL3 Prot.I dir n poss
VL23
(not possible)

reverse forward

Prot.Alarm

EN MRA4 04/09
EN MRA4 04/09
direction decision phase overcurrent

name = I[1]...[n]

Device planning
name.Mode

non directional

forward
reverse
I-Protection Module – Overcurrent Protection [ANSI 50, 51, 67]

& >1
name. Fault in projected direction
Prot.I dir fwd 9
(forward)

&

Prot.I dir rev

(reverse)

name.nondir Trip at V=0

inactive
active
&

Prot.I dir n poss

(not possible)

Page 275
Page 276
I[1]...[n]
name = I[1]...[n]
name.IH2 Blo
Please Refer To Diagram: Blockings**
4 name.Alarm L1
(Stage is not deactivated and no active blocking signals) 24
Please Refer To Diagram: direction decision phase overcurrent
name.Alarm L2
9 25
name.* I[1]...[n] Fault in projected direction name.Alarm L3
&
26
name.IH2 Blo name.Alarm
14
inactive
&
name.Trip L1
active
& 16
Please Refer To Diagram: IH2
5 IH2.Blo L1 name.Trip L2
&
17
&
Please Refer To Diagram: IH2
6 name.Char
IH2.Blo L2 name.Trip L3
&
name.t-char 18
& &
name.t-reset
Please Refer To Diagram: IH2
7 IH2.Blo L3
name.t
I-Protection Module – Overcurrent Protection [ANSI 50, 51, 67]

φ
>1 DEFT / INV
& 0
>1 t
name.Trip

name.I>

IL1
&
IL2

name.TripCmd
IL3 &
Based on above parameters, 15
tripping times and reset modes will
be calculated by the device.

ILx max ILx max

Please Refer To Diagram: Trip blockings

3 (Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. )

EN MRA4 04/09
I-Protection Module – Overcurrent Protection [ANSI 50, 51, 67]

Device Planning Parameters of the I Module

Parameter Description Options Default Menu path
Mode Mode do not use, non directional [Device planning]
non directional,
forward,
reverse

Global Protection Parameters of the I Module

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
ExBlo1 External blocking of 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para
the module, if
blocking is activated /Global Prot Para
(allowed) within a /I-Prot
parameter set and if
the state of the /I[1]]
assigned signal is
true.

ExBlo2 External blocking of 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para

the module, if
/Global Prot Para
blocking is activated
(allowed) within a /I-Prot
parameter set and if
the state of the /I[1]]
assigned signal is
true.

ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para

the Trip Command
of the module/the /Global Prot Para
stage, if blocking is /I-Prot
activated (allowed)
within a parameter /I[1]]
set and if the state of
the assigned signal
is true.

Ex rev Interl External blocking of 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para

the module by
/Global Prot Para
external reverse
interlocking, if /I-Prot
blocking is activated
(allowed) within a /I[1]]
parameter set and if
the state of the
assigned signal is
true.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 277

I-Protection Module – Overcurrent Protection [ANSI 50, 51, 67]

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

AdaptSet 1 Assignment AdaptSet - [Protection Para
Adaptive Parameter
/Global Prot Para
1
/I-Prot
/I[1]]
AdaptSet 2 Assignment AdaptSet - [Protection Para
Adaptive Parameter
/Global Prot Para
2
/I-Prot
/I[1]]
AdaptSet 3 Assignment AdaptSet - [Protection Para
Adaptive Parameter
/Global Prot Para
3
/I-Prot
/I[1]]
AdaptSet 4 Assignment AdaptSet - [Protection Para
Adaptive Parameter
/Global Prot Para
4
/I-Prot
/I[1]]

Page 278 EN MRA4 04/09

I-Protection Module – Overcurrent Protection [ANSI 50, 51, 67]

Setting Group Parameters of the I Module

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
Function Permanent activation inactive, I[1]: active [Protection Para
or deactivation of
active I[2]: inactive /<n>
module/stage.
I[3]: inactive /I-Prot
I[4]: inactive /I[1]]
I[5]: inactive
I[6]: inactive
ExBlo Fc Activate (allow) or inactive, inactive [Protection Para
inactivate (disallow)
blocking of the active /<n>
module/stage. This /I-Prot
parameter is only
effective if a signal is /I[1]]
assigned to the
corresponding global
protection
parameter. If the
signal becomes true,
those
modules/stages are
blocked that are
parameterized
"ExBlo Fc=active".

Ex rev Interl Fc Activate (allow) or inactive, inactive [Protection Para

inactivate (disallow)
active /<n>
blocking of the
module/stage. This /I-Prot
parameter is only
effective if a signal is /I[1]]
assigned to the
corresponding global
protection
parameter. If the
signal becomes true,
those
modules/stages are
blocked that are
parameterized "Ex
rev Interl Fc =
active".

Blo TripCmd Permanent blocking inactive, inactive [Protection Para

of the Trip
active /<n>
Command of the
module/stage. /I-Prot
/I[1]]

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 279

I-Protection Module – Overcurrent Protection [ANSI 50, 51, 67]

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

ExBlo TripCmd Fc Activate (allow) or inactive, inactive [Protection Para
inactivate (disallow)
blocking of the active /<n>
module/stage. This /I-Prot
parameter is only
effective if a signal is /I[1]]
assigned to the
corresponding global
protection
parameter. If the
signal becomes true,
those
modules/stages are
blocked that are
parameterized
"ExBlo TripCmd
Fc=active".

I> If the pick-up value is 0.01 - 40.00In 1.00In [Protection Para

exceeded, the
module/stage will be /<n>
started. /I-Prot

Only available if: /I[1]]

Characteristic =
DEFTOrCharacteristi
c = INV
Char Characteristic DEFT, DEFT [Protection Para
IEC NINV, /<n>
IEC VINV, /I-Prot
IEC EINV, /I[1]]
IEC LINV,
ANSI MINV,
ANSI VINV,
ANSI EINV,
Therm Flat,
IT,
I2T,
I4T
t Tripping delay 0.00 - 300.00s 1.00s [Protection Para
/<n>
Only available if:
Characteristic = /I-Prot
DEFT
/I[1]]

Page 280 EN MRA4 04/09

I-Protection Module – Overcurrent Protection [ANSI 50, 51, 67]

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

t-char Time 0.05 - 20.00 1 [Protection Para
multiplier/tripping
characteristic factor /<n>
/I-Prot
Only available if:
Characteristic = /I[1]]
INVOrCharacteristic
= Therm
FlatOrCharacteristic
= ITOrCharacteristic
=
I2TOrCharacteristic
= I4T
Reset Mode Reset Mode instantaneous, instantaneous [Protection Para

Only available if: t-delay, /<n>

Characteristic = calculated /I-Prot
INVOrCharacteristic
= Therm /I[1]]
FlatOrCharacteristic
= ITOrCharacteristic
=
I2TOrCharacteristic
= I4T
t-reset Reset time for 0.00 - 60.00s 0s [Protection Para
intermittent phase
failures (INV /<n>
characteristics only) /I-Prot

Available if:Reset /I[1]]

Mode = t-delay
IH2 Blo Blocking the trip inactive, inactive [Protection Para
command, if an
active /<n>
inrush is detected.
/I-Prot
/I[1]]

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 281

I-Protection Module – Overcurrent Protection [ANSI 50, 51, 67]

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

nondir Trip at V=0 Only relevant for inactive, inactive [Protection Para
current protection
modules/stages with active /<n>
directional feature! /I-Prot
The device will trip
non directional if this /I[1]]
parameter is set to
active and no
direction could be
determined because
no reference voltage
(V=0) could be
measured any more
(e.g. if there is a
three-phase short
circuit close to the
device). If this
parameter is set to
inactive, the
protection stage will
be blocked in case
of V=0.

Only available if:

Device planning:
I.Mode = directional

Page 282 EN MRA4 04/09

I-Protection Module – Overcurrent Protection [ANSI 50, 51, 67]

I Module Input States

Name Description Assignment via
ExBlo1-I Module input state: External [Protection Para
blocking1
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/I[1]]
ExBlo2-I Module input state: External [Protection Para
blocking2
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/I[1]]
ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External [Protection Para
Blocking of the Trip Command
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/I[1]]
Ex rev Interl-I Module input state: External reverse [Protection Para
interlocking
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/I[1]]
AdaptSet1-I Module input state: Adaptive [Protection Para
Parameter1
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/I[1]]
AdaptSet2-I Module input state: Adaptive [Protection Para
Parameter2
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/I[1]]
AdaptSet3-I Module input state: Adaptive [Protection Para
Parameter3
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/I[1]]
AdaptSet4-I Module input state: Adaptive [Protection Para
Parameter4
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/I[1]]

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 283

I-Protection Module – Overcurrent Protection [ANSI 50, 51, 67]

I Module Signals (Output States)

Name Description
active Signal: active
ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
Ex rev Interl Signal: External reverse Interlocking
Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
IH2 Blo Signal: Blocking the trip command by an inrush
Alarm L1 Signal: Alarm L1
Alarm L2 Signal: Alarm L2
Alarm L3 Signal: Alarm L3
Alarm Signal: Alarm
Trip L1 Signal: General Trip L1
Trip L2 Signal: General Trip L2
Trip L3 Signal: General Trip L3
Trip Signal: Trip
TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
Active AdaptSet Active Adaptive Parameter
DefaultSet Signal: Default Parameter Set
AdaptSet 1 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1
AdaptSet 2 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 2
AdaptSet 3 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 3
AdaptSet 4 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 4

Page 284 EN MRA4 04/09

I-Protection Module – Overcurrent Protection [ANSI 50, 51, 67]

Commissioning: Overcurrent Protection, non-directional [ANSI 50, 51]

Object to be tested

• Signals to be measured for each current protection element I[1]...I[6], the threshold values, total tripping
time (recommended), or alternatively tripping delays and the fallback ratios; each time 3 x single-phase
and
1 x three-phase.

Especially in Holmgreen connections, wiring errors can easily happen, and

these are then detected safely. Measuring the total tripping time can
ensure that the secondary wiring is o.k. (from the terminal on, up to the trip
coil of the CB).

It is recommended to measure the total tripping time instead of the tripping

delay. The tripping delay should be specified by the customer. The total
tripping time is measured at the position signalling contact of the CB (not
at the relay output!).

Total tripping time = = tripping delay (please refer to the tolerances of the
protection stages)
+ CB operating time (about 50 ms)

Please take the CB operating times from the technical data specified in the
relevant documentation provided by the CB manufacturer.

Necessary means
• Current source
• May be: ampere meters
• Timer

Procedure

Testing the threshold values (3 x single-phase and 1 x three-phase)

Each time feed a current which is about 3-5% above the threshold value for activation/tripping. Then check the
threshold values.

Testing the total tripping delay (recommendation)

Measure the total tripping times at the auxiliary contacts of the CB (CB tripping).

Testing the tripping delay (measuring at the relay output)

Measure the tripping times at the relay output.

Testing the fallback ratio

Reduce the current to 97% below the trip value and check the fallback ratio.

Successful test result

The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays, threshold values and fallback ratios correspond
with those values, specified in the adjustment list. Permissible deviations/tolerances can be found under
Technical Data.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 285

I-Protection Module – Overcurrent Protection [ANSI 50, 51, 67]

Commissioning: Overcurrent Protection, directional [ANSI 67]

Object to be tested

• For each directional overcurrent element II[1]...I[6] are to be measured: the total tripping time
(recommendation) or alternatively tripping delays and the fallback ratios; each time 3 x single-phase
and 1 x three-phase.

Especially in Holmgreen connections, wiring errors can happen easily and

these are then detected safely. By measuring the total tripping time, it can
be ensured that the secondary wiring is o.k. (from the terminal on, up to the
trip coil of the CB ).

It is recommended to measure the total tripping time instead of the tripping

time. The tripping delay should be specified by the customer. The total
tripping time is measured at the position signaling contacts of the CBs (not
at the relay output!).

Total tripping time: = tripping delay (please refer to the tolerances of the
protection stages)
+ CB operating time (about 50 ms)

Please take the CB switching times from the technical data, specified in the
relevant documentation, provided by the CB manufacturer.

Necessary means
• Synchronizable current and voltage sources
• May be: ampere meters
• Timer

Procedure

Synchronize the 3-phase current and voltage sources with each other. Then simulate the tripping directions to be
tested by the angle between current and voltage.

Testing the threshold values (3 x single-phase and 1 x three-phase)

Each time feed a current which is about 3-5% above the threshold value for activation/tripping. Check then the
threshold values.

Testing the total tripping delay (recommendation)

Measure the total tripping times at the auxiliary contacts of the CB (CB tripping).

Testing the trip delay (measured at the relay output)

Measure the tripping times at the relay output.

Testing the fallback ratio

Reduce the current to 97% below the trip value and check the fallback ratio.

Successful test result

The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays, threshold values and fallback ratios correspond
with those values, specified in the adjustment list. Permissible deviations/tolerances can be found under
Technical Data.

Page 286 EN MRA4 04/09

IG-Protection Module – Ground Fault [ANSI 50N/G, 51N/G, 67N/G]

IG-Protection Module – Ground Fault [ANSI 50N/G, 51N/G,

67N/G]
Available stages:
IG[1] ,IG[2] ,IG[3] ,IG[4]

If you are using inrush blockings the tripping delay of the earth current
protection functions must be at least 30ms or more in order to prevent
faulty trippings.

All earth current elements IG[1]..IG[4] are identically structured.

This module offfers Adaptive Parameter Sets.

Parameters can be modified within parameter sets dynamically by means of
Adaptive Parameter Sets.
Please refer to chapter Parameter / Adaptive Parameter Sets.

All IG[1]...IG[4] earth current protective elements can be planned user defined as non-directional or as
directional stages. This means, for instance, all 4 elements can be projected in forward/reverse direction. For
each element the following characteristics are available:

• DEFT (UMZ)
• NINV (AMZ)
• VINV (AMZ)
• LINV (AMZ)
• EINV (AMZ)
• MINV (AMZ)
• VINV (AMZ)
• EINV (AMZ)
• Thermal Flat
• IT
• I2T
• I4T

Explanation:

t = Tripping delay

t-char = Time multiplier/tripping characteristic factor

IG = Fault current

IG> = If the pick-up value is exceeded, the module/stage will be started.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 287

IG-Protection Module – Ground Fault [ANSI 50N/G, 51N/G, 67N/G]

The directional decision depends on the layout of the mains star-point or the angle between residual voltage and
ground current. The residual voltage can be measured via suitable transformers (da-dn winding – formerly: e-n)
or can be calculated, provided the VTs are in star-connection.

The earth current can be measured either directly via a cable-type transformer or detected by a Holmgreen
connection. The earth current can alternatively be calculated from the phase currents; but this is only possible if
the phase currents are not ascertained by a V-connection.

The device can optionally be procured with a sensitive earth current measuring input (in preparation).

Page 288 EN MRA4 04/09

IG-Protection Module – Ground Fault [ANSI 50N/G, 51N/G, 67N/G]

DEFT

100

IG
IG>
I/I>
0.01 20
40
10

t [s]

300 s

t
0.1

0.0 s

0.01
1 10
IG
IG>

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 289

IG-Protection Module – Ground Fault [ANSI 50N/G, 51N/G, 67N/G]

IEC NINV
Notice!
Various reset modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed and
instantaneous.

Reset Trip

0.14 0.14
t= 2 *t-char [s] t= 0.02 *t-char [s]
IG IG
( IG> ) -1 ( IG> ) -1

t [s] t-char

x * IG> (multiples of pickup)

Page 290 EN MRA4 04/09

IG-Protection Module – Ground Fault [ANSI 50N/G, 51N/G, 67N/G]

IEC VINV
Notice!
Various reset modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed and
instantaneous.

Reset Trip

13.5 13.5
t= *t-char [s] t= *t-char [s]
IG 2 IG
( IG> )
-1 ( IG> )
-1

t [s]
t-char

x * IG> (multiples of pickup)

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 291

IG-Protection Module – Ground Fault [ANSI 50N/G, 51N/G, 67N/G]

IEC LINV
Notice!
Various reset modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed and
instantaneous.

Reset Trip

120 120
t= *t-char [s] t= *t-char [s]
IG 2 IG
( IG>)-1 ( IG> )
-1

t [s] t-char

x * IG> (multiples of pickup)

Page 292 EN MRA4 04/09

IG-Protection Module – Ground Fault [ANSI 50N/G, 51N/G, 67N/G]

IEC EINV
Notice!
Various reset modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed and
instantaneous.

Reset Trip

80 80
t= *t-char [s] t= *t-char [s]
IG 2 IG 2
( IG> )
-1 ( IG> )
-1

t [s] t-char

x * IG> (multiples of pickup)

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 293

IG-Protection Module – Ground Fault [ANSI 50N/G, 51N/G, 67N/G]

ANSI MINV
Notice!
Various reset modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed and
instantaneous.

Reset Trip

t=
(
4.85
IG
I>
2
) -1
*t-char [s] t=
( (
0.0515
IG
IG> )
0.02
-1
+ 0.1140
) *t-char [s]

t [s] t-char

x * IG> (multiples of pickup)

Page 294 EN MRA4 04/09

IG-Protection Module – Ground Fault [ANSI 50N/G, 51N/G, 67N/G]

ANSI VINV
Notice!
Various reset modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed and
instantaneous.

Reset Trip

t=
(
21.6
IG 2
IG> )-1
*t-char [s] t=
((
19.61
IG
IG> )
2
-1
+ 0.491
) *t-char [s]

t [s] t-char

x * IG> (multiples of pickup)

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 295

IG-Protection Module – Ground Fault [ANSI 50N/G, 51N/G, 67N/G]

ANSI EINV
Notice!
Various reset modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed and
instantaneous.

Reset Trip

t=
(
29.1
IG 2
IG> )-1
*t-char [s] t=
((
28.2
IG
IG> )
2
-1
+ 0.1217
) *t-char [s]

t [s] t-char

x * IG> (multiples of pickup)

Page 296 EN MRA4 04/09

IG-Protection Module – Ground Fault [ANSI 50N/G, 51N/G, 67N/G]

Therm Flat
Notice!
Various reset modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed and
instantaneous.
Reset Trip
2
5*1 5
t= *t-char [s] t= 0 *t-char [s]
IG 0 IG
(IGnom) (IGnom)

t = 5 *t-char [s]

t [s] t-char

x * IGnom (multiples of the nominal current)

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 297

IG-Protection Module – Ground Fault [ANSI 50N/G, 51N/G, 67N/G]

IT
Notice!
Various reset modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed and
instantaneous.

Reset Trip

2 1
5*1 5*1
t= 0 *t-char [s] t= *t-char [s]
IG IG
1
(IGnom) (IGnom)

t [s] t-char

x * IGnom (multiples of the nominal current)

Page 298 EN MRA4 04/09

IG-Protection Module – Ground Fault [ANSI 50N/G, 51N/G, 67N/G]

I2T
Notice!
Various reset modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed and
instantaneous.

Reset Trip

2 2
5*1 5*1
t= *t-char [s] t= 2 *t-char [s]
IG 0 IG
(IGnom) (IGnom)

t [s] t-char

x * IGnom (multiples of the nominal current)

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 299

IG-Protection Module – Ground Fault [ANSI 50N/G, 51N/G, 67N/G]

I4T
Notice!
Various reset modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed and
instantaneous.

Reset Trip

2 4
5*1 5*1
t= 0 *t-char [s] t= *t-char [s]
IG IG
4
(IGnom) (IGnom)

t [s] t-char

x * IGnom (multiples of the nominal current)

Page 300 EN MRA4 04/09

EN MRA4 04/09
Prot - Earth fault - direction detection

Prot.IG MTA + Prot.EVT Angle Cor

φ
VE

IG

sin (-90°)? cos (180°)

VE VE

reverse forward
&
reverse Prot.IG dir fwd
IW (forward)

IC
IG-Protection Module – Ground Fault [ANSI 50N/G, 51N/G, 67N/G]

IG IG
forward &
Prot.IG rev dir
(reverse)

SOLI-RESI
VE

&
Prot.IG dir n poss
IG MTA (not possible)

IG

forward reverse

Prot.Alarm

Page 301
Page 302
direction decision Earth fault

name = IG[1]...[n]

Device planning
name.Mode

non directional

forward

reverse

& >1
IG-Protection Module – Ground Fault [ANSI 50N/G, 51N/G, 67N/G]

name. Fault in projected direction

Prot.IG dir fwd 10

&
Prot.IG rev dir

name.nondir Trip
at VE=0
inactive
active &

Prot.IG dir n poss

(not possible)

EN MRA4 04/09
EN MRA4 04/09
IG[1]...[n]

name = IG[1]...[n]

Please Refer To Diagram: Blockings**

4 (Stage is not deactivated and no active blocking signals)

Please Refer To Diagram: direction decision Earth fault

10 name.* Fault in projected direction
name.IGH2 Blo

name.Alarm
14 27
name.IH2 Blo

inactive &
active &
Please Refer To Diagram: IH2
8 IH2..Blo IG
name.Char

name.VE Blo name.t-char

inactive
name.t-reset
active >1
name.t
IG-Protection Module – Ground Fault [ANSI 50N/G, 51N/G, 67N/G]

name.VE> & φ
DEFT / INV
0
VE t

&
name.Trip
name.IG>

IG

&
name.TripCmd
15 19
Based on above parameters,
tripping times and reset modes will
be calculated by the device.

Please Refer To Diagram: Trip blockings

3 (Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. )

Page 303
IG-Protection Module – Ground Fault [ANSI 50N/G, 51N/G, 67N/G]

Device Planning Parameters of the Ground Fault Protection

Parameter Description Options Default Menu path
Mode Mode do not use, non directional [Device planning]
non directional,
forward,
reverse

Global Protection Parameters of the Ground Fault Protection

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
ExBlo1 External blocking of 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para
the module, if
/Global Prot Para
blocking is activated
(allowed) within a /I-Prot
parameter set and if
the state of the /IG[1]]
assigned signal is
true.

ExBlo2 External blocking of 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para

the module, if
blocking is activated /Global Prot Para
(allowed) within a /I-Prot
parameter set and if
the state of the /IG[1]]
assigned signal is
true.

ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para

the Trip Command
/Global Prot Para
of the module/the
stage, if blocking is /I-Prot
activated (allowed)
within a parameter /IG[1]]
set and if the state of
the assigned signal
is true.

Ex rev Interl External blocking of 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para

the module by
/Global Prot Para
external reverse
interlocking, if /I-Prot
blocking is activated
(allowed) within a /IG[1]]
parameter set and if
the state of the
assigned signal is
true.

Page 304 EN MRA4 04/09

IG-Protection Module – Ground Fault [ANSI 50N/G, 51N/G, 67N/G]

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

AdaptSet 1 Assignment AdaptSet - [Protection Para
Adaptive Parameter
/Global Prot Para
1
/I-Prot
/IG[1]]
AdaptSet 2 Assignment AdaptSet - [Protection Para
Adaptive Parameter
/Global Prot Para
2
/I-Prot
/IG[1]]
AdaptSet 3 Assignment AdaptSet - [Protection Para
Adaptive Parameter
/Global Prot Para
3
/I-Prot
/IG[1]]
AdaptSet 4 Assignment AdaptSet - [Protection Para
Adaptive Parameter
/Global Prot Para
4
/I-Prot
/IG[1]]

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 305

IG-Protection Module – Ground Fault [ANSI 50N/G, 51N/G, 67N/G]

Setting Group Parameters of the Ground Fault Protection

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
Function Permanent activation inactive, inactive [Protection Para
or deactivation of
active /<n>
module/stage.
/I-Prot
/IG[1]]
ExBlo Fc Activate (allow) or inactive, inactive [Protection Para
inactivate (disallow)
blocking of the active /<n>
module/stage. This /I-Prot
parameter is only
effective if a signal is /IG[1]]
assigned to the
corresponding global
protection
parameter. If the
signal becomes true,
those
modules/stages are
blocked that are
parameterized
"ExBlo Fc=active".

Ex rev Interl Fc Activate (allow) or inactive, inactive [Protection Para

inactivate (disallow)
active /<n>
blocking of the
module/stage. This /I-Prot
parameter is only
effective if a signal is /IG[1]]
assigned to the
corresponding global
protection
parameter. If the
signal becomes true,
those
modules/stages are
blocked that are
parameterized "Ex
rev Interl Fc =
active".

Blo TripCmd Permanent blocking inactive, inactive [Protection Para

of the Trip
active /<n>
Command of the
module/stage. /I-Prot
/IG[1]]

Page 306 EN MRA4 04/09

IG-Protection Module – Ground Fault [ANSI 50N/G, 51N/G, 67N/G]

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

ExBlo TripCmd Fc Activate (allow) or inactive, inactive [Protection Para
inactivate (disallow)
blocking of the active /<n>
module/stage. This /I-Prot
parameter is only
effective if a signal is /IG[1]]
assigned to the
corresponding global
protection
parameter. If the
signal becomes true,
those
modules/stages are
blocked that are
parameterized
"ExBlo TripCmd
Fc=active".

IG> If the pick-up value is 0.01 - 20.00In 0.01In [Protection Para

exceeded, the
module/stage will be /<n>
started. /I-Prot

Only available if: /IG[1]]

Characteristic =
DEFT Or
Characteristic =
INV
Char Characteristic DEFT, DEFT [Protection Para
IEC NINV, /<n>
IEC VINV, /I-Prot
IEC EINV, /IG[1]]
IEC LINV,
ANSI MINV,
ANSI VINV,
ANSI EINV,
Therm Flat,
IT,
I2T,
I4T

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 307

IG-Protection Module – Ground Fault [ANSI 50N/G, 51N/G, 67N/G]

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

VE Blo VE Blo = active inactive, inactive [Protection Para
means that the IG-
stage will only excite active /<n>
if a residual voltage /I-Prot
higher than the pick-
up value is /IG[1]]
measured at the
same time. VE Blo =
inactive means that
the excitation of the
IG stage does not
depend on any
residual voltage
stage.

VE> If the pick-up value is 0.01 - 2.00Vn 1.00Vn [Protection Para

exceeded, the
/<n>
module/stage will be
started. /I-Prot

Only available if: VE /IG[1]]

Blo = active
t Tripping delay 0.00 - 300.00s 0.00s [Protection Para
/<n>
Only available if:
Characteristic = /I-Prot
DEFT
/IG[1]]

t-char Time 0.05 - 20.00 1 [Protection Para

multiplier/tripping
characteristic factor /<n>
/I-Prot
Only available if:
Characteristic = /IG[1]]
INV Or
Characteristic =
Therm Flat Or
Characteristic = IT
Or Characteristic =
I2T Or Characteristic
= I4T
Reset Mode Reset Mode instantaneous, instantaneous [Protection Para
t-delay, /<n>
Only available if:
Characteristic = calculated /I-Prot
INV Or
Characteristic = /IG[1]]
Therm Flat Or
Characteristic = IT
Or Characteristic =
I2T Or Characteristic
= I4T

Page 308 EN MRA4 04/09

IG-Protection Module – Ground Fault [ANSI 50N/G, 51N/G, 67N/G]

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

t-reset Reset time for 0.00 - 60.00s 0.00s [Protection Para
intermittent phase
failures (INV /<n>
characteristics only) /I-Prot

Only available /IG[1]]

if:Reset Mode = t-
delay
IH2 Blo Blocking the trip inactive, inactive [Protection Para
command, if an
active /<n>
inrush is detected.
/I-Prot
/IG[1]]

nondir Trip at VE=0 Only relevant for inactive, inactive [Protection Para
current protection
modules/stages with active /<n>
directional feature! /I-Prot
The device will trip
non directional if this /IG[1]]
parameter is set to
active and no
direction could be
determined because
no reference voltage
(V=0) could be
measured any more
(e.g. if there is a
three-phase short
circuit close to the
device). If this
parameter is set to
inactive, the
protection stage will
be blocked in case
of V=0.

Only available if:

Device planning:
Earth current
protection -
Stage.Mode =
directional

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 309

IG-Protection Module – Ground Fault [ANSI 50N/G, 51N/G, 67N/G]

Ground Fault Protection Input States

Name Description Assignment via
ExBlo1-I Module input state: External [Protection Para
blocking1
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/IG[1]]
ExBlo2-I Module input state: External [Protection Para
blocking2
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/IG[1]]
ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External [Protection Para
Blocking of the Trip Command
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/IG[1]]
Ex rev Interl-I Module input state: External reverse [Protection Para
interlocking
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/IG[1]]
AdaptSet1-I Module input state: Adaptive [Protection Para
Parameter1
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/IG[1]]
AdaptSet2-I Module input state: Adaptive [Protection Para
Parameter2
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/IG[1]]
AdaptSet3-I Module input state: Adaptive [Protection Para
Parameter3
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/IG[1]]
AdaptSet4-I Module input state: Adaptive [Protection Para
Parameter4
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/IG[1]]

Page 310 EN MRA4 04/09

IG-Protection Module – Ground Fault [ANSI 50N/G, 51N/G, 67N/G]

Ground Fault Protection Signals (Output States)

Name Description
active Signal: active
ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
Ex rev Interl Signal: External reverse Interlocking
Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
Alarm Signal: Alarm IG
Trip Signal: Trip
TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
IGH2 Blo Signal: blocked by an inrush
Active AdaptSet Active Adaptive Parameter
DefaultSet Signal: Default Parameter Set
AdaptSet 1 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1
AdaptSet 2 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 2
AdaptSet 3 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 3
AdaptSet 4 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 4

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 311

IG-Protection Module – Ground Fault [ANSI 50N/G, 51N/G, 67N/G]

Commissioning: Ground Fault Protection – non-directional [ANSI 50N/G,

51N/G]
Please test the non-directional earth overcurrent analog to the non-directional phase overcurrent protection.

Commissioning: Ground Fault Protection – directional [ANSI 50N/G,

51N/G, 67N/G]
Please test the directional earth overcurrent analog to the directional phase overcurrent protection.

Page 312 EN MRA4 04/09

ThR-Protection Module: Thermal Replica [ANSI 49]

ThR-Protection Module: Thermal Replica [ANSI 49]

ThR

The maximal permissible thermal loading capacity, and consequently the tripping delay of a component,
depends on the amount of the flowing current at a specific time, the »previously existing load (current)« as well
as on a constant specified by the component.

The thermal overload protection is in compliance with IEC255-8 (VDE 435 T301). A complete thermal replica
function is implemented in the device as Homogeneous-Body Replica of the equipment to be protected and by
taking the previously existing load into account. The protection function is of one step design, provided with a
warning limit.

For this the device calculates the thermal load of the equipment by using the existing measured values and the
parameter settings. When knowing the thermal constants, the temperature of the equipment can be established
(simulated).

The general tripping times of the overload protection can be gathered from the following equation according to
IEC 255-8:

I2 - Ip2
t = t -warm ln( )
I2 - (K*Ib)2

Legend:

t = Tripping delay

t -warm = Warming-up time constant

Ib = Base current: Maximum permissible thermal continuous current.

K = Over load factor: The maximum admissible thermal limit is defined/

calculated by the product of overload factor and basic current k*IB.

I = measured current (x In)

Ip = previously existing load

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 313

Page 314
ThR
name = ThR

Please Refer To Diagram: Blockings

2 (Stage is not deactivated and no active blocking signals)

&
ThR.Alarm
ThR-Protection Module: Thermal Replica [ANSI 49]

14

IL1 IL1 t -warm

t -cool
RMS
k*Ib
ThR.Trip
Alarm Theta
IL2 IL2 MAX
RMS {ILxRMS}

IL3 IL3
RMS &
100%
& ThR.TripCmd
15

Please Refer To Diagram: Trip blockings

3 (Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. )

EN MRA4 04/09
ThR-Protection Module: Thermal Replica [ANSI 49]

Direct Commands of the Thermal Overload Module

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
Reset Reset the Thermal inactive, inactive [Operation
Replica
active /Reset]

Device Planning Parameters of the Thermal Overload Module

Parameter Description Options Default Menu path
Mode Mode do not use, use [Device planning]
use

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 315

ThR-Protection Module: Thermal Replica [ANSI 49]

Global Protection Parameters of the Thermal Overload Module

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
ExBlo1 External blocking of 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para
the module, if
/Global Prot Para
blocking is activated
(allowed) within a /I-Prot
parameter set and if
the state of the /ThR]
assigned signal is
true.

ExBlo2 External blocking of 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para

the module, if
blocking is activated /Global Prot Para
(allowed) within a /I-Prot
parameter set and if
the state of the /ThR]
assigned signal is
true.

ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para

the Trip Command
/Global Prot Para
of the module/the
stage, if blocking is /I-Prot
activated (allowed)
within a parameter /ThR]
set and if the state of
the assigned signal
is true.

Page 316 EN MRA4 04/09

ThR-Protection Module: Thermal Replica [ANSI 49]

Setting Group Parameters of the Thermal Overload Module

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
Function Permanent activation inactive, inactive [Protection Para
or deactivation of
active /<n>
module/stage.
/I-Prot
/ThR]
ExBlo Fc Activate (allow) or inactive, inactive [Protection Para
inactivate (disallow)
blocking of the active /<n>
module/stage. This /I-Prot
parameter is only
effective if a signal is /ThR]
assigned to the
corresponding global
protection
parameter. If the
signal becomes true,
those
modules/stages are
blocked that are
parameterized
"ExBlo Fc=active".

Blo TripCmd Permanent blocking inactive, inactive [Protection Para

of the Trip
active /<n>
Command of the
module/stage. /I-Prot
/ThR]

ExBlo TripCmd Fc Activate (allow) or inactive, inactive [Protection Para

inactivate (disallow)
blocking of the active /<n>
module/stage. This /I-Prot
parameter is only
effective if a signal is /ThR]
assigned to the
corresponding global
protection
parameter. If the
signal becomes true,
those
modules/stages are
blocked that are
parameterized
"ExBlo TripCmd
Fc=active".

Ib Base current: 0.01 - 4.00In 1.00In [Protection Para

Maximum
/<n>
permissible thermal
continuous current. /I-Prot
/ThR]

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 317

ThR-Protection Module: Thermal Replica [ANSI 49]

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

K Over load factor: 0.80 - 1.20 1.00 [Protection Para
The maximum
admissible thermal /<n>
limit is /I-Prot
defined/calculated by
the product of /ThR]
overload factor and
basic current k*IB.

Alarm Theta Pick-up value 50 - 100% 80% [Protection Para

/<n>
/I-Prot
/ThR]
τ-warm Warming-up time 1 - 60000s 10s [Protection Para
constant
/<n>
/I-Prot
/ThR]
τ-cool Cooling time 1 - 60000s 10s [Protection Para
constant
/<n>
/I-Prot
/ThR]

Page 318 EN MRA4 04/09

ThR-Protection Module: Thermal Replica [ANSI 49]

Thermal Overload Module Input States

Name Description Assignment via
ExBlo1-I Module input state: External [Protection Para
blocking1
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/ThR]
ExBlo2-I Module input state: External [Protection Para
blocking2
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/ThR]
ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External [Protection Para
Blocking of the Trip Command
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/ThR]

Signals of the Thermal Overload Signals (Output States)

Name Description
active Signal: active
ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
Alarm Signal: Alarm Thermal Overload
Trip Signal: Trip
TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
Reset Theta Signal: Resetting Thermal Replica

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 319

ThR-Protection Module: Thermal Replica [ANSI 49]

Thermal Overload Module Values

Value Description Menu path
Theta Measured value: Theta [Operation
/Measured values
/ThR]
t-Theta Measured value [Operation
(calculated/measured): Remaining
/Measured values
time until the thermal overload
module will trip /ThR]

Thermal Overload Module Statistics

Value Description Menu path
Theta max Theta maximum value [Operation
/Statistics
/ThR]
Theta avg Theta average value [Operation
/Statistics
/ThR]
Theta min Theta minimum value [Operation
/Statistics
/ThR]

Page 320 EN MRA4 04/09

ThR-Protection Module: Thermal Replica [ANSI 49]

Commissioning: Thermal Replica [ANSI 49]

Object to be tested
Protective function ThR

Necessary means
• Three-phase current source
• Timer

Procedure
Calculate the tripping time for the current to be constantly impressed by using the formula for the thermal image.

The parameter of the temperature rise of the component »τw« has to be

known to guarantee an optimal protection.

I2 - Ip2
t = t -warm ln( )
I2 - (K*Ib)2

Legend:

t = Tripping delay

t -warm = Warming-up time constant

Ib = Base current: Maximum permissible thermal continuous current.

K = Over load factor: The maximum admissible thermal limit is defined/

calculated by the product of overload factor and basic current k*IB.

I = measured current (x In)

Ip = previously existing load

Testing the threshold values

Apply the current you have based your mathematical calculation on.

Testing the trip delay

The thermal capacity should be zero before the test is started. See
»Measuring Values«.

For testing the trip delay, a timer is to be connected to the contact of the associated trip relay.
Apply the current you have based your mathematical calculation on. The timer is started as soon as the current
is applied and it is stopped when the relay trips.

Successful test result

The calculated tripping time and the fallback ratio comply with the measured values. For permissible
deviations/tolerances, please see Technical Data.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 321

I2>-Protection Module – Unbalanced Load Protection [ANSI 46]

I2>-Protection Module – Unbalanced Load Protection

[ANSI 46]
Available stages:
I2>[1] ,I2>[2]

Asymmetrical loading of an electrical machine produces a negative-sequence field which heavily affects the rotor
heavy in thermal respect or even can destroy it. The unbalanced load protection mainly prevents that the rotor
warms-up to an inadmissible degree. The unbalanced load protection can also detect phase failures and
transformer wiring errors.

Both elements, i.e. I2>[1] and I2>[2] are identically structured.

Rating value I2> is the permitted continuous unbalanced load current of the machines (generator/engine) to be
protected referring to the rated current of the device (not to the rated current of the machine!). This parameter
for the individual step used as machine protection against overheating caused by unbalanced load current
should be adjusted according to the permitted continuous unbalanced load current stated by the manufacturer of
the generator/engine. For both steps trip characteristics are provided, namely a definite time characteristic
(DEFT) and an inverse characteristic (INV).

The characteristic of the inverse curve is as follows:

K
t<
I2 - I2>2
2

Legend:

t = Tripping delay

K = Indicates the thermal load capability of the engine while running with 100%
unbalanced load current.

I2> = If the pick-up value is exceeded, the module/stage will be started.

I2 = Measured value (calculated): Unbalanced load current

In the equation shown above the heating-up process is assumed by integration of the counter system current I2.
When I2> is undershoot, the built-up heat amount will be reduced in line with the adjusted cooling-down constant
“tau-cool”.

t
- t -cool
Theta(t) = Theta0 * e

Page 322 EN MRA4 04/09

I2>-Protection Module – Unbalanced Load Protection [ANSI 46]

Legend:
t = Tripping delay

t -cool = Cooling time constant

Theta(t) = Momentanous heat (thermal) energy

Theta 0 = Heat (thermal) energy before the cooling down has started
If the heat amount is not reduced when the permitted unbalanced load current is overshoot again, the remaining
heat amount will cause an earlier tripping.

Typical NPSI-Relay Operating Curves

100001 . 104

3
1 . 10

t ( I2% , 0.5 , 200)

t ( I2% , 0.5 , 100) 100

t ( I2% , 0.5 , 50)
Time (s)

t ( I2% , 0.5 , 20)

t ( I2% , 0.5 , 10)

t ( I2% , 0.5 , 5)

t ( I2% , 0.5 , 1) 10

0.1
0.1
1 10
1 I2% 10
(Curren t I2/I2s (%))
K=200
K=100
K=50
K=20
K=10
K=5
K=1

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 323

Page 324
I2>[1]...[n]

name = I2>[1]...[n]

name.Alarm
14

name.Char

Please Refer To Diagram: Blockings

t-char
2 (Stage is not deactivated and no active blocking signals)

name.t

name.K

name.
t-cool
&
I2>-Protection Module – Unbalanced Load Protection [ANSI 46]

name.Trip

0
t

IL1
name.I2>
&
IL2 t-cool name.TripCmd
I2 15
IL3

Please Refer To Diagram: Trip blockings

3 (Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. )

EN MRA4 04/09
I2>-Protection Module – Unbalanced Load Protection [ANSI 46]

Device Planning Parameters of the Unbalanced Load Module

Parameter Description Options Default Menu path
Mode Mode do not use, use [Device planning]
use

Global Protection Parameters of the Unbalanced Load Module

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
ExBlo1 External blocking of 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para
the module, if
blocking is activated /Global Prot Para
(allowed) within a /I-Prot
parameter set and if
the state of the /I2>[1]]
assigned signal is
true.

ExBlo2 External blocking of 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para

the module, if
/Global Prot Para
blocking is activated
(allowed) within a /I-Prot
parameter set and if
the state of the /I2>[1]]
assigned signal is
true.

ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para

the Trip Command
of the module/the /Global Prot Para
stage, if blocking is /I-Prot
activated (allowed)
within a parameter /I2>[1]]
set and if the state of
the assigned signal
is true.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 325

I2>-Protection Module – Unbalanced Load Protection [ANSI 46]

Setting Group Parameters of the Unbalanced Load Module

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
Function Permanent activation inactive, inactive [Protection Para
or deactivation of
active /<n>
module/stage.
/I-Prot
/I2>[1]]
ExBlo Fc Activate (allow) or inactive, inactive [Protection Para
inactivate (disallow)
blocking of the active /<n>
module/stage. This /I-Prot
parameter is only
effective if a signal is /I2>[1]]
assigned to the
corresponding global
protection
parameter. If the
signal becomes true,
those
modules/stages are
blocked that are
parameterized
"ExBlo Fc=active".

Blo TripCmd Permanent blocking inactive, inactive [Protection Para

of the Trip
active /<n>
Command of the
module/stage. /I-Prot
/I2>[1]]

ExBlo TripCmd Fc Activate (allow) or inactive, inactive [Protection Para

inactivate (disallow)
blocking of the active /<n>
module/stage. This /I-Prot
parameter is only
effective if a signal is /I2>[1]]
assigned to the
corresponding global
protection
parameter. If the
signal becomes true,
those
modules/stages are
blocked that are
parameterized
"ExBlo TripCmd
Fc=active".

I2> If the pick-up value is 0.01 - 4.00In 0.01In [Protection Para

exceeded, the
/<n>
module/stage will be
started. /I-Prot
/I2>[1]]

Page 326 EN MRA4 04/09

I2>-Protection Module – Unbalanced Load Protection [ANSI 46]

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

Char Characteristic DEFT, DEFT [Protection Para
INV /<n>
/I-Prot
/I2>[1]]
t Tripping delay 0.00 - 300.00s 0.00s [Protection Para
/<n>
Only available if:
Characteristic = /I-Prot
DEFT
/I2>[1]]
K Indicates the thermal 1.0 - 200.0 10.0 [Protection Para
load capability of the
engine while running /<n>
with 100% /I-Prot
unbalanced load
current. /I2>[1]]

Only available if:

Characteristic =
INV
τ-cool If the unbalanced 0.0 - 60000.0 0.0 [Protection Para
load current falls
/<n>
below the pick-up
value, the cooling-off /I-Prot
time is taken into
account. If the /I2>[1]]
unbalanced load
exceeds the pick-up
value again, than the
saved heat within the
electrical equipment
will lead to an
accelerated trip.

Only available if:

Characteristic =
INV

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 327

I2>-Protection Module – Unbalanced Load Protection [ANSI 46]

Unbalanced Load Module Input States

Name Description Assignment via
ExBlo1-I Module input state: External [Protection Para
blocking1
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/I2>[1]]
ExBlo2-I Module input state: External [Protection Para
blocking2
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/I2>[1]]
ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External [Protection Para
Blocking of the Trip Command
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/I2>[1]]

Unbalanced Load Module Signals (Output States)

Name Description
active Signal: active
ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
Alarm Signal: Alarm Negative Sequence
Trip Signal: Trip
TripCmd Signal: Trip Command

Page 328 EN MRA4 04/09

I2>-Protection Module – Unbalanced Load Protection [ANSI 46]

Commissioning: Unbalanced Load Protection [ANSI 46]

Object to be tested:
Test of the unbalanced load protection function

Necessary means
• Three-phase current source
• Timer

Procedure:

Check of the rotating field direction

• Ensure that the rotating field direction corresponds with the direction set in the field parameters.

• Feed-in a 3-phase nominal current.

• Change to menu »Measuring Values«

• Check the measuring value for the unbalanced current »I2«. The measuring value displayed for »I2«
should be zero (within the physical measuring accuracy).

If despite a feeding symmetrical nominal current, the displayed value for

»I2« is >zero (33%), than a left rotating field is falsely being fed.
Correct the direction of the rotating field.

• Now disconnect phase L1.

• Check again the measuring value of the unbalanced current »I2« in menu »Measuring Values«
The measuring value of the asymmetrical current »I2« should now be 33%.

• Re-connect phase L1, but disconnect phase L2.

• Check once more the measuring value of the asymmetrical current I2 in menu »Measuring Values«.
The measuring value of the asymmetrical current »I2« should be again 33%.

• Re-connect phase L2, but disconnect phase L3.

• Check again the measuring value of asymmetrical current »I2« in menu »Measuring Values«.
The measuring value of the asymmetrical current »I2« should still be 33%.

Testing the threshold values

For testing the threshold value, a current has to be fed to phase 1 which is three times lower than the adjusted
threshold value of »I2«. Now the current in phase 1 is to be reduced until the relay is activated.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 329

I2>-Protection Module – Unbalanced Load Protection [ANSI 46]

Testing the trip delay

Impress a symmetrical three-phase current system (nominal currents). Switch off IL1 (the threshold value for
»I2« must be below 33%). Measure the tripping time.

The present asymmetrical load »I2« corresponds with 1/3 of the existing phase current displayed.

Testing the fallback ratio

The fallback ratio must not be higher than 0.95 times the threshold value.

Successful test result

The measured trip delays, threshold values and fallback ratios are within the permitted deviations/tolerances,
specified under Technical Data.

Page 330 EN MRA4 04/09

SOTF-Protection Module: Switch Onto Fault

SOTF-Protection Module: Switch Onto Fault

SOTF

In case that a faulty line is energized (e.g. when an earthing switch is while maintenance in the ON-Position) an
instantaneous tripping required.

This protection module can initiate a high speed trip of the overcurrent protection modules.

This module can be started via a digital input that indicates that the circuit breaker is manually closed.

This Module issues a Signal only (This Module is not armed, does not issue
a trip command).

In order to take influence on the tripping settings of the overcurrent

protection in case of switching onto a fault, you have to assign the signal
„SOTF.EFFEKTIVE“ onto an Adaptive Parameter Set. Please refer to chapter
Parameter / Adaptive Parameter Sets. Within the Adaptive Parameter Set
you have to modify the tripping characteristic of the overcurrent protection
according to your needs.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 331

Page 332
SOTF
name = SOTF

Please Refer To Diagram: Blockings

2 (Stage is not deactivated and no active blocking signals)

SOTF.
t-enable

Mode.CB POS t
T 0

Mode.I<
SOTF-Protection Module: Switch Onto Fault

SOTF.I<

CLPU.I<
SOTF.
IL1 t-enable
&
IL2 t
IL3 T 0

>1
Mode.CB POS And I<
&
SOTF.enabled
Aux OFF

SOTF.
CLPU.I< t-enable
&
IL1 t
&
IL2 T 0

IL3

SOTF.
Mode.CB manual ON t-enable

Manual ON t
T 0

Mode.Ext SOTF
Ext SOTF

AR.running name.AR Blo

EN MRA4 04/09
SOTF-Protection Module: Switch Onto Fault

Device Planning Parameters of the Switch Onto Fault Module

Parameter Description Options Default Menu path
Mode Mode do not use, use [Device planning]
use

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 333

SOTF-Protection Module: Switch Onto Fault

Global Protection Parameters of the Switch Onto Fault Module

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
Mode Mode CB POS, CB POS [Protection Para
I<, /Global Prot Para
CB POS And I<, /SOTF]
CB manual ON,
Ext SOTF
ExBlo1 External blocking of 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para
the module, if
/Global Prot Para
blocking is activated
(allowed) within a /SOTF]
parameter set and if
the state of the
assigned signal is
true.

ExBlo2 External blocking of 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para

the module, if
blocking is activated /Global Prot Para
(allowed) within a /SOTF]
parameter set and if
the state of the
assigned signal is
true.

Ex rev Interl External blocking of 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para

the module by
/Global Prot Para
external reverse
interlocking, if /SOTF]
blocking is activated
(allowed) within a
parameter set and if
the state of the
assigned signal is
true.

Manual ON The circuit breaker -.-, - [Protection Para

was switched on
CB.Manual ON /Global Prot Para
manually if the state
of the assigned /SOTF]
signal is true.

Only available if:

Mode = CB manual
ON
CB Pos Detect Criterion by which -.-, - [Protection Para
the Circuit Breaker
CB.Pos /Global Prot Para
Switch Position is to
be detected. /SOTF]

Only available if:

Mode = CB POS Or
CB POS And I<

Page 334 EN MRA4 04/09

SOTF-Protection Module: Switch Onto Fault

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

Ext SOTF External Switch Onto -.-, - [Protection Para
Fault
DI Slot X1.DI 1, /Global Prot Para
Only available if: DI Slot X1.DI 2, /SOTF]
Mode = Ext SOTF
DI Slot X1.DI 3,
DI Slot X1.DI 4,
DI Slot X1.DI 5,
DI Slot X1.DI 6,
DI Slot X1.DI 7,
DI Slot X1.DI 8,
DI Slot X6.DI 1,
DI Slot X6.DI 2,
DI Slot X6.DI 3,
DI Slot X6.DI 4,
DI Slot X6.DI 5,
DI Slot X6.DI 6,
DI Slot X6.DI 7,
DI Slot X6.DI 8

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 335

SOTF-Protection Module: Switch Onto Fault

Setting Group Parameters of the Switch Onto Fault Module

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
Function Permanent activation or inactive, inactive [Protection Para
deactivation of
active /<n>
module/stage.
/SOTF]

ExBlo Fc Activate (allow) or inactive, inactive [Protection Para

inactivate (disallow)
active /<n>
blocking of the
module/stage. This /SOTF]
parameter is only effective
if a signal is assigned to
the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the
signal becomes true, those
modules/stages are
blocked that are
parameterized "ExBlo
Fc=active".

Ex rev Interl Fc Activate (allow) or inactive, inactive [Protection Para

inactivate (disallow)
active /<n>
blocking of the
module/stage. This /SOTF]
parameter is only effective
if a signal is assigned to
the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the
signal becomes true, those
modules/stages are
blocked that are
parameterized "Ex rev
Interl Fc = active".

I< The CB is in the OFF 0.01 - 1.00In 0.01In [Protection Para

Position, if the measured
/<n>
current is less than this
parameter. /SOTF]

t-enable While this timer is running, 0.10 - 10.00s 2s [Protection Para

and while the module is
/<n>
not blocked, the Switch
Onto Fault Module is /SOTF]
effective (SOTF is armed).

Page 336 EN MRA4 04/09

SOTF-Protection Module: Switch Onto Fault

Switch Onto Fault Module Input States

Name Description Assignment via
ExBlo1-I Module input state: External [Protection Para
blocking
/Global Prot Para
/SOTF]
ExBlo2-I Module input state: External [Protection Para
blocking
/Global Prot Para
/SOTF]
Ex rev Interl-I Module input state: External reverse [Protection Para
interlocking
/Global Prot Para
/SOTF]
Manual ON-I Module input state: Circuit breaker [Protection Para
was switched on manually
/Global Prot Para
/SOTF]
CB Pos Detect-I Module input state: Criterion by [Protection Para
which the Circuit Breaker Switch
/Global Prot Para
Position is to be detected.
/SOTF]
Ext SOTF-I Module input state: External Switch [Protection Para
Onto Fault Alarm
/Global Prot Para
/SOTF]

Signals of the Switch Onto Fault Module (Output States)

Name Description
active Signal: active
ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
Ex rev Interl Signal: External reverse Interlocking
enabled Signal: Switch Onto Fault enabled. This Signal can be
used to modify Overcurrent Protection Settings.
AR Blo Signal: Blocked by AR
I< Signal: No Load Current.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 337

SOTF-Protection Module: Switch Onto Fault

Commissioning: Switch Onto Fault [ANSI 50HS]

Object to be tested

Testing the module Switch Onto Fault according to the parameterized operating mode:

• I< (No current)

• LS POS (Circuit Breaker Position)
• I< (No current) and CB POS (Position of the Circuit Breaker)
• CB manual ON

Necessary means
• Three-phase current source (If the Enable-Mode depends on current)

• Maybe: ampere meters (If the Enable-Mode depends on current)

• Timer

Test Example for Mode CB manual ON

Mode I<: In order to test the effectiveness: Initially don´t feed any current.
Start the timer and feed with an abrupt change current that is distinct
greater than the I<-threshold to the measuring inputs of the relay.

Mode I< and CB POS: Simultaneous switch on the CB manually and feed
with an abrupt change current that is distinct greater than the I<-threshold.

Mode CB POS: The circuit breaker has to be in the OFF Position. The signal
„SOTF.EFFECTIVE“=0 is untrue. If the Circuit Breaker is switched on the signal
„SOTF.EFFECTIVE“=1 becomes true as long as the timer t-effective is running.

• The Circuit Breaker has to be in the OFF Position. There must be no load current.

• The Status Display of the device shows the signal „SOTF.EFFECTIVE“=1.

Testing

• Switch the Circuit Breaker manually ON and start the timer at the same time.

• After the hold time t-effective is expired the state of the signal has to change to „SOTF.EFFECTIVE“=0.

• Write down the measured time.

Successful test result

The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays, threshold values and fallback ratios correspond
with those values, specified in the adjustment list. Permissible deviations/tolerances can be found under Tech-
nical Data.

Page 338 EN MRA4 04/09

CLPU - Supervision Module Cold Load Pickup

CLPU - Supervision Module Cold Load Pickup

Available stages:
CLPU

This Supervision Module enables protection against faulty tripping of the Overcurrent Protection that might be
alarmed by the increased currents caused by the re-energizing after outages.

During normal operation the thermostatically load (refridgerators, heatings, residental air conditions) is
diversified. After an extended outage all these devices are switched on at the same time.

In addition to that motors evoke inrush currents when they are re-energized.

Both effects might cause an unwanted alarm/trip of the overcurrent protection stages.

If the CPLU-Module detects an Cold Load, the following countermeasures against unwanted tripping are
available.

• Blocking of the Overcurrent Protection

• Increase the tripping thresholds respectively the tripping times by means of Adaptive Parameters.

This Module issues a Signal only (it is not armed).

In order to take influence on the tripping settings of the overcurrent

protection you have to assign the signal „CPLU.EFFEKTIVE“ onto an Adaptive
Parameter Set. Please refer to chapter Parameter / Adaptive Parameter Sets.
Within the Adaptive Parameter Set you have to modify the tripping
characteristic of the overcurrent protection according to your needs.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 339

CLPU - Supervision Module Cold Load Pickup

Example Mode: Circuit Breaker Position

t-Pickup Delay
t-Release Delay
name = CLPU

CLPU.detected

Cold Load
Aux ON
CLPU

1
0
1
0

1
0

Page 340 EN MRA4 04/09

EN MRA4 04/09
CLPU
name = CLPU

Please Refer To Diagram: Blockings

2 (Stage is not deactivated and no active blocking signals)

CLPU.
t-Pickup Delay

t
T 0
>1
Aux OFF
CLPU.
t-Release Delay

CB POS
t
T 0
name.I<
CLPU - Supervision Module Cold Load Pickup

name.detected

CLPU.
t-Pickup Delay
CLPU.I< t
IL1 & T 0 >1
IL2

I<
CLPU.
IL3 t-Release Delay

t >1
Aux OFF T 0 &
name.enabled
CLPU.
CLPU.I< t-Pickup Delay
&
IL1 t
&
IL2 T 0 >1
IL3
CLPU.
t-Release Delay

CB POS And I<

t
T 0
Aux OFF
CLPU.
t-Pickup Delay
CLPU.I<
>1 t
IL1 & T 0 >1
IL2

CB POS Or I<
CLPU.
IL3 t-Release Delay

t
T 0

AR Blo

AR.running name.AR Blo

Page 341
CLPU - Supervision Module Cold Load Pickup

Device planning parameters of the Cold Load Pickup module

Parameter Description Options Default Menu path
Mode Mode do not use, use [Device planning]
use

Global protection parameter of the Cold Load Pickup-module

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
Mode Mode CB POS, CB POS [Protection Para
I<, /Global Prot Para
CB POS Or I<, /CLPU]
CB POS And I<
ExBlo1 External blocking of 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para
the module, if
blocking is activated /Global Prot Para
(allowed) within a /CLPU]
parameter set and if
the state of the
assigned signal is
true.

ExBlo2 External blocking of 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para

the module, if
/Global Prot Para
blocking is activated
(allowed) within a /CLPU]
parameter set and if
the state of the
assigned signal is
true.

Ex rev Interl External blocking of 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para

the module by
/Global Prot Para
external reverse
interlocking, if /CLPU]
blocking is activated
(allowed) within a
parameter set and if
the state of the
assigned signal is
true.

CB Pos Detect Criterion by which -.-, - [Protection Para

the Circuit Breaker
CB.Pos /Global Prot Para
Switch Position is to
be detected. /CLPU]

Only available if:

CLPU.Mode = I<

Page 342 EN MRA4 04/09

CLPU - Supervision Module Cold Load Pickup

Parameter set parameters of the Cold Load Pickup module

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
Function Permanent activation or inactive, inactive [Protection Para
deactivation of module/stage.
active /<n>
/CLPU]
ExBlo Fc Activate (allow) or inactivate inactive, inactive [Protection Para
(disallow) blocking of the
module/stage. This parameter is active /<n>
only effective if a signal is /CLPU]
assigned to the corresponding
global protection parameter. If
the signal becomes true, those
modules/stages are blocked that
are parameterized "ExBlo
Fc=active".

Ex rev Interl Fc Activate (allow) or inactivate inactive, inactive [Protection Para

(disallow) blocking of the
active /<n>
module/stage. This parameter is
only effective if a signal is /CLPU]
assigned to the corresponding
global protection parameter. If
the signal becomes true, those
modules/stages are blocked that
are parameterized "Ex rev Interl
Fc = active".

t-Pickup Delay If the Pickup Time (Delay) has 0.00 - 300.00s 1.00s [Protection Para
run out, a Cold Load Signal will
/<n>
be issued.
/CLPU]

t-Release Delay If the Release Time (Delay) has 0.00 - 300.00s 1.00s [Protection Para
run out, a Warm Load Signal will
/<n>
be issued.
/CLPU]

I< The CB is in the OFF Position, if 0.01 - 1.00In 0.01In [Protection Para
the measured current is less
/<n>
than this parameter.
/CLPU]

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 343

CLPU - Supervision Module Cold Load Pickup

States of the inputs of the Cold Load Pickup module

Name Description Assignment via
ExBlo1-I Module input state: External [Protection Para
blocking
/Global Prot Para
/CLPU]
ExBlo2-I Module input state: External [Protection Para
blocking
/Global Prot Para
/CLPU]
Ex rev Interl-I Module input state: External reverse [Protection Para
interlocking
/Global Prot Para
/CLPU]
CB Pos Detect-I Module input state: Criterion by [Protection Para
which the Circuit Breaker Switch
/Global Prot Para
Position is to be detected.
/CLPU]

Signals of the Cold Load Pickup module (states of the outputs)

Name Description
active Signal: active
ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
Ex rev Interl Signal: External reverse Interlocking
enabled Signal: Cold Load enabled
detected Signal: Cold Load detected
AR Blo Module input state: AR Blo
I< Signal: No Load Current.

Page 344 EN MRA4 04/09

CLPU - Supervision Module Cold Load Pickup

Commissioning of the Cold Load Pickup Module

Object to be tested

Testing the the module Cold Load Pickup according to the parameterized operating mode:

• I< (No current)

• LS POS (Circuit Breaker Position)
• I< (No current) and CB POS (Position of the Circuit Breaker)
• I< (No current) or CB POS (Position of the Circuit Breaker)

Necessary means
• Three-phase current source (If the Enable-Mode depends on current)

• May be: ampere meters (If the Enable-Mode depends on current)

• Timer

Test Example for Mode CB POS (Circuit Breaker Position)

Mode I<: In order to test the tripping delay start the timer and feed with an
abrupt change current that is distinct less than the I<-threshold. Measure
the tripping delay. In order to measure the fallback ratio feed with an abrupt
change a current that is distinct above the I<-threshold.

Mode I< and CB POS: Combine the abrupt change (switching ON and OFF
of the current) with the manual switching ON and OFF of the circuit breaker.

Mode I< or CB POS: Initially carry out the test with an abrupt changing
current that is switched ON and OFF (above and below the I<-threshold).
Measure the tripping times. Finally carry out the test by manually switching
ON and OFF the Circuit Breaker.

• The Circuit Breaker has to be in the OFF Position. There must not be any load current.

• The Status Display of the device shows the signal „CLPU.EFFECTIVE“=1.

• The Status Display of the device shows the signal „CLPU.I<“=1.

Testing the tripping delay and the resetting ratio

• Switch the circuit breaker manually ON and start the timer simultaneously.

• After the the t-Release Delay timer has expired the signal „CPLU.EFFECTIVE“=0 has to become untrue.

• Write down the measured time.

• Switch OFF the Circuit Breaker manually and start the timer simultaneously.

• After the t-Pickup Delay timer has expired the signal „CPLU.EFFECTIVE“=1 has to become true..

• Write down the measured time.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 345

CLPU - Supervision Module Cold Load Pickup

Successful test result

The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays, threshold values and fallback ratios correspond
with those values, specified in the adjustment list. Permissible deviations/tolerances can be found under Tech-
nical Data.

Page 346 EN MRA4 04/09

 IH2

EN MRA4 04/09
IH2
IH2 Module – Inrush

Inrush.block mode

1-ph Blo
3-ph Blo

IH2.3-ph Blo
Please Refer To Diagram: Blockings >1 &
4 Inrush.active

IL1 IH1 >1

IH2
the 2nd harmonic to the 1st harmonic is taken into account.

IH2.Blo L1
IH1 5
&
IH2
Inrush. IH2 / IH1
>1
IH2.Blo L2
IL2 IH1 6
&
IH2
IH1
IH2 >1
IH2.Blo L3
7
&
IH2 Module – Inrush

c
IL3 IH1
IH2
IH1

IH2

IH2.Blo IG
& 8
IGH
IG 1 IGH2
IGH1

IGH
2
The inrush module can prevent false trips caused by switching actions of saturated inductive loads. The ratio of

Page 347
IH2 Module – Inrush

Device Planning Parameters of the Inrush Module

Parameter Description Options Default Menu path
Mode Mode do not use, use [Device planning]
use

Global Protection Parameters of the Inrush module

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
ExBlo1 External blocking of 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para
the module, if
blocking is activated /Global Prot Para
(allowed) within a /I-Prot
parameter set and if
the state of the /IH2]
assigned signal is
true.

ExBlo2 External blocking of 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para

the module, if
/Global Prot Para
blocking is activated
(allowed) within a /I-Prot
parameter set and if
the state of the /IH2]
assigned signal is
true.

Page 348 EN MRA4 04/09

IH2 Module – Inrush

Setting Group Parameters of the Inrush Module

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
Function Permanent activation inactive, inactive [Protection Para
or deactivation of
active /<n>
module/stage.
/I-Prot
/IH2]
ExBlo Fc Activate (allow) or inactive, inactive [Protection Para
inactivate (disallow)
blocking of the active /<n>
module/stage. This /I-Prot
parameter is only
effective if a signal is /IH2]
assigned to the
corresponding global
protection
parameter. If the
signal becomes true,
those
modules/stages are
blocked that are
parameterized
"ExBlo Fc=active".

IH2 / IH1 Maximum 10 - 40% 15% [Protection Para

permissible
/<n>
percentage of the
2nd harmonic of the /I-Prot
1st harmonic.
/IH2]

block mode 1-ph Blo: If an inrush 1-ph Blo, 1-ph Blo [Protection Para
is detected in one
3-ph Blo /<n>
phase, the
corresponding phase /I-Prot
of those modules will
be blocked, where /IH2]
inrush blocking is set
to active./3-ph Blo: If
an inrush is detected
in at least one
phase, all three
phases of those
modules where
inrush blocking is set
to active will be
blocked (cross
blocking).

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 349

IH2 Module – Inrush

Inrush Module Input States

Name Description Assignment via
ExBlo1-I Module input state: External [Protection Para
blocking1
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/IH2]
ExBlo2-I Module input state: External [Protection Para
blocking2
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/IH2]

Inrush Module Signals (Output States)

Name Description
active Signal: active
ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
Blo L1 Signal: Blocked L1
Blo L2 Signal: Blocked L2
Blo L3 Signal: Blocked L3
Blo IG Signal: Blocking of the earth protection module
3-ph Blo Signal: Inrush was detected in at least one phase - trip
command blocked.

Page 350 EN MRA4 04/09

IH2 Module – Inrush

Commissioning: Inrush

Dependent on the parameterized inrush-blocking-mode (»1-ph Blo or 3-ph

Blo«), the test procedure is different.

For mode »1-ph-Blo« the test has to be carried out first for each individual
phase and then for all three phases together.

For mode »3-ph-Blo« the test is a three-phase one.

Object to be tested
Test of inrush blocking.

Necessary means
• three-phase current source with adjustable frequency
• three-phase current source (for the first harmonic)

Procedure (dependent on the parameterized blocking mode)

• Feed the current to the secondary side with nominal frequency.

• Feed abruptly current to the secondary side with double nominal frequency. The amplitude must exceed
the preset ratio/threshold »IH2/IN«.
• Ascertain that the signal »INRUSH ALARM« is generated now.

Successful test results

The signal »INRUSH ALARM« is generated and the event recorder indicates the blocking of the current protection
stage.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 351

V-Protection Module – Voltage Protection [ANSI 27/59]

V-Protection Module – Voltage Protection [ANSI 27/59]

Available stages:
V[1] ,V[2] ,V[3] ,V[4]

If the VT measurement location is not at the bus bar side but at the output
side, the following has to be taken into account:

When disconnecting the line is it has to be ensured that by an »External

Blocking« undervoltage tripping of the U<-elements cannot happen. This is
realized through detecting of the CB position (via digital inputs).

When the aux. voltage is switched on and the measuring voltage has not
yet been applied, undervoltage tripping has to be prevented by an
»External Blocking«

In case of an fuse failure, it is important to block the »U<-stages« so that an

undesired operation can be prevented.

All 4 voltage elements are identically structured and can optionally be

projected as over-, undervoltage or time dependent (polygon) element.

If phase voltages are applied to the measuring inputs of the device and field
parameter »VT con« is set to »Phase-to-neutral«, the messages issued by
the voltage protection module in case of actuation or trip should be
interpreted as follows:

»V[1].ALARM L1« or »V[1].TRIP L1« => alarm or trip caused by phase voltage
»VL1«.
»V[1].ALARM L2« or »V[1].TRIP L2« => alarm or trip caused by phase voltage
»VL2«.
»V[1].ALARM L3« or »V[1].TRIP L3« => alarm or trip caused by phase voltage
»VL3«.

If, however, line-to-line voltages are applied to the measuring inputs and
field parameter »VT con« is set to »Phase to Phase«, then the messages
should be interpreted as follows:

»V[1].ALARM L1« or »V[1].TRIP L1« => alarm or trip caused by line-to-line

voltage »V12«.
»V[1].ALARM L2« or »V[1].TRIP L2« => alarm or trip caused by line-to-line
voltage »V23«.
»V[1].ALARM L3« or »V[1].TRIP L3« => alarm or trip caused by line-to-line
voltage »V31«

For each of the voltage protection stages it can be defined if it should be actuated in case over- or undervoltage
was detected in all three phases, or if it already should be alarmed when the over- or undervoltage was detected
in only one of the phases.

Page 352 EN MRA4 04/09

EN MRA4 04/09
V[1]...[n]
name = V[1]...[n]

name.Alarm L1
Please Refer To Diagram: Blockings
28
2 (Stage is not deactivated and no active blocking signals) name.Alarm L2
29
name.VTS Block name.Alarm L3
30
inactive
name.Alarm
active 14
V-Protection Module – Voltage Protection [ANSI 27/59]

Please Refer To Diagram: VTS

name.Trip L1
12 VTS.Alarm &
& 20
Device planning
name.Mode

V> name.Trip L2
&
V<
V(t)< name.Mode 21
& 1-ph Trip
3-ph Trip
name.Trip L3
&
name.V name.t
(V<|V>) 22
&
VL1 V<
& &
V>
VL2 t 0
>1
name.Trip
VL3
&
& >1 V(t)<

t1 t4 t...n
name.TripCmd
t2 t3
&
Please Refer To Diagram: Trip blockings 15
3 (Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. )

Page 353
V-Protection Module – Voltage Protection [ANSI 27/59]

Device Planning Parameters of the Voltage Protection Module

Parameter Description Options Default Menu path
Mode Mode do not use, V[1]: V> [Device planning]
V>, V[2]: V<
V<, V[3]: V>
V(t)< V[4]: V>

Global Protection Parameters of the Voltage Protection Module

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
ExBlo1 External blocking of 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para
the module, if
blocking is activated /Global Prot Para
(allowed) within a /V-Prot
parameter set and if
the state of the /V[1]]
assigned signal is
true.

ExBlo2 External blocking of 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para

the module, if
/Global Prot Para
blocking is activated
(allowed) within a /V-Prot
parameter set and if
the state of the /V[1]]
assigned signal is
true.

ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para

the Trip Command
of the module/the /Global Prot Para
stage, if blocking is /V-Prot
activated (allowed)
within a parameter /V[1]]
set and if the state of
the assigned signal
is true.

Page 354 EN MRA4 04/09

V-Protection Module – Voltage Protection [ANSI 27/59]

Setting Group Parameters of the Voltage Protection Module

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
Function Permanent activation or inactive, V[1]: active [Protection Para
deactivation of
active V[2]: active /<n>
module/stage.
V[3]: inactive /V-Prot
V[4]: inactive /V[1]]
ExBlo Fc Activate (allow) or inactive, inactive [Protection Para
inactivate (disallow)
blocking of the active /<n>
module/stage. This /V-Prot
parameter is only effective
if a signal is assigned to /V[1]]
the corresponding global
protection parameter. If
the signal becomes true,
those modules/stages are
blocked that are
parameterized "ExBlo
Fc=active".

Blo TripCmd Permanent blocking of the inactive, inactive [Protection Para

Trip Command of the
active /<n>
module/stage.
/V-Prot
/V[1]]
ExBlo TripCmd Fc Activate (allow) or inactive, inactive [Protection Para
inactivate (disallow)
active /<n>
blocking of the
module/stage. This /V-Prot
parameter is only effective
if a signal is assigned to /V[1]]
the corresponding global
protection parameter. If
the signal becomes true,
those modules/stages are
blocked that are
parameterized "ExBlo
TripCmd Fc=active".

Meas Mode Measuring/Supervision Phase to Earth, Phase to Earth [Protection Para

Mode: Determines if the
Phase to Phase /<n>
phase-to-phase or phase-
to-earth voltages are to be /V-Prot
supervisioned
/V[1]]

Alarm Mode Alarm criterion for the 1-ph Trip, 1-ph Trip [Protection Para
voltage protection stage.
3-ph Trip /<n>
/V-Prot
/V[1]]

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 355

V-Protection Module – Voltage Protection [ANSI 27/59]

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

V> Pick-up value 0.01 - 2.00Vn V[1]: 1.1Vn [Protection Para
V[2]: 1.20Vn /<n>
Only available if: Device
planning: V.Mode = V> V[3]: 1.20Vn /V-Prot
V[4]: 1.20Vn /V[1]]
V< Pick-up value 0.01 - 2.00Vn V[1]: 0.80Vn [Protection Para
V[2]: 0.9Vn /<n>
Only available if: Device
planning: V.Mode = V< V[3]: 0.80Vn /V-Prot
Only available if: Device
planning: V.Mode = V(t)< V[4]: 0.80Vn /V[1]]

VTS Blo Blocking if a voltage inactive, inactive [Protection Para

transformer failure is
detected. active /<n>
/V-Prot
Only available if: Device
planning: V.Mode = V(t)< /V[1]]

t Tripping delay 0.00 - 300.00s V[1]: 1s [Protection Para

V[2]: 1s /<n>
Only available if: Device
planning: V.Mode = V[3]: 0.00s /V-Prot
V>OrV<
V[4]: 0.00s /V[1]]
Vstart< If the voltage falls below 0.01 - 2.00Vn 0.90Vn [Protection Para
this Voltage, the Time
Depending Voltage /<n>
Protection will be started. /V-Prot

Only available if: Device /V[1]]

planning: V.Mode =
Vstart< Only available if:
Device planning: V.Mode
= Vstart<
V(t)<1 Pick-up value 0.01 - 2.00Vn 0.01Vn [Protection Para
/<n>
Only available if: Device
planning: V.Mode = V(t)< /V-Prot
/V[1]]
t1 Tripping delay 0.00 - 10.00s 0.00s [Protection Para
/<n>
Only available if: Device
planning: V.Mode = V(t)< /V-Prot
/V[1]]
V(t)<2 Pick-up value 0.01 - 2.00Vn 0.01Vn [Protection Para
/<n>
Only available if: Device
planning: V.Mode = V(t)< /V-Prot
/V[1]]
t2 Tripping delay 0.00 - 10.00s 0.15s [Protection Para
/<n>
Only available if: Device
planning: V.Mode = V(t)< /V-Prot
/V[1]]

Page 356 EN MRA4 04/09

V-Protection Module – Voltage Protection [ANSI 27/59]

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

V(t)<3 Pick-up value 0.01 - 2.00Vn V[1]: 0.70Vn [Protection Para
V[2]: 0.70Vn /<n>
Only available if: Device
planning: V.Mode = V(t)< V[3]: 0.70Vn /V-Prot
V[4]: 0.30Vn /V[1]]
t3 Tripping delay 0.00 - 10.00s 0.15s [Protection Para
/<n>
Only available if: Device
planning: V.Mode = V(t)< /V-Prot
/V[1]]
V(t)<4 Pick-up value 0.01 - 2.00Vn V[1]: 0.70Vn [Protection Para
V[2]: 0.70Vn /<n>
Only available if: Device
planning: V.Mode = V(t)< V[3]: 0.70Vn /V-Prot
V[4]: 0.30Vn /V[1]]
t4 Tripping delay 0.00 - 10.00s V[1]: 0.70s [Protection Para
V[2]: 0.70s /<n>
Only available if: Device
planning: V.Mode = V(t)< V[3]: 0.70s /V-Prot
V[4]: 0.6s /V[1]]
V(t)<5 Pick-up value 0.01 - 2.00Vn 0.90Vn [Protection Para

Only available if: Device /<n>

planning: V.Mode = V(t)< /V-Prot
/V[1]]
t5 Tripping delay 0.00 - 10.00s 1.50s [Protection Para
/<n>
Only available if: Device
planning: V.Mode = V(t)< /V-Prot
/V[1]]
V(t)<6 Pick-up value 0.01 - 2.00Vn 0.90Vn [Protection Para

Only available if: Device /<n>

planning: V.Mode = V(t)< /V-Prot
/V[1]]
t6 Tripping delay 0.00 - 10.00s 3.00s [Protection Para
/<n>
Only available if: Device
planning: V.Mode = V(t)< /V-Prot
/V[1]]
V(t)<7 Pick-up value 0.01 - 2.00Vn 0.90Vn [Protection Para
/<n>
Only available if: Device
planning: V.Mode = V(t)< /V-Prot
/V[1]]
t7 Tripping delay 0.00 - 10.00s 3.00s [Protection Para
/<n>
Only available if: Device
planning: V.Mode = V(t)< /V-Prot
/V[1]]

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 357

V-Protection Module – Voltage Protection [ANSI 27/59]

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

V(t)<8 Pick-up value 0.01 - 2.00Vn 0.90Vn [Protection Para
/<n>
Only available if: Device
planning: V.Mode = V(t)< /V-Prot
/V[1]]
t8 Tripping delay 0.00 - 10.00s 3.00s [Protection Para
/<n>
Only available if: Device
planning: V.Mode = V(t)< /V-Prot
/V[1]]
V(t)<9 Pick-up value 0.01 - 2.00Vn 0.90Vn [Protection Para
/<n>
Only available if: Device
planning: V.Mode = V(t)< /V-Prot
/V[1]]
t9 Tripping delay 0.00 - 10.00s 3.00s [Protection Para
/<n>
Only available if: Device
planning: V.Mode = V(t)< /V-Prot
/V[1]]
V(t)<10 Pick-up value 0.01 - 2.00Vn 0.90Vn [Protection Para

Only available if: Device /<n>

planning: V.Mode = V(t)< /V-Prot
/V[1]]
t10 Tripping delay 0.00 - 10.00s 3.00s [Protection Para
/<n>
Only available if: Device
planning: V.Mode = V(t)< /V-Prot
/V[1]]

Page 358 EN MRA4 04/09

V-Protection Module – Voltage Protection [ANSI 27/59]

Voltage Protection Module Input States

Name Description Assignment via
ExBlo1-I Module input state: External [Protection Para
blocking1
/Global Prot Para
/V-Prot
/V[1]]
ExBlo2-I Module input state: External [Protection Para
blocking2
/Global Prot Para
/V-Prot
/V[1]]
ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External [Protection Para
Blocking of the Trip Command
/Global Prot Para
/V-Prot
/V[1]]

Voltage Protection Module Signals (Output States)

Name Description
active Signal: active
ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
Alarm L1 Signal: Alarm L1
Alarm L2 Signal: Alarm L2
Alarm L3 Signal: Alarm L3
Alarm Signal: Alarm voltage stage
Trip L1 Signal: General Trip L1
Trip L2 Signal: General Trip L2
Trip L3 Signal: General Trip L3
Trip Signal: Trip
TripCmd Signal: Trip Command

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 359

V-Protection Module – Voltage Protection [ANSI 27/59]

Commissioning: Overvoltage Protection [ANSI 59]

Object to be tested
Test of the overvoltage protection elements, 3 x single-phase and 1 x three-phase (for each element)

Through testing the overvoltage protection stages, it can also be ensured

that the wiring from the switchboard input terminals is correct. Wiring
errors at the voltage measuring inputs might result in:
• False tripping of the directional current protection
Example: Device suddenly trips in reverse direction but it
does not trip in forward direction.
• Wrong or no power factor indication
• Errors with regard to power directions etc.

Necessary means
• 3-phase AC voltage source
• Timer for measuring of the tripping time
• Voltmeter

Procedure (3 x single-phase, 1 x three-phase, for each element)

Testing the threshold values

For testing the threshold values and fallback values, the test voltage has to be increased until the relay is
activated. When comparing the displayed values with those of the voltmeter, the deviation must be within the
permissible tolerances.

Testing the trip delay

For testing the trip delay, a timer is to be connected to the contact of the associated trip relay.
The timer is started when the limiting value of the tripping voltage is exceeded and it is stopped when the relay
trips.

Testing the fallback ratio

Reduce the measuring quantity to less than 97% of the trip value. The relay must only fall back at 97% of the trip
value at the earliest.

Successful test result

The measured threshold values, trip delays and fallback ratios comply with those specified in the adjustment list.
Permissible deviations/tolerances can be taken from the Technical Data.

Page 360 EN MRA4 04/09

V-Protection Module – Voltage Protection [ANSI 27/59]

Commissioning: Undervoltage Protection [ANSI 27]

This test can be carried out similar to the test for overvoltage protection (by using the related undervoltage
values).

Please consider the following deviations:

• For testing the threshold values the test voltage has to be decreased until the relay is activated.

• For detection of the fallback value, the measuring quantity has to be increased so to achieve more than
103% of the trip value. At 103% of the trip value the relay is to fall back at the earliest.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 361

VE-Protection Module – Residual Voltage [ANSI 59N]

VE-Protection Module – Residual Voltage [ANSI 59N]

Available stages:
VE[1] ,VE[2]

Both elements of the residual voltage supervision VE[1] and VE[2] are
identically structured.

The residual voltage can be measured in via the auxiliary winding da-dn (e-n) (open delta).

The residual voltage can be calculated only if the phase voltages (star connection) are connected to the
measuring inputs of the device.

Page 362 EN MRA4 04/09

EN MRA4 04/09
VE[1]...[n]

name = VE[1]...[n]
VE-Protection Module – Residual Voltage [ANSI 59N]

Please Refer To Diagram: Blockings name.Alarm

2 (Stage is not deactivated and no active blocking signals)
14 31

name .t

name .VE> &

t 0 name.Trip
VE

&
name.TripCmd
Please Refer To Diagram: Trip blockings
15 23
3 (Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. )

Page 363
VE-Protection Module – Residual Voltage [ANSI 59N]

Device Planning Parameters of the Residual Voltage Supervision Module

Parameter Description Options Default Menu path
Mode Mode do not use, use [Device planning]
use

Global Protection Parameters of the Residual Voltage Supervision Module

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
ExBlo1 External blocking of 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para
the module, if
blocking is activated /Global Prot Para
(allowed) within a /V-Prot
parameter set and if
the state of the /VE[1]]
assigned signal is
true.

ExBlo2 External blocking of 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para

the module, if
/Global Prot Para
blocking is activated
(allowed) within a /V-Prot
parameter set and if
the state of the /VE[1]]
assigned signal is
true.

ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para

the Trip Command
of the module/the /Global Prot Para
stage, if blocking is /V-Prot
activated (allowed)
within a parameter /VE[1]]
set and if the state of
the assigned signal
is true.

Page 364 EN MRA4 04/09

VE-Protection Module – Residual Voltage [ANSI 59N]

Setting Group Parameters of the Residual Voltage Supervision Module.

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
Function Permanent activation or inactive, inactive [Protection Para
deactivation of module/stage.
active /<n>
/V-Prot
/VE[1]]
ExBlo Fc Activate (allow) or inactivate inactive, inactive [Protection Para
(disallow) blocking of the
module/stage. This active /<n>
parameter is only effective if /V-Prot
a signal is assigned to the
corresponding global /VE[1]]
protection parameter. If the
signal becomes true, those
modules/stages are blocked
that are parameterized
"ExBlo Fc=active".

Blo TripCmd Permanent blocking of the inactive, inactive [Protection Para

Trip Command of the
active /<n>
module/stage.
/V-Prot
/VE[1]]
ExBlo TripCmd Fc Activate (allow) or inactivate inactive, inactive [Protection Para
(disallow) blocking of the
active /<n>
module/stage. This
parameter is only effective if /V-Prot
a signal is assigned to the
corresponding global /VE[1]]
protection parameter. If the
signal becomes true, those
modules/stages are blocked
that are parameterized
"ExBlo TripCmd Fc=active".

VE> If the pick-up value is 0.01 - 2.00Vn 1Vn [Protection Para

exceeded, the module/stage
/<n>
will be started.
/V-Prot
/VE[1]]
t Tripping delay 0.00 - 300.00s 0.00s [Protection Para
/<n>
/V-Prot
/VE[1]]

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 365

VE-Protection Module – Residual Voltage [ANSI 59N]

Residual Voltage Supervision Module Input States

Name Description Assignment via
ExBlo1-I Module input state: External [Protection Para
blocking1
/Global Prot Para
/V-Prot
/VE[1]]
ExBlo2-I Module input state: External [Protection Para
blocking2
/Global Prot Para
/V-Prot
/VE[1]]
ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External [Protection Para
Blocking of the Trip Command
/Global Prot Para
/V-Prot
/VE[1]]

Residual Voltage Supervision Module Signals (Output States)

Name Description
active Signal: active
ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
Alarm Signal: Alarm Residual Voltage Supervision-stage
Trip Signal: Trip
TripCmd Signal: Trip Command

Page 366 EN MRA4 04/09

VE-Protection Module – Residual Voltage [ANSI 59N]

Commissioning: Residual Voltage Protection - Measured [ANSI 59N]

Object to be tested
Residual voltage protection stages.

Necessary components
• 1-phase AC voltage source
• Timer for measuring of the tripping time
• Voltmeter

Procedure (for each element)

Testing the threshold values

For testing the threshold and fallback values, the test voltage at the measuring input for the residual voltage has
to be increased until the relay is activated. When comparing the displayed values with those of the voltmeter, the
deviation must be within the permissible tolerances.

Testing the trip delay

For testing the trip delay a timer is to be connected to the contact of the associated trip relay.
The timer is started when the limiting value of the tripping voltage is exceeded and it is stopped when the relay
trips.

Testing the fallback ratio

Reduce the measuring quantity to less than 97% of the trip value. The relay must only fall back at 97% of the trip
value at the latest.

Successful test result

The measured threshold values, trip delays and fallback ratios comply with those specified in the adjustment list.
Permissible deviations/tolerances can be taken from the Technical Data.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 367

VE-Protection Module – Residual Voltage [ANSI 59N]

Commissioning: Residual Voltage Protection - Calculated [ANSI 59N]

Object to be tested
Test of the residual voltage protection elements

Necessary means
• 3-phase voltage source

Calculation of the residual voltage is only possible if phase voltages (star)

were applied to the voltage measuring inputs and if »VT con=phase-to-
neutral« and »EVT con=calculated« were set in the field parameters.

Procedure
• Feed a three-phase, symmetrical voltage system (Vn) into the voltage measuring inputs of the relay.
• Set the limiting value of VE[x] to 90% Un.
• Disconnect the phase voltage at two measuring inputs (symmetrical feeding at the secondary side has to
be maintained).
• Now the »VE« measuring value has to be about 100% of the value Vn.
• Ascertain that the signal »VE.ALARM« or »VE.TRIP« is generated now.

Successful test result

The signal »VE.ALARM« or »VE.TRIP« is generated.

Page 368 EN MRA4 04/09

V 012 - Protection Module Asymmetry

V 012 - Protection Module Asymmetry

Available stages:
V 012 [1] ,V 012 [2] ,V 012 [3] ,V 012 [4] ,V 012 [5] ,V 012 [6]

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 369

Page 370
V 012[1]...[n]
name = V 012[1]...[n]

Device planning
name.Mode

V1>
V1<
V2>
V 012 - Protection Module Asymmetry

name.Alarm

Please Refer To Diagram: Blockings

2 (Stage is not deactivated and no active blocking signals)

PPS V1
filter name.t
name.V &
t 0 name.Trip
VL1 14
VL2

VL3
& name.TripCmd
NPS V2
filter 15

Please Refer To Diagram: Trip blockings

3 (Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. )

EN MRA4 04/09
V 012 - Protection Module Asymmetry

Device planning parameters of the asymmetry module

Parameter Description Options Default Menu path
Mode Symmetrical do not use, V2> [Device planning]
Components:
Supervision of the V1>,
Positve Phase V1<,
Sequence or
Negative Phase V2>
Sequence

Global protection parameter of the asymmetry-module

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
ExBlo1 External blocking of 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para
the module, if
blocking is activated /Global Prot Para
(allowed) within a /V-Prot
parameter set and if
the state of the /V 012 [1]]
assigned signal is
true.1

ExBlo2 External blocking of 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para

the module, if
/Global Prot Para
blocking is activated
(allowed) within a /V-Prot
parameter set and if
the state of the /V 012 [1]]
assigned signal is
true.2

ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para

the Trip Command
of the module/the /Global Prot Para
stage, if blocking is /V-Prot
activated (allowed)
within a parameter /V 012 [1]]
set and if the state of
the assigned signal
is true.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 371

V 012 - Protection Module Asymmetry

Parameter set parameters of the asymmetry module

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
Function Permanent activation inactive, inactive [Protection Para
or deactivation of
active /<n>
module/stage.
/V-Prot
/V 012 [1]]
ExBlo Fc Activate (allow) or inactive, inactive [Protection Para
inactivate (disallow)
active /<n>
blocking of the
module/stage. This /V-Prot
parameter is only
effective if a signal is /V 012 [1]]
assigned to the
corresponding global
protection
parameter. If the
signal becomes true,
those
modules/stages are
blocked that are
parameterized
"ExBlo Fc=active".

Blo TripCmd Permanent blocking inactive, inactive [Protection Para

of the Trip
Command of the active /<n>
module/stage. /V-Prot
/V 012 [1]]

ExBlo TripCmd Fc Activate (allow) or inactive, inactive [Protection Para

inactivate (disallow)
active /<n>
blocking of the
module/stage. This /V-Prot
parameter is only
effective if a signal is /V 012 [1]]
assigned to the
corresponding global
protection
parameter. If the
signal becomes true,
those
modules/stages are
blocked that are
parameterized
"ExBlo TripCmd
Fc=active".

V1> Positive Phase 0.01 - 2.00Vn 1.00Vn [Protection Para

Sequence
/<n>
Overvoltage
/V-Prot
Only available if:
Device planning: V /V 012 [1]]
012.Mode = V1>

Page 372 EN MRA4 04/09

V 012 - Protection Module Asymmetry

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

V1< Positive Phase 0.01 - 2.00Vn 1.00Vn [Protection Para
Sequence
Undervoltage /<n>
/V-Prot
Only available if:
Device planning: V /V 012 [1]]
012.Mode = V1<
V2> Negative Phase 0.01 - 2.00Vn 1.00Vn [Protection Para
Sequence
Overvoltage /<n>
/V-Prot
Only available if:
Device planning: V /V 012 [1]]
012.Mode = V2>
t Tripping delay 0.00 - 300.00s 0.00s [Protection Para
/<n>
/V-Prot
/V 012 [1]]
VTS Blo Fc Enabling/Disbling the inactive, inactive [Protection Para
blocking by the
active /<n>
Voltage Transformer
Supervision module. /V-Prot
/V 012 [1]]

States of the inputs of the asymmetry module

Name Description Assignment via
ExBlo1-I Module input state: External [Protection Para
blocking1
/Global Prot Para
/V-Prot
/V 012 [1]]
ExBlo2-I Module input state: External [Protection Para
blocking2
/Global Prot Para
/V-Prot
/V 012 [1]]
ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External [Protection Para
Blocking of the Trip Command
/Global Prot Para
/V-Prot
/V 012 [1]]

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 373

V 012 - Protection Module Asymmetry

Signals of the asymmetry module (states of the outputs)

Name Description
active Signal: active
ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
Alarm Signal: Alarm voltage asymmetry
Trip Signal: Trip
TripCmd Signal: Trip Command

Page 374 EN MRA4 04/09

V 012 - Protection Module Asymmetry

Commissioning: Asymmetry Protection

Object to be tested
Test of the asymmetry protection elements.

Necessary means
• 3-phase AC voltage source
• Timer for measuring of the tripping time
• Voltmeter

Testing the tripping values (Example)

Set the pickup value for the voltage in the negative phase sequence to 0.5 Vn. Set the tripping delay to 1 s.

In order to generate a negative phase sequence voltage interchange the wiring of two phases (VL2 and VL3).

Testing the trip delay

Start the timer and abrupt change (switch) to 1.5 times of the set tripping value. Measure the trip delay.

Successful test result

The measured threshold values and trip delays comply with those specified in the adjustment list. Permissible
deviations/tolerances can be taken from the Technical Data.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 375

PQS – Power Protection Module [ANSI 32, 37]

PQS – Power Protection Module [ANSI 32, 37]

Available stages:
PQS [1] ,PQS [2] ,PQS [3] ,PQS [4] ,PQS [5] ,PQS [6]

Page 376 EN MRA4 04/09

EN MRA4 04/09
PQS[1]...[n]
name = PQS[1]...[n]

Please Refer To Diagram: Blockings

2 (Stage is not deactivated and no active blocking signals)

Device planning name.Alarm

PQS.Mode 14
P>
P<
Pr>
Q>
PQS – Power Protection Module [ANSI 32, 37]

Q<
Qr> name.t
&
S> t 0 name.Trip
S<

P name.Mode
name.TripCmd
&
Q P>, P<, Pr>, Q>, Q<, Qr>, S>, S<
15
S

Please Refer To Diagram: Trip blockings

3 (Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. )

Page 377
PQS – Power Protection Module [ANSI 32, 37]

P< P>

Q>

Q<

S>

S<

Page 378 EN MRA4 04/09

PQS – Power Protection Module [ANSI 32, 37]

Pr>

P
Qr>

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 379

PQS – Power Protection Module [ANSI 32, 37]

Device planning parameters of the Power Protection module

Parameter Description Options Default Menu path
Mode Mode do not use, Pr> [Device planning]
P>,
P<,
Pr>,
Q>,
Q<,
Qr>,
S>,
S<

Global protection parameter of the Power Protection-module

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
ExBlo1 External blocking of 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para
the module, if
blocking is activated /Global Prot Para
(allowed) within a /P-Prot
parameter set and if
the state of the /PQS [1]]
assigned signal is
true.

ExBlo2 External blocking of 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para

the module, if
/Global Prot Para
blocking is activated
(allowed) within a /P-Prot
parameter set and if
the state of the /PQS [1]]
assigned signal is
true.

ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para

the Trip Command
/Global Prot Para
of the module/the
stage, if blocking is /P-Prot
activated (allowed)
within a parameter /PQS [1]]
set and if the state of
the assigned signal
is true.

Page 380 EN MRA4 04/09

PQS – Power Protection Module [ANSI 32, 37]

Parameter set parameters of the Power Protection module

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
Function Permanent activation or inactive, PQS [1]: active [Protection Para
deactivation of
active PQS [2]: inactive /<n>
module/stage.
PQS [3]: inactive /P-Prot
PQS [4]: inactive /PQS [1]]
PQS [5]: inactive
PQS [6]: inactive
ExBlo Fc Activate (allow) or inactive, inactive [Protection Para
inactivate (disallow)
active /<n>
blocking of the
module/stage. This /P-Prot
parameter is only effective
if a signal is assigned to /PQS [1]]
the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the
signal becomes true, those
modules/stages are
blocked that are
parameterized "ExBlo
Fc=active".

Blo TripCmd Permanent blocking of the inactive, inactive [Protection Para

Trip Command of the
active /<n>
module/stage.
/P-Prot
/PQS [1]]
ExBlo TripCmd Fc Activate (allow) or inactive, inactive [Protection Para
inactivate (disallow)
blocking of the active /<n>
module/stage. This /P-Prot
parameter is only effective
if a signal is assigned to /PQS [1]]
the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the
signal becomes true, those
modules/stages are
blocked that are
parameterized "ExBlo
TripCmd Fc=active".

P> Over(load) Active Power 0.02 - 2.00Sn 1.20Sn [Protection Para

Pickup Value. Can be used
/<n>
for monitoring the
maximum allowed forward /P-Prot
power limits of
transformers or overhead /PQS [1]]
lines.

Only available if: Device

planning: PQS.Mode = P>

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 381

PQS – Power Protection Module [ANSI 32, 37]

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

P< Under(load) Active Power 0.02 - 2.00Sn 0.80Sn [Protection Para
Pickup Value (e.g. caused
by idling motors). /<n>
/P-Prot
Only available if: Device
planning: PQS.Mode = P< /PQS [1]]

Pr> Overload Reverse Active 0.003 - 1.000Sn 0.020Sn [Protection Para

Power Pickup Value.
/<n>
Protection against reverse
feeding into the power /P-Prot
supply network.
/PQS [1]]
Only available if: Device
planning: PQS.Mode =
Pr>
Q> Over(load) Reactive Power 0.02 - 2.00Sn 1.20Sn [Protection Para
Pickup Value. Monitoring
/<n>
the maximum allowed
reactive power of the /P-Prot
electrical equipment like
transformers or overhead /PQS [1]]
lines). If the maximum
value is exceeded a
condensator bank could be
switched off.

Only available if: Device

planning: PQS.Mode = Q>
Q< Under(load) Reactive 0.02 - 2.00Sn 0.80Sn [Protection Para
Power Pickup Value.
/<n>
Monitoring the minimum
value of the reactive power. /P-Prot
If it falls below the set value
a condensator bank could /PQS [1]]
be switched on.

Only available if: Device

planning: PQS.Mode = Q<
Qr> Overload Reverse Reactive 0.003 - 1.000Sn 0.020Sn [Protection Para
Power Pickup Value
/<n>
Only available if: Device /P-Prot
planning: PQS.Mode =
Qr> /PQS [1]]

S> Over(load) Apparent Power 0.02 - 2.00Sn 1.20Sn [Protection Para

Pickup Value
/<n>
Only available if: Device /P-Prot
planning: PQS.Mode = S>
/PQS [1]]
S< Under(load) Apparent 0.02 - 2.00Sn 0.80Sn [Protection Para
Power Pickup Value
/<n>
Only available if: Device /P-Prot
planning: PQS.Mode = S<
/PQS [1]]

Page 382 EN MRA4 04/09

PQS – Power Protection Module [ANSI 32, 37]

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

t Tripping delay 0.00 - 300.00s 0.00s [Protection Para
/<n>
/P-Prot
/PQS [1]]

States of the inputs of the Power Protection module

Name Description Assignment via
ExBlo1-I Module input state: External [Protection Para
blocking
/Global Prot Para
/P-Prot
/PQS [1]]
ExBlo2-I Module input state: External [Protection Para
blocking
/Global Prot Para
/P-Prot
/PQS [1]]
ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External [Protection Para
Blocking of the Trip Command
/Global Prot Para
/P-Prot
/PQS [1]]

Signals of the Power Protection module (states of the outputs)

Name Description
active Signal: active
ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
Alarm Signal: Alarm Power Protection
Trip Signal: Trip Power Protection
TripCmd Signal: Trip Command

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 383

PQS – Power Protection Module [ANSI 32, 37]

Commissioning Examples for the Power Protection Module

Object to be tested

• Testing the projected Power Protection Modules.

• P>
• P<
• Pr
• Q>
• Q<
• Qr
• S>
• S<

Necessary means
• 3-phase AC voltage source
• 3-phase AC current source
• Timer

Procedure – Testing the wiring

• Feed rated voltage and rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay.

• Adjust the current pointers 30° lagging to the voltage pointers.

• The following measuring values have to be shown:

P=0.86 Pn
Q=0.5 Qn
S=1 Sn

If the measured values are shown with a negative (algebraic) sign check the
wiring.

The examples shown within this chapter have to be carried out with the
tripping values and tripping delays that apply to your switchboard.

If you are testing „greater than thresholds“ (e.g. P>) start by 80% of the
tripping value and increase the object to be tested until the relay picks up.

In case that you are testing „less than thresholds“ (e.g. P<) start by 120% of
the tripping value and reduce the object to be tested until the relay picks
up.

If you are testing tripping delays of „greater than“ modules (e.g. P>) start a
timer simultaneously with an abrupt change of the object to be tested from
80% of the tripping value to 120% of the tripping value.

If you are testing tripping delays of „less than“ modules (e.g. P<) start a
timer simultaneously with an abrupt change of the object to be tested from
120% of the tripping value to 80% of the tripping value.

Page 384 EN MRA4 04/09

PQS – Power Protection Module [ANSI 32, 37]

P>
Testing the threshold values (Example, Threshold 1.1 Pn)

• Feed rated voltage and 0.9 times rated current in phase to the measuring
inputs of the relay (PF=1).

• The measured values for the active power „P“ must show a positive
algebraic sign.

• Set the tripping threshold (e.g. 1.1 Pn).

• In order to test the tripping thresholds feed 0.9 times rated current to the
measuring inputs of the relay. Increase the current slowly until the relay
picks up. Ensure that the angle between current and voltage remains
constant. Compare the tripping value to the parameterized.

Testing the tripping delay (Example, Threshold 1.1 Pn)

• Feed rated voltage and rated current in phase to the measuring inputs of
the relay (PF=1).

• The measured values for the active power „P“ must show a positive
algebraic sign.

• Set the tripping threshold (e.g. 1.1 Pn).

• In order to test the tripping delay feed 0.9 times rated current to the
measuring inputs of the relay. Increase the current with an abrupt change
to 1.2 In. Ensure that the angle between current and voltage remains
constant. Measure the tripping delay at the output of the relay.

Successful test result

The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays, threshold values
and fallback ratios correspond with those values, specified in the adjustment list.
Permissible deviations/tolerances can be found under Technical Data.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 385

PQS – Power Protection Module [ANSI 32, 37]

Q>
Testing the threshold values (Example, Threshold 1,1 Qn)

• Feed rated voltage and 0.9 times rated current (90° phase shift) to the
measuring inputs of the relay (PF=0).

• The measured values for the active power „Q“ must show a positive
algebraic sign.

• Set the tripping threshold (e.g. 1.1 Qn).

• In order to test the tripping thresholds feed 0.9 times rated current to the
measuring inputs of the relay. Increase the current slowly until the relay
picks up. Ensure that the angle between current and voltage remains
constant. Compare the tripping value to the parameterized.

Testing the tripping delay (Example, Threshold 1.1 Qn)

• Feed rated voltage and rated current (90° phase shift) to the measuring
inputs of the relay (PF=0).

• The measured values for the active power „Q“ must show a positive
algebraic sign.

• Set the tripping threshold (e.g. 1.1 Qn).

• In order to test the tripping delay feed 0.9 times rated current to the
measuring inputs of the relay. Increase the current with an abrupt change
to 1.2 In. Ensure that the angle between current and voltage remains
constant. Measure the tripping delay at the output of the relay.

Successful test result

The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays, threshold values
and fallback ratios correspond with those values, specified in the adjustment list.
Permissible deviations/tolerances can be found under Technical Data.

Page 386 EN MRA4 04/09

PQS – Power Protection Module [ANSI 32, 37]

P<
Testing the threshold values (Example, Threshold 0.3 Pn)

• Feed rated voltage and rated current in phase to the measuring inputs of
the relay (PF=1).

• The measured values for the active power „P“ must show a positive
algebraic sign.

• Set the tripping threshold (e.g. 0.3 Pn).

• In order to test the tripping thresholds feed 0.5 times rated current to the
measuring inputs of the relay. Reduce the current slowly until the relay
picks up. Ensure that the angle between current and voltage remains
constant. Compare the tripping value to the parameterized.

Testing the tripping delay (Example, Threshold 0.3 Pn)

• Feed rated voltage and rated current in phase to the measuring inputs of
the relay (PF=1).

• The measured values for the active power „P“ must show a positive
algebraic sign.

• Set the tripping threshold (e.g. 0.3 Pn).

• In order to test the tripping delay feed 0.5 times rated current to the
measuring inputs of the relay. Increase the current with an abrupt change
to 0.2 In. Ensure that the angle between current and voltage remains
constant. Measure the tripping delay at the output of the relay.

Successful test result

The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays, threshold values
and fallback ratios correspond with those values, specified in the adjustment list.
Permissible deviations/tolerances can be found under Technical Data.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 387

PQS – Power Protection Module [ANSI 32, 37]

Q<
Testing the threshold values (Example, Threshold 0.3 Qn)

• Feed rated voltage and 0.9 times rated current (90° phase shift) to the
measuring inputs of the relay (PF=0).

• The measured values for the active power „Q“ must show a positive
algebraic sign.

• Set the tripping threshold (e.g. 0.3 Qn).

• In order to test the tripping thresholds feed 0.5 times rated current to the
measuring inputs of the relay. Reduce the current slowly until the relay
picks up. Ensure that the angle between current and voltage remains
constant. Compare the tripping value to the parameterized.

Testing the tripping delay (Example, Threshold 0.3 Qn)

• Feed rated voltage and 0.9 times rated current (90° phase shift) to the
measuring inputs of the relay (PF=0).

• The measured values for the active power „Q“ must show a positive
algebraic sign.

• Set the tripping threshold (e.g. 0.3 Qn).

• In order to test the tripping delay feed 0.5 times rated current to the
measuring inputs of the relay. Increase the current with an abrupt change
to 0.2 In. Ensure that the angle between current and voltage remains
constant. Measure the tripping delay at the output of the relay.

Successful test result

The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays, threshold values
and fallback ratios correspond with those values, specified in the adjustment list.
Permissible deviations/tolerances can be found under Technical Data.

Page 388 EN MRA4 04/09

PQS – Power Protection Module [ANSI 32, 37]

Pr

Testing the threshold values (Example, Threshold 0.2 Pn)

• Feed rated voltage and rated current with 180 degree phase shift
between voltage and current pointers to the measuring inputs of the relay.

• The measured values for the active power „P“ must show a negative
algebraic sign.

• Set the tripping threshold (e. g. 0.2 Pn).

• In order to test the tripping thresholds feed 0.1 times rated current to the
measuring inputs of the relay. Increase the current slowly until the relay
picks up. Ensure that the angle between current and voltage remains
constant. Compare the tripping value to the parameterized.

Testing the tripping delay (Example, Threshold 0.2 Pn)

• Feed rated voltage and rated current with 180 degree phase shift
between voltage and current pointers to the measuring inputs of the relay.

• The measured values for the active power „P“ must show a negative
algebraic sign.

• Set the tripping threshold (e.g. 0.2 Pn).

• In order to test the tripping delay feed 0.1 times rated current to the
measuring inputs of the relay. Increase the current with an abrupt change
to 0.3 In. Ensure that the angle between current and voltage remains
constant. Measure the tripping delay at the output of the relay.

Successful test result

The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays, threshold values
and fallback ratios correspond with those values, specified in the adjustment list.
Permissible deviations/tolerances can be found under Technical Data.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 389

PQS – Power Protection Module [ANSI 32, 37]

Qr

Testing the threshold values (Example, Threshold 0.2 Qn)

• Feed rated voltage and rated current with -90 degree phase shift between
voltage and current pointers to the measuring inputs of the relay.

• The measured values for the active power „Q“ must show a negative
algebraic sign.

• Set the tripping threshold (e. g. 0.2 Qn).

• In order to test the tripping delay feed 0.1 times rated current to the
measuring inputs of the relay. Increase the current slowly until the relay
picks up. Ensure that the angle between current and voltage remains
constant. Measure the tripping delay at the output of the relay.

Testing the tripping delay (Example, Threshold 0.2 Qn)

• Feed rated voltage and rated current with -90 degree phase shift between
voltage and current pointers to the measuring inputs of the relay.

• The measured values for the active power „Q“ must show a negative
algebraic sign.

• Set the tripping threshold (e. g. 0.2 Qn).

• In order to test the tripping thresholds feed 0.1 times rated current to the
measuring inputs of the relay. Increase the current with an abrupt change
to 0.3 In. Ensure that the angle between current and voltage remains
constant. Compare the tripping value to the parameterized.

Successful test result

The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays, threshold values
and fallback ratios correspond with those values, specified in the adjustment list.
Permissible deviations/tolerances can be found under Technical Data.

Page 390 EN MRA4 04/09

PQS – Power Protection Module [ANSI 32, 37]

S>

Testing the threshold values

• Feed 80% of the S> threshold to the measuring inputs of the relay.

• Increase the fed power slowly until the relay picks up. Compare the
measured value at the time of tripping to the parameterized setting.

Testing the tripping delay

• Feed 80% of the S> threshold to the measuring inputs of the relay.

• Increase the fed power with an abrupt change to 120% of the

S> threshold. Measure the tripping delay at the output of the relay.

Successful test result

The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays, threshold values
and fallback ratios correspond with those values, specified in the adjustment list.
Permissible deviations/tolerances can be found under Technical Data.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 391

PQS – Power Protection Module [ANSI 32, 37]

S<

Testing the threshold values

• Feed 120% of the S< threshold to the measuring inputs of the relay.

• Reduce the fed power slowly until the relay picks up. Compare the
measured value at the time of tripping to the parameterized setting.

Testing the tripping delay

• Feed 120% of the S< threshold to the measuring inputs of the relay.

• Reduce the fed power with an abrupt change to 80% of the

S< threshold. Measure the tripping delay at the output of the relay.

Successful test result

The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays, threshold values
and fallback ratios correspond with those values, specified in the adjustment list.
Permissible deviations/tolerances can be found under Technical Data.

Page 392 EN MRA4 04/09

PF Protection Module – Power Factor [ANSI 55]

PF Protection Module – Power Factor [ANSI 55]

Available stages:
PF[1] ,PF[2]

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 393

Page 394
PF[1]...[n]
name = PF[1]...[n]

Please Refer To Diagram: Blockings

2 (Stage is not deactivated and no active blocking signals)

name.Alarm
14

Pickup Delay And Release Delay

name.Pre-trig Comp
PF Protection Module – Power Factor [ANSI 55]

name.Post-trig Comp
Pre-trigger time Follow-up time
name.Compensator

name.PF & name.t

t 0 name.Trip
PF

name.TripCmd
&
15
name.<20%Vn

V
>1 name.Impossible
>1

name.<0.5%In

ILx max

Please Refer To Diagram: Trip blockings

3 (Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. )

EN MRA4 04/09
PF Protection Module – Power Factor [ANSI 55]

Q
leading lagging

PF<0 PF>0
90°<phi<180° 0°<phi<90°

lagging leading

PF>0 PF<0

180°<phi<270° 270°<phi<360°

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 395

PF Protection Module – Power Factor [ANSI 55]

Device planning parameters of the Power Factor module

Parameter Description Options Default Menu path
Mode Mode do not use, use [Device planning]
use

Global protection parameter of the Power Factor-module

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
ExBlo1 External blocking of 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para
the module, if
/Global Prot Para
blocking is activated
(allowed) within a /PF-Prot
parameter set and if
the state of the /PF[1]]
assigned signal is
true.

ExBlo2 External blocking of 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para

the module, if
blocking is activated /Global Prot Para
(allowed) within a /PF-Prot
parameter set and if
the state of the /PF[1]]
assigned signal is
true.

ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para

the Trip Command
/Global Prot Para
of the module/the
stage, if blocking is /PF-Prot
activated (allowed)
within a parameter /PF[1]]
set and if the state of
the assigned signal
is true.

Page 396 EN MRA4 04/09

PF Protection Module – Power Factor [ANSI 55]

Parameter set parameters of the Power Factor module

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
Function Permanent activation or inactive, inactive [Protection Para
deactivation of
active /<n>
module/stage.
/PF-Prot
/PF[1]]
ExBlo Fc Activate (allow) or inactivate inactive, inactive [Protection Para
(disallow) blocking of the
active /<n>
module/stage. This
parameter is only effective if /PF-Prot
a signal is assigned to the
corresponding global /PF[1]]
protection parameter. If the
signal becomes true, those
modules/stages are blocked
that are parameterized
"ExBlo Fc=active".

Blo TripCmd Permanent blocking of the inactive, inactive [Protection Para

Trip Command of the
active /<n>
module/stage.
/PF-Prot
/PF[1]]
ExBlo TripCmd Fc Activate (allow) or inactivate inactive, inactive [Protection Para
(disallow) blocking of the
module/stage. This active /<n>
parameter is only effective if /PF-Prot
a signal is assigned to the
corresponding global /PF[1]]
protection parameter. If the
signal becomes true, those
modules/stages are blocked
that are parameterized
"ExBlo TripCmd Fc=active".

Trig Mode Trigger Mode. Should the leading, lagging [Protection Para
Module be triggered if the
Current Pointer is leading to lagging /<n>
the Voltage Pointer = Lead? /PF-Prot
Or should the Module be
triggered if the Current /PF[1]]
Pointer is lagging to the
Voltage Pointer = Lag?

Threshold Alarm if the threshold is 0.5 - 0.99 0.8 [Protection Para

exceeded
/<n>
/PF-Prot
/PF[1]]

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 397

PF Protection Module – Power Factor [ANSI 55]

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

Res Mode Trigger Mode. Should the leading, leading [Protection Para
Module be triggered if the
Current Pointer is leading to lagging /<n>
the Voltage Pointer = Lead? /PF-Prot
Or should the Module be
triggered if the Current /PF[1]]
Pointer is lagging to the
Voltage Pointer = Lag?

Reset Value Reset Value 0.5 - 0.99 0.99 [Protection Para

/<n>
/PF-Prot
/PF[1]]
t Tripping delay 0.00 - 300.00s 0.00s [Protection Para
/<n>
/PF-Prot
/PF[1]]
Pre-trig Comp Pre-trigger time for the 0.00 - 300.00s 5.00s [Protection Para
Compensation Signal.
/<n>
When this timer is elapsed
the compensation signal will /PF-Prot
be activated.
/PF[1]]

Post-trig Comp Post-trigger time of the 0.00 - 300.00s 5.00s [Protection Para
Compensation Signal.
/<n>
When this timer is elapsed
the compensation signal will /PF-Prot
be deactivated.
/PF[1]]

Page 398 EN MRA4 04/09

PF Protection Module – Power Factor [ANSI 55]

States of the inputs of the Power Factor module

Name Description Assignment via
ExBlo1-I Module input state: External [Protection Para
blocking
/Global Prot Para
/PF-Prot
/PF[1]]
ExBlo2-I Module input state: External [Protection Para
blocking
/Global Prot Para
/PF-Prot
/PF[1]]
ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External [Protection Para
Blocking of the Trip Command
/Global Prot Para
/PF-Prot
/PF[1]]

Signals of the Power Factor module (states of the outputs)

Name Description
active Signal: active
ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
Alarm Signal: Alarm Power Factor
Trip Signal: Trip Power Factor
TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
Compensator Signal: Compensation Signal
Impossible Signal: Alarm Power Factor Impossible

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 399

PF Protection Module – Power Factor [ANSI 55]

Commissioning: Power Factor [ANSI 55]

Object to be tested

• Testing the projected Power Factor Modules

Necessary means
• 3-phase AC voltage source
• 3-phase AC current source
• Timer

Procedure – Testing the wiring

• Feed rated voltage and rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay.

• Adjust the current pointers 30° lagging to the voltage pointers.

• The following measuring values have to be shown:

P=0.86 Pn
Q=0.5 Qn
S=1 Sn

If the measured values are shown with a negative (algebraic) sign check the
wiring.

In this example PF-Trigger is set to 0.86 = 30° (lagging) and PF-Reset is set
to 0.86 = 30° leading.

Carry out the test with the settings (trigger and reset) that fit to your
switchboard.

Testing the threshold values (Trigger) (PF Trigger: Example = 0.86 lagging)

• Feed rated voltage and rated current in phase to the measuring inputs of the relay (PF=1).

• Adjust the angle between voltage and current (current pointer lagging) until the relay picks up.

• Write down the pickup value.

Testing the Reset (PF Reset: Example = 0.86 leading)

• Reduce the angle between voltage and current beyond PF = 1 (current pointer leading) until the alarm
drops off.

• Write down the reset value.

Page 400 EN MRA4 04/09

PF Protection Module – Power Factor [ANSI 55]

Testing the trip delay (PF Trigger: Example = 0.86 lagging)

• Feed rated voltage and rated current in phase to the measuring inputs of the relay (PF=1).

• Adjust the angle between voltage and current (current pointer lagging) with an abrupt change to
PF = 0.707 (45°) lagging.

• Measure the tripping delay at the output of the relay. Compare the measured tripping time to the
parameterized.

Testing the fallback ratio (PF Reset: Example = 0.86 leading)

• Adjust the angle between voltage and current (current pointer leading) with an abrupt change to
PF = 0.707 (45°) leading.

• Measure the tripping delay at the output of the relay. Compare the measured tripping time to the
parameterized.

Successful test result

The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays, threshold values and fallback ratios correspond
with those values, specified in the adjustment list. Permissible deviations/tolerances can be found under Tech-
nical Data.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 401

f-Protection Module – Frequency Protection [ANSI 81O/U]

f-Protection Module – Frequency Protection

[ANSI 81O/U]
Available stages: 6
f[1] ,f[2] ,f[3] ,f[4] ,f[5] ,f[6]

All frequency protective elements f[1] to f[6] are identically structured.

The frequency is calculated as the average of the measured values of the

three phase frequencies. Only valid measured frequency values are taken
into account. If a phase voltage is no longer measurable, this phase will be
excluded from the calculation of the average value.

Page 402 EN MRA4 04/09

EN MRA4 04/09
f[1]...[n]
nam e = f[1]...[n]

Please Refer To Diagram: Blockings

2 (Stage is not deactivated and no active blocking signals)

Frequency calculation nam e.Alarm f

Device planning
VL1 fL1 nam e.A larm
phase 1 φ name.M ode 14
valid f>
φ
VL2 fL2 f avg f<
phase 2
valid

VL3 fL3 name.f

phase 3 nam e.Trip f
(f>|f<) name.t
valid
&
t 0 nam e.Trip
f-Protection Module – Frequency Protection [ANSI 81O/U]

name.TripCm d
&
Device planning
15
V Block f

1 φ
nam e.B lo by V <
1 No of valid 1
phases
1

Please Refer To Diagram: Trip blockings

3 (Tripping com mand not deactivated or blocked. )

Page 403
Page 404
f[1]...[n]: f< and df/dt Or f> and df/dt
name = f[1]...[n]

name.Alarm f
Please Refer To Diagram: Blockings
2 (Stage is not deactivated and no active blocking signals) name.Alarm df/dt | DF/DT
Device planning name.Alarm
name.Mode 14
f> and df/dt
f< and df/dt

f> f

VL1 f<
name.Trip df/dt | DF/DT
VL2 Frequency calculation
f f
name.Trip f
VL3 name.t

t 0 name.Trip
df/dt mode &

positive df/dt
f-Protection Module – Frequency Protection [ANSI 81O/U]

negative df/dt
absolute df/dt

+df/dt df/dt

df/dt calculation -df/dt

Idf/dtI name.TripCmd
&
15

Field Para

V Block f

&
name.Blo by V<

Please Refer To Diagram: Trip blockings

3
(Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. )

EN MRA4 04/09
EN MRA4 04/09
f[1]...[n]: f< and DF/DT Or f> and DF/DT
name = f[1]...[n]

Please Refer To Diagram: Blockings

2 (Stage is not deactivated and no active blocking signals) name.Alarm f

name.Alarm df/dt | DF/DT

Device planning
name.Alarm
name.Mode
14
f> and DF/DT
VL1
f< and DF/DT name.Trip df/dt | DF/DT

VL2 f> f
Frequency calculation DT name.Trip f
f 1
VL3 f< & t name.Trip
&

<name>.f+DF
f-Protection Module – Frequency Protection [ANSI 81O/U]

name.TripCmd
&
15

name.Blo by V<

Field Para

V Block f

&

Please Refer To Diagram: Trip blockings

4
(Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. )

Page 405
Page 406
f[1]...[n]: df/dt
name = f[1]...[n]

Please Refer To Diagram: Blockings

2 (Stage is not deactivated and no active blocking signals)

name.Alarm df/dt | DF/DT

name.Alarm
14

name.Trip df/dt | DF/DT

Device planning name.t

name.Mode t 0 name.Trip
df/dt mode &
df/dt
positive df/dt
f-Protection Module – Frequency Protection [ANSI 81O/U]

negative df/dt
absolute df/dt

VL1 +df/dt df/dt

VL2
df/dt calculation -df/dt
VL3
Idf/dtI name.TripCmd
&
15

Field Para

V Block f

&
name.Blo by V<

Please Refer To Diagram: Trip blockings

3 (Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. )

EN MRA4 04/09
EN MRA4 04/09
f[1]...[n]: delta phi
name = f[1]...[n]

Please Refer To Diagram: Blockings

2 (Stage is not deactivated and no active blocking signals)
name.Alarm delta phi

name.Alarm

name.Trip delta phi

Device planning
name.Trip
name.Mode & 14
delta phi
f-Protection Module – Frequency Protection [ANSI 81O/U]

VL1 name.delta phi

VL2 delta phi

delta phi calculation
VL3
name.TripCmd
&
15

Field Para

V Block f

&
name.Blo by V<

Please Refer To Diagram: Trip blockings

3
(Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. )

Page 407
f-Protection Module – Frequency Protection [ANSI 81O/U]

Device Planning Parameters of the Frequency Protection Module

Parameter Description Options Default Menu path
Mode Mode do not use, f[1]: f< [Device planning]
f<, f[2]: f>
f>, f[3]: f<
f< and df/dt, f[4]: f<
f> and df/dt, f[5]: f<
f< and DF/DT, f[6]: f<
f> and DF/DT,
df/dt,
delta phi

Global Protection Parameters of the Frequency Protection Module

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
ExBlo1 External blocking of 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para
the module, if
blocking is activated /Global Prot Para
(allowed) within a /f-Prot
parameter set and if
the state of the /f[1]]
assigned signal is
true.

ExBlo2 External blocking of 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para

the module, if
/Global Prot Para
blocking is activated
(allowed) within a /f-Prot
parameter set and if
the state of the /f[1]]
assigned signal is
true.

ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para

the Trip Command
/Global Prot Para
of the module/the
stage, if blocking is /f-Prot
activated (allowed)
within a parameter /f[1]]
set and if the state of
the assigned signal
is true.

Page 408 EN MRA4 04/09

f-Protection Module – Frequency Protection [ANSI 81O/U]

Setting Group Parameters of the Frequency Protection Module

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
Function Permanent activation or inactive, f[1]: active [Protection Para
deactivation of module/stage.
active f[2]: active /<n>
f[3]: inactive /f-Prot
f[4]: inactive /f[1]]
f[5]: inactive
f[6]: inactive
ExBlo Fc Activate (allow) or inactivate inactive, inactive [Protection Para
(disallow) blocking of the
module/stage. This active /<n>
parameter is only effective if /f-Prot
a signal is assigned to the
corresponding global /f[1]]
protection parameter. If the
signal becomes true, those
modules/stages are blocked
that are parameterized
"ExBlo Fc=active".

Blo TripCmd Permanent blocking of the inactive, inactive [Protection Para

Trip Command of the
active /<n>
module/stage.
/f-Prot
/f[1]]
ExBlo TripCmd Fc Activate (allow) or inactivate inactive, inactive [Protection Para
(disallow) blocking of the
active /<n>
module/stage. This
parameter is only effective if /f-Prot
a signal is assigned to the
corresponding global /f[1]]
protection parameter. If the
signal becomes true, those
modules/stages are blocked
that are parameterized
"ExBlo TripCmd Fc=active".

f> Pick-up value for 40.00 - 69.95Hz 51.00Hz [Protection Para

overfrequency.
/<n>
Only available if: Device /f-Prot
planning: f.Mode = f> Or f>
and df/dt Or f> and DF/DT /f[1]]

f< Pick-up value for 40.00 - 69.95Hz 49.00Hz [Protection Para

underfrequency.
/<n>
Only available if: Device /f-Prot
planning: f.Mode = f< Or f<
and df/dt Or f< and DF/DT /f[1]]

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 409

f-Protection Module – Frequency Protection [ANSI 81O/U]

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

t Tripping delay 0.00 - 3600.00s 1.00s [Protection Para

Only available if: Device /<n>

planning: f.Mode = f< /f-Prot
Orf>Or f> and df/dtOr f< and
df/dt /f[1]]

df/dt Measured value (calculated): 0.1 - 10.0Hz/s 1.0Hz/s [Protection Para

Rate-of-frequency-change.
/<n>
Only available if: Device /f-Prot
planning: f.Mode = df/dt Or
f< and df/dt Or f> and df/dt /f[1]]

t-df/dt Trip delay df/dt 0.00 - 300.00s 1.00s [Protection Para

/<n>
/f-Prot
/f[1]]
DF Frequency difference for the 0.0 - 10.0Hz 1.00Hz [Protection Para
maximum admissable
/<n>
variation of the mean of the
rate of frequency-change. /f-Prot
This function is inactive if
DF=0. /f[1]]

Only available if: Device

planning: f.Mode = f< and
DF/DT Or f> and DF/DT
DT Time interval of the 0.1 - 10.0s 1.00s [Protection Para
maximum admissable rate-
of-frequency-change. /<n>
/f-Prot
Only available if: Device
planning: f.Mode = f< and /f[1]]
DF/DT Or f> and DF/DT
df/dt mode df/dt mode absolute df/dt, absolute df/dt [Protection Para

Only available if: Device positive df/dt, /<n>

planning: f.Mode = df/dt Or negative df/dt /f-Prot
f< and df/dt Or f> and df/dt
Only available if: Device /f[1]]
planning: f.Mode = df/dt Or
f< and df/dt Or f> and df/dt
Only available if: Device
planning: f.Mode = df/dt
delta phi Measured value (calculated): 1 - 30° 10° [Protection Para
Vector surge
/<n>
Only available if: Device /f-Prot
planning: f.Mode = delta phi
/f[1]]

Page 410 EN MRA4 04/09

f-Protection Module – Frequency Protection [ANSI 81O/U]

Frequency Protection Module Input States

Name Description Assignment via
ExBlo1-I Module input state: External [Protection Para
blocking1
/Global Prot Para
/f-Prot
/f[1]]
ExBlo2-I Module input state: External [Protection Para
blocking2
/Global Prot Para
/f-Prot
/f[1]]
ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External [Protection Para
Blocking of the Trip Command
/Global Prot Para
/f-Prot
/f[1]]

Frequency Protection Module Signals (Output States)

Name Description
active Signal: active
ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
Blo by V< Signal: Module is blocked by undervoltage.
Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
Alarm f Signal: Alarm Frequency Protection
Alarm df/dt | DF/DT Alarm instantaneous or average value of the rate-of-
frequency-change
Alarm delta phi Signal: Alarm Vector Surge
Alarm Signal: Alarm Frequency Protection (collective signal)
Trip f Signal: Frequency has exceeded the limit.
Trip df/dt | DF/DT Signal: Trip df/dt or DF/DT
Trip delta phi Signal: Trip delta phi
Trip Signal: Trip Frequency Protection (collective signal)
TripCmd Signal: Trip Command

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 411

f-Protection Module – Frequency Protection [ANSI 81O/U]

Commissioning: Frequency Protection (Overfrequency) [ANSI 81O]

Object to be tested
All parameterized overfrequency protection stages.

Necessary means
• Three-phase voltage source with variable frequency.
• Timer

Procedure

Testing the threshold values

• Keep on increasing the frequency until the respective frequency element is activated
• Note the frequency value.
• Disconnect the test voltage.

Testing the trip delay

• Set the test voltage to nominal frequency.
• Now connect a frequency jump (activation value) and then start a timer. Measure the tripping time at the
relay output.

Testing the fallback ratio

Reduce the measuring quantity to less than 99.95% of the trip value (or 0.05% fn). The relay must only fall back
at 99.95% of the trip value at the earliest (or 0.05% fn).

Successful test result

Permissible deviations/tolerances can be taken from the Technical Data.

Commissioning: Frequency Protection (Underfrequency) [ANSI 81U]

For all parameterized underfrequency elements, this test can be carried out similar to the test for overfrequency
protection (by using the related underfrequency values).

Please consider the following deviations:

• For testing the threshold values the frequency has to be decreased until the protection element is
activated.

• For detection of the fallback ratio the measuring quantity has to be increased to more than 100.05% of
the trip value (or 0.05% fn). At 100.05% of the trip value the relay is to fall back at the earliest
(or 0.05% fn).

Page 412 EN MRA4 04/09

f-Protection Module – Frequency Protection [ANSI 81O/U]

Commissioning: df/dt
Object to be tested
All frequency protection stages that are projected as df/dt.

Necessary means
• Three-phase voltage source.
• Frequency generator that can generate and measure a linear, defined rate of change of frequency.

Procedure

Testing the threshold values

• Keep on increasing the rate of change of frequency until the respective element is activated.
• Note the value.

Testing the trip delay

• Set the test voltage to nominal frequency.
• Now apply a step change (sudden change) that is 1.5 times the setting value (Example apply 3 Hz per
second if the setting value is 2 Hz per second).
• Measure the tripping time at the relay output. Compare the measured tripping time to the parameterized.

Successful test result

Permissible deviations/tolerances and fallback ratios can be taken from the Technical Data.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 413

f-Protection Module – Frequency Protection [ANSI 81O/U]

Commissioning: f< and -df/dt

Object to be tested
All frequency protection stages that are projected as f< and -df/dt.

Necessary means
• Three-phase voltage source.
• Frequency generator that can generate and measure a linear, defined rate of change of frequency.

Procedure

Testing the threshold values

• Feed nominal voltage and nominal frequency to the device.
• Decrease the frequency below the f< threshold.
• Apply a rate of change of frequency (step change) that is below the setting value (Example apply -1 Hz
per second if the setting value is -0.8 Hz per second). After the tripping delay is expired the relay has to
trip.

Successful test result

Permissible deviations/tolerances and fallback ratios can be taken from the Technical Data.

Page 414 EN MRA4 04/09

f-Protection Module – Frequency Protection [ANSI 81O/U]

Commissioning: delta phi

Object to be tested
All frequency protection stages that are projected as delta phi (Vector Surge).

Necessary means
• Three-phase voltage source that can generate a definite step (sudden change) of the voltage pointers
(phase shift).

Procedure

Testing the threshold values

• Apply a vector surge (sudden change) that is 1.5 times the setting value (Example if the setting value is
10° apply 15°).

Successful test result

Permissible deviations/tolerances and fallback ratio can be taken from the Technical Data.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 415

AR-Protection Module – Automatic Reclosure [ANSI 79]

AR-Protection Module – Automatic Reclosure [ANSI 79]

AR

Module AR is used for auto reclosing of overhead lines.

The start timer must not exceed the supervision timer. Otherwise, a series
of uncontrolled reclosure attempts can be provoked.

Tripping times that are longer exceed the parameterized start time due to
an abort of the AR attempt.

Thus, it has to be ensured by all means that:

Supervision time t-Superv > Start time t-Start > longest tripping time

The AR-module requires a signal »CB READY«.

An AR-cycle can be stopped by one of 6 assignable blocking signals.

AR procedure:

Initialization/Activation
The state of the AR changes from the inactive to the active state when parameter »Function = active« is
selected and at least one (authorized) protective function is allocated to the AR and provided that the AR-module
is not being blocked by an active blocking signal.

AR activated
When the AR is activated, this state is called »AR.ACTIVE« and is signaled as well.

Supervision time (applies only if the CB is switched on manually)

When position »CB POS ON« (THAT MEANS CB POS ON = TRUE and CB POS OFF = FALSE) is signaled, the AR module
changes into the »AR.T-SUPERV« state and the supervision timer is started. The supervision time is to prevent that
the AR will be started by a protection function on a faulty line after a manual CB-Switch-ON command. While the
supervision time(r) is running down, no auto reclosure attempt can be started.

AR ready
After expiration of the supervision time, the AR module is ready to switch on the CB after a trip by an AR
authorized protection module.

Starting the AR
An alarm or trip of an AR authorized protection stage (up to 6 start functions) sets the AR module in the
»AR.RUNNING« state. At the same time, the »start time(r)« is started. An reclosure attempt will only be started, if
the trip command of the AR authorized protection function is given within the set start time/duration. The location
and the resistance of the fault have an direct impact on the tripping delay (Inverse characteristics). Via the start
time you have a influence on whether far remote and high resistance failures should start (only inverse
characteristics) a reclosure attempt or not.

Page 416 EN MRA4 04/09

AR-Protection Module – Automatic Reclosure [ANSI 79]

Starting the dead time

If the Off-command is given out to the CB and the device can clearly detect within the start time the OFF position
of the CB (that means CB POS ON = false and CB POS OFF = true) then the dead time(r) will be started.

Dead time (»AR.t-dead«)

The AR module waits for the dead time to finish. When this time has elapsed it is checked if the CB is still
in OFF-position and if the CB is ready for reclosing (e.g. Function: CB ready?). Additionally it is checked
whether another trip exists and if the synchronization signal is active (option) before the reclosing
command is actually issued. If the result of the check is negative this puts the AR in the »AR.T-SUPERV«
state; the AR is being blocked for this time.

For phase and earth faults or for a start from external trips individual dead times can be parameterized.
When trips are caused by phase fault or external trips via digital inputs the dead time »t DPn« is always
used (the letter »n« stands for the number of the present AR shot).
When trips are caused by faults in the grounding system the dead time »t DEn« is always used (the letter
»n« stands for the number of the present AR shot).

Dead time is expired – issuing the CB on command

If the dead time has expired the CB on command is issued to the circuit breaker if:

• No active blocking
• The circuit breaker is ready for operation.
• There is no pending trip command of an AR authorized protection function.
• The CB is clearly in the OFF position that means CB POS ON = false and CB POS OFF = true.
• If a synchronous check is parameterized, the device must recognize the Sync-Signal during t-sync is
running.

If all the pre-conditions are fulfilled the CB on command will be given out at most as long as »t-CB on Cmd«. The
command will be terminated if the CB is clearly in the ON position that means CB POS ON = true and CB POS OFF
= false. The counters are incremented.

Test – Was the auto reclosure attempt successful?

The reclosure attempt has been successful if and only if:

1. Not later than the »t-CB On Cmd« timer has expired the CB is clearly in the ON-position that means CB
POS ON = true and CB POS OFF = false.
2. Within the supervision time no new alarm/trip, caused by an AR-authorized protection function, occurs
(otherwise the AR-cycle will be aborted).
3. The AR-module is not aborted by any blocking or abort signal.

If an alarm/trip is generated by an AR authorized protection function while

the supervision/discrimination timer runs down the AR-module is put back
into the state AR ready if and only if the maximum number of AR-cycles is
not reached yet. Otherwise the AR will be broken up/stopped and the signal
»AR.FAILED« will be given out.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 417

AR-Protection Module – Automatic Reclosure [ANSI 79]

If the reclosure attempt has been successful, the signal AR.successful will be issued.

External AR Blockade
The input signal »AR.EXBLO-I« changes the running AR into the »AWE.EXBLO« state, i.e. the started
AR action is interrupted and blocked. The blockade is only cancelled when this signal is not applied any more.
But precondition for this blockage is the activated parameter »ExBlo Fc«. If the blocking signal is no longer
active and after the blocking time has expired, the AR module will fall back into the ready state.

Volitional Abort of the AR

An AR-cycle can be stopped by one of 6 assignable blocking signals »AWE.ABORT:«. If the Abort Signal is gone the
AR-Module checks the position of the CB. If the CB is in the On-Position, the AR-Module starts the dead time.
After expiring of the dead time the module falls back into the state »AR.READY«. If the CB is in the Off-Position,
the AR-Module will wait for a manual switch on of the CB. If the CB is in the On-Position while the AR is aborted,
the »AR.SUCCESSFUL« command could be given out if at least one reclosure attempt has taken place.

Via the fast trip the AR-module is able to trip the circuit breaker ahead of
the protection stage that has activated the AR-module.

As a general rule a fast trip is either issued beforehand the first reclosure
attempt or afterwards the last permitted reclosure attempt.

1. Fast trip at the beginning (before the first reclosure attempt/shot is

executed) Purpose: Keeping the complete feeder energized (After a
short break)
For radial feeders it could make sense to switch of the complete line
by a fast trip beforehand a line sections is switched of by time-
graded protection. 80%-90% of the faults are not permanent. After
0,5 up to 1 s the line is probably no longer faulty and the complete
line can be restored/re-energized. If the line is still faulty, segments
of the line will be switched off selectively by the time-graded
protection devices.

2. Fast trip at the end (after the last permitted reclosure attempt/shot
is executed) Purpose: To prevent unnecessary damage from the
electrical equipment in case of permanent faults.
If the last reclosure attempt/shot is executed and the fault is still
there/permanent, then the circuit breaker can be switched off by a
fast trip beforehand the tipping delay of the protection module that
has activated the AR-module has expired.

Page 418 EN MRA4 04/09

EN MRA4 04/09
AR.running AR.t-dead AR.CB ON Cmd AR.t-Superv

no

Check: 1. Is the circuit breaker

still OFF (Position). 2. Is there
actually no trip of an AR- CB ON Cmd=1
authorised protection function. 3.
Is there actually no general trip 4. yes yes Increment
no

achieved.

Aux ON=0
Is the circuit breaker ready for counters

Ex Sync=1

Prot.Alarm
Aux OFF=0
Aux ON=1 &

CB.TripCmd
Aux OFF=1 &
synchro check?
(switching) operation ("CB
Prot.Alarm

ready").

AR.Ready
Max number of (parameterised) AR attempts

there was a manual switch onto fault.

no yes yes

started by an external signal (via digital input).

The AR-Module is now ready to start an auto reclosure

module. Additionally the AR-Module is now ready to be

attempt after the tripping of an AR-authorized protection

The supervision (blocking) time prevents a start of the AR if

t-DP/t-DE

0 t
AR-Protection Module – Automatic Reclosure [ANSI 79]

Start criterion fulfilled

AR.Function t-CB on Cmd:
reset by: "Aux ON"
t-Superv t-start t-sync_AR t-Superv
Start fct
AR.Funktion
inactive 0 t 0 t 0 t 0 t 0 t
active
active

Starting condition not

fulfilled e.g. missing trip
command within the start
time.

Manual ON
CB ON Cmd

t-Superv

CB OFF Cmd
Aux OFF=0
Aux ON=1 &

0 t yes AR.
successful

no
t-Superv

0 t
abort
AR.failed

Resetting the AR by assignable blockings

Caution
Tripping times that are longer than the parmameterized operative time will cause an abortion of the AR.

Page 419
Page 420
No start of the AR after manual switching on the CB, while supervision (blocking) timer is running.

Manual ON CB.Trip CB
1
AR.Aux OFF
0
1
0
AR.Aux ON
1
AR.Ready
0
1
AR.t-Superv <- t-Superv ->
0
AR-Protection Module – Automatic Reclosure [ANSI 79]

1
0
I[1].Alarm
1
t-start
0
1
0
I[1] Trip
1
0
AR.t-dead
1
0
AR.CB ON Cmd
1
0
AR.running
1
0
AR.successful

1
0
AR.failed

EN MRA4 04/09
EN MRA4 04/09
Successful Auto Reclosure (1st Shot)

1
AR.Aux OFF
0
1
0
AR.Aux ON

1
0
AR.Ready
1
AR.t-Superv <- t-Superv ->
0
AR-Protection Module – Automatic Reclosure [ANSI 79]

1
I[1].Alarm
0
1
t-start <- t-start ->
0
1
I[1] Trip
0

1
AR.t-dead <- t-DP1 ->
0

1
AR.CB ON Cmd
0
1
AR.running
0
1
0
AR.successful

1
0
AR.failed

Page 421
Page 422
Twice auto reclosed, unsuccessful

1
AR.Aux OFF
0
1
AR.Aux ON
0

1
0
AR.Ready
1
AR.t-Superv <- t-Superv -> <- t-Superv ->
0
AR-Protection Module – Automatic Reclosure [ANSI 79]

1
I[1].Alarm
0
1
t-start <- t-start -> <- t-start ->
0
1
I[1] Trip
0

1
AR.t-dead <- t-DP1 -> <- t-DP2 ->
0

1
AR.CB ON Cmd
0
1
AR.running
0
1
0
AR.successful

1
0
AR.failed

EN MRA4 04/09
AR-Protection Module – Automatic Reclosure [ANSI 79]

Direct Commands of the Automatic Reclosure Module

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
Res TotNo suc Reset all statistic AR inactive, inactive [Operation
unsuc counters: Total
active /Reset]
number of AR,
successful and
unsuccessful no of
AR.

Res Service Cr Reset the Service inactive, inactive [Operation

Counters
active /Reset]

in Preparation in Preparation inactive, inactive [Operation

active /Reset]

Device Planning Parameters of the Module Automatic Reclosure

Parameter Description Options Default Menu path
Mode Mode do not use, use [Device planning]
use

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 423

AR-Protection Module – Automatic Reclosure [ANSI 79]

Global Protection Parameters of the Module Automatic Reclosure

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
ExBlo1 External blocking of the 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para
module, if blocking is
/Global Prot Para
activated (allowed) within a
parameter set and if the /AR]
state of the assigned signal
is true.

ExBlo2 External blocking of the 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para

module, if blocking is
activated (allowed) within a /Global Prot Para
parameter set and if the /AR]
state of the assigned signal
is true.

Ex Sync Signal that indicates the 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para
synchronism
/Global Prot Para
/AR]
CB Pos Detect Criterion by which the -.-, - [Protection Para
Circuit Breaker Switch
CB.Pos /Global Prot Para
Position is to be detected.
/AR]

Ready Circuit breaker is ready for -.-, - [Protection Para

operation if the state of the
CB.Ready, /Global Prot Para
assigned signal is true.
DI Slot X1.DI 1, /AR]
DI Slot X1.DI 2,
DI Slot X1.DI 3,
DI Slot X1.DI 4,
DI Slot X1.DI 5,
DI Slot X1.DI 6,
DI Slot X1.DI 7,
DI Slot X1.DI 8,
DI Slot X6.DI 1,
DI Slot X6.DI 2,
DI Slot X6.DI 3,
DI Slot X6.DI 4,
DI Slot X6.DI 5,
DI Slot X6.DI 6,
DI Slot X6.DI 7,
DI Slot X6.DI 8

Page 424 EN MRA4 04/09

AR-Protection Module – Automatic Reclosure [ANSI 79]

Setting Group Parameters of the Module Automatic Reclosure

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
Function Permanent activation inactive, inactive [Protection Para
or deactivation of
active /<n>
module/stage.
/AR
/General settings]
ExBlo Fc Activate (allow) or inactive, inactive [Protection Para
inactivate (disallow)
blocking of the active /<n>
module/stage. This /AR
parameter is only
effective if a signal is /General settings]
assigned to the
corresponding global
protection
parameter. If the
signal becomes true,
those
modules/stages are
blocked that are
parameterized
"ExBlo Fc=active".

Ex Sync External inactive, inactive [Protection Para

Synchronisation OK
active /<n>
/AR
/General settings]
Attempts Maximum number of 1 - 6 1 [Protection Para
permitted reclosure
/<n>
attempts.
/AR
/General settings]
t-start Start timer - While 0.1 - 10.00s 1s [Protection Para
the start timer runs
/<n>
down, an AR attempt
can be started. Only /AR
if the trip command
is given within the /General settings]
start time/duration an
AR attempt could be
started. The location
and the resistance of
the fault have a big
influence on the
tripping time. The
start time has an
impact on whether
an AR attempt
should be started
when the fault is far
away or high
resistance.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 425

AR-Protection Module – Automatic Reclosure [ANSI 79]

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

t-DP1 Dead time between 0.1 - 200.00s 1s [Protection Para
trip and reclosure
/<n>
attempt for phase
faults. /AR
/General settings]

t-DP2 Dead time between 0.1 - 200.00s 1s [Protection Para

trip and reclosure
/<n>
attempt for phase
faults. /AR
/General settings]

t-DP3 Dead time between 0.1 - 200.00s 1s [Protection Para

trip and reclosure
/<n>
attempt for phase
faults. /AR
/General settings]

t-DP4 Dead time between 0.1 - 200.00s 1s [Protection Para

trip and reclosure
/<n>
attempt for phase
faults. /AR
/General settings]

t-DP5 Dead time between 0.1 - 200.00s 1s [Protection Para

trip and reclosure
attempt for phase /<n>
faults. /AR
/General settings]

t-DP6 Dead time between 0.1 - 200.00s 1s [Protection Para

trip and reclosure
/<n>
attempt for phase
faults. /AR
/General settings]

t-DE1 Dead time between 0.1 - 200.00s 1s [Protection Para

trip and reclosure
attempt for earth /<n>
faults /AR
/General settings]

t-DE2 Dead time between 0.1 - 200.00s 1s [Protection Para

trip and reclosure
/<n>
attempt for earth
faults /AR
/General settings]

t-DE3 Dead time between 0.1 - 200.00s 1s [Protection Para

trip and reclosure
/<n>
attempt for earth
faults /AR
/General settings]

Page 426 EN MRA4 04/09

AR-Protection Module – Automatic Reclosure [ANSI 79]

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

t-DE4 Dead time between 0.1 - 200.00s 1s [Protection Para
trip and reclosure
/<n>
attempt for earth
faults /AR
/General settings]

t-DE5 Dead time between 0.1 - 200.00s 1s [Protection Para

trip and reclosure
/<n>
attempt for earth
faults /AR
/General settings]

t-DE6 Dead time between 0.1 - 200.00s 1s [Protection Para

trip and reclosure
/<n>
attempt for earth
faults /AR
/General settings]

t-Superv Supervision time 1 - 300.00s 10s [Protection Para

/<n>
/AR
/General settings]
t-CB on Cmd By this parameter 0.1 - 300.00s 0.2s [Protection Para
the maximum
duration of the CB /<n>
On control command /AR
will be set. The CB
On control command /General settings]
is given out as long
as the CB is in the
on-position and the
position indicator
signal is being
detected. If the CB is
in the ON-Position,
the Control-
command will be
cancelled/stopped
and the time stage
will be reset.

t-sync_AR Synchronizing time 0.01 - 100.00s 0.01s [Protection Para

for synchronized AR
/<n>
start.
/AR
Only available if: Ex
Sync = active /General settings]

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 427

AR-Protection Module – Automatic Reclosure [ANSI 79]

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

Service Alarm As soon as the AR- 1 - 65535 1000 [Protection Para
Counter exceeds this
number of reclosure /<n>
attempts an alarm /AR
will be given out
(overhauling of the /General settings]
CB)

Service Blo Too many auto 1 - 65535 65535 [Protection Para

reclosure attempts. If
the parameterized /<n>
number of AR cycles /AR
is reached, an alarm
will be given out. /General settings]

Page 428 EN MRA4 04/09

AR-Protection Module – Automatic Reclosure [ANSI 79]

Module Automatic Reclosure Input States

Name Description Assignment via
ExBlo1-I Module input state: External [Protection Para
blocking1
/Global Prot Para
/AR]
ExBlo2-I Module input state: External [Protection Para
blocking2
/Global Prot Para
/AR]
Ex Sync running-I Module input state: External [Protection Para
synchronism signal
/Global Prot Para
/AR]
CB Pos Detect Module input state: Criterion by [Protection Para
which the Circuit Breaker Switch
/Global Prot Para
Position is to be detected.
/AR]
Ready-I Module input state: CB ready [Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/AR]

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 429

AR-Protection Module – Automatic Reclosure [ANSI 79]

Module Automatic Reclosure Signals (Output States)

Name Description
active Signal: active
ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
CB ON Cmd Signal: CB switch ON Command
Abort Blo Signal: AR - The AR was aborted or blocked by an
active function of the menu "Abort"
running Signal: Auto Reclosing running
t-Superv Signal: AR Supervision (blocking) time
Service Alarm Signal: AR - Alarm, too many switching operations
Service Blo Signal: AR - Service blocking - too many switching
operations
successful Signal: Auto Reclosing successful
failed Signal: Auto Reclosing failure
t-dead Signal: Dead time between trip and reclosure attempt
Res Statistics Cr Signal: Reset all statistic AR counters: Total number of
AR, successful and unsuccessful no of AR.
Res Service Cr Signal: Reset the Service Counters for Alarm and
Blocking
AR Shot No.0 Signal: Auto Reclosure Attempt No.
AR Shot No.1 Signal: Auto Reclosure Attempt No.
AR Shot No.2 Signal: Auto Reclosure Attempt No.
AR Shot No.3 Signal: Auto Reclosure Attempt No.
AR Shot No.4 Signal: Auto Reclosure Attempt No.
AR Shot No.5 Signal: Auto Reclosure Attempt No.
AR Shot No.6 Signal: Auto Reclosure Attempt No.
in Preparation in Preparation

Page 430 EN MRA4 04/09

AR-Protection Module – Automatic Reclosure [ANSI 79]

Automatic Reclosure Module Values

Value Description Default Size Menu path
AR Shot No. Counter - Auto 0 0-6 [Operation
Reclosure Attempts
/Count and RevData
/AR]
Total number Cr Total number of all 0 0 - 65536 [Operation
executed Automatic
/Count and RevData
Reclosures Attempts
/AR]
Cr successfl Total number of 0 0 - 65536 [Operation
successfully
/Count and RevData
executed Automatic
Reclosures /AR]
Cr failed Total number of 0 0 - 65536 [Operation
unsuccessfully
/Count and RevData
executed automatic
reclosure attempts /AR]
AR Cr Alarm Remaining numbers 1000 0 - 1000 [Operation
of ARs until
/Count and RevData
Maintenance Alarm
/AR]
AR Cr Block Remaining numbers 65536 0 - 65536 [Operation
of ARs until
/Count and RevData
Maintenance
Blocking /AR]

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 431

AR-Protection Module – Automatic Reclosure [ANSI 79]

Setting Group Parameters of the Start Functions and Fast Trip of the
Module Automatic Reclosure

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

1.Startfct Assignment Start fct - [Protection Para
/<n>
/AR
/Start / FT]
1.FT Fast Trip inactive, inactive [Protection Para
active /<n>
Only available if a
start function was /AR
assigned
/Start / FT]
1.n FT Fast Trip after AR 0-6 0 [Protection Para
attempt number.
/<n>
Only available if a /AR
start function was
assigned /Start / FT]

1.t-FT Trip delay for Fast 0 - 10.00s 0s [Protection Para

Trip
/<n>
Only available if a /AR
start function was
assigned /Start / FT]

2.Startfct Assignment Start fct - [Protection Para

/<n>
/AR
/Start / FT]
2.FT Fast Trip inactive, inactive [Protection Para
active /<n>
Only available if a
start function was /AR
assigned
/Start / FT]
2.n FT Fast Trip after AR 0-6 0 [Protection Para
attempt number.
/<n>
Only available if a /AR
start function was
assigned /Start / FT]

2.t-FT Trip delay for Fast 0 - 10.00s 0s [Protection Para

Trip
/<n>
Only available if a /AR
start function was
assigned /Start / FT]

Page 432 EN MRA4 04/09

AR-Protection Module – Automatic Reclosure [ANSI 79]

3.Startfct Assignment Start fct - [Protection Para

/<n>
/AR
/Start / FT]
3.FT Fast Trip inactive, inactive [Protection Para
active /<n>
Only available if a
start function was /AR
assigned
/Start / FT]
3.n FT Fast Trip after AR 0-6 0 [Protection Para
attempt number.
/<n>
Only available if a /AR
start function was
assigned /Start / FT]

3.t-FT Trip delay for Fast 0 - 10.00s 0s [Protection Para

Trip
/<n>
Only available if a /AR
start function was
assigned /Start / FT]

4.Startfct Assignment Start fct - [Protection Para

/<n>
/AR
/Start / FT]
4.FT Fast Trip inactive, inactive [Protection Para

Only available if a active /<n>

start function was /AR
assigned
/Start / FT]
4.n FT Fast Trip after AR 0-6 0 [Protection Para
attempt number.
/<n>
Only available if a /AR
start function was
assigned /Start / FT]

4.t-FT Trip delay for Fast 0 - 10.00s 0s [Protection Para

Trip
/<n>
Only available if a /AR
start function was
assigned /Start / FT]

5.Startfct Assignment Start fct - [Protection Para

/<n>
/AR
/Start / FT]
5.FT Fast Trip inactive, inactive [Protection Para
active /<n>
Only available if a
start function was /AR
assigned
/Start / FT]

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 433

AR-Protection Module – Automatic Reclosure [ANSI 79]

5.Startfct Assignment Start fct - [Protection Para

/<n>
/AR
/Start / FT]
5.n FT Fast Trip after AR 0-6 0 [Protection Para
attempt number.
/<n>
Only available if a /AR
start function was
assigned /Start / FT]

5.t-FT Trip delay for Fast 0 - 10.00s 0s [Protection Para

Trip
/<n>
Only available if a /AR
start function was
assigned /Start / FT]

6.Startfct Assignment Start fct - [Protection Para

/<n>
/AR
/Start / FT]
6.FT Fast Trip inactive, inactive [Protection Para
active /<n>
Only available if a
start function was /AR
assigned
/Start / FT]
6.n FT Fast Trip after AR 0-6 0 [Protection Para
attempt number.
/<n>
Only available if a /AR
start function was
assigned /Start / FT]

6.t-FT Trip delay for Fast 0 - 10.00s 0s [Protection Para

Trip
/<n>
Only available if a /AR
start function was
assigned /Start / FT]

Page 434 EN MRA4 04/09

AR-Protection Module – Automatic Reclosure [ANSI 79]

Module Automatic Reclosure Fast Trip Signals (Output States)

Name Description
1.FT Signal: Fast Trip
1.FT Cmd Signal: Trip Command for Fast Tripping
2.FT Signal: Fast Trip
2.FT Cmd Signal: Trip Command for Fast Tripping
3.FT Signal: Fast Trip
3.FT Cmd Signal: Trip Command for Fast Tripping
4.FT Signal: Fast Trip
4.FT Cmd Signal: Trip Command for Fast Tripping
5.FT Signal: Fast Trip
5.FT Cmd Signal: Trip Command for Fast Tripping
6.FT Signal: Fast Trip
6.FT Cmd Signal: Trip Command for Fast Tripping

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 435

AR-Protection Module – Automatic Reclosure [ANSI 79]

Setting Group Parameters of the AR Abort Functions

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

abort: 1 Abort the AR-cycle, if AbortFct - [Protection Para
the state of the
assigned signal is /<n>
true. If the state of /AR
this function is true
the AR will be /AbortFct]
aborted.

abort: 2 Abort the AR-cycle, if AbortFct - [Protection Para

the state of the
assigned signal is /<n>
true. If the state of /AR
this function is true
the AR will be /AbortFct]
aborted.

abort: 3 Abort the AR-cycle, if AbortFct - [Protection Para

the state of the
assigned signal is /<n>
true. If the state of /AR
this function is true
the AR will be /AbortFct]
aborted.

abort: 4 Abort the AR-cycle, if AbortFct - [Protection Para

the state of the
assigned signal is /<n>
true. If the state of /AR
this function is true
the AR will be /AbortFct]
aborted.

abort: 5 Abort the AR-cycle, if AbortFct - [Protection Para

the state of the
/<n>
assigned signal is
true. If the state of /AR
this function is true
the AR will be /AbortFct]
aborted.

abort: 6 Abort the AR-cycle, if AbortFct - [Protection Para

the state of the
/<n>
assigned signal is
true. If the state of /AR
this function is true
the AR will be /AbortFct]
aborted.

Page 436 EN MRA4 04/09

AR-Protection Module – Automatic Reclosure [ANSI 79]

AR Abort Functions
Name Description
-.- No assignment
I[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
I[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
I[3].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
I[4].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
I[5].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
I[6].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
IG[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
IG[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
IG[3].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
IG[4].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
ThR.TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
I2>[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
I2>[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
V[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
V[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
V[3].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
V[4].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
VE[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
VE[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
f[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
f[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
f[3].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
f[4].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
f[5].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
f[6].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
V 012 [1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
V 012 [2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
V 012 [3].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
V 012 [4].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
V 012 [5].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
V 012 [6].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
PQS [1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
PQS [2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
PQS [3].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
PQS [4].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
PF[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
PF[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
ExP[1].TripCmd Signal: External Trip Command

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 437

AR-Protection Module – Automatic Reclosure [ANSI 79]

Name Description
ExP[2].TripCmd Signal: External Trip Command
ExP[3].TripCmd Signal: External Trip Command
ExP[4].TripCmd Signal: External Trip Command
SOTF.enabled Signal: Switch Onto Fault enabled. This Signal can be
used to modify Overcurrent Protection Settings.
CLPU.enabled Signal: Cold Load enabled
CBF.Alarm Signal: Circuit Breaker Failure
TCS.Alarm Signal: Alarm Trip Circuit Supervision

Page 438 EN MRA4 04/09

AR-Protection Module – Automatic Reclosure [ANSI 79]

AR Start Functions
Name Description
- No assignment
I[1] Phase Overcurrent Stage
I[2] Phase Overcurrent Stage
I[3] Phase Overcurrent Stage
I[4] Phase Overcurrent Stage
I[5] Phase Overcurrent Stage
I[6] Phase Overcurrent Stage
IG[1] Earth current protection - Stage
IG[2] Earth current protection - Stage
IG[3] Earth current protection - Stage
IG[4] Earth current protection - Stage
I2>[1] Unbalanced Load-Stage
I2>[2] Unbalanced Load-Stage
ExP[1] External Protection - Module
ExP[2] External Protection - Module
ExP[3] External Protection - Module
ExP[4] External Protection - Module

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 439

AR-Protection Module – Automatic Reclosure [ANSI 79]

Commissioning: Automatic Reclosure [ANSI 79]

Object to be tested
AR function of a (current) protective function

Necessary means
• Current source or, if the protection is directional - current and voltage source
• Timer

Procedure

Supervision time > start time > longest tripping time of an AR current
protective function.

Supervision time and start time are parameterized via the AR function. The
tripping time is parameterized via the protective function.

• Switch the CB on.

• Wait until the blocking time »t-Superv« has expired. The supervision time ensures that the AR wont be
started after a manual switch on of the CB.

• Feed trip causing currents.

• As soon as the trip occurs, switch the current off (immediately).

• After expiry of the dead time the CB should reclose.

Only tripping commands that are given within the active time of the AR will
activate the function (reclosure attempts). Therefore make sure, that the
tripping time is shorter than the starting time (mains calculated)!

• If more than one attempt is parameterized, with each reclosure of the CB, the current quantity which is
applied to the current measuring inputs has to be high enough to result in tripping. The test should be
continued until all set AR attempts have been carried out.

The number of attempts permitted can be found in the Technical Data

provided by the CB manufacturer. The specified dead times have to be
kept.

Successful test result

The AR test is successfully completed when the last AR attempt also results in tripping.

Page 440 EN MRA4 04/09

ExP Protection Module – External Protection

ExP Protection Module – External Protection

Available stages:
ExP[1] ,ExP[2] ,ExP[3] ,ExP[4]

All 4 stages of the external protection ExP[1]...[4] are identically structured.

By using the module External Protection the following can be incorporated into the device function: trip
commands, alarms and blockades of external protection facilities. Devices which are not provided with a
communication interface can be connected to the control system as well.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 441

Page 442
ExP[1]...[n]
name = ExP[1]...[n]
ExP Protection Module – External Protection

name.Trip-I

Please Refer To Diagram: Blockings name.Alarm-I

2 (Stage is not deactivated
and no active blocking
signals)

&
name.Alarm name.Alarm
14
1..n, Assignment List

&
name.Trip name.Trip
1..n, Assignment List

&
name.TripCmd
Please Refer To Diagram: Trip blockings 15
3 (Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. )

EN MRA4 04/09
ExP Protection Module – External Protection

Device Planning Parameters of the Module External Protection

Parameter Description Options Default Menu path
Mode Mode do not use, use [Device planning]
use

Global Protection Parameters of the Module External Protection

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
ExBlo1 External blocking of 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para
the module, if
blocking is activated /Global Prot Para
(allowed) within a /ExP
parameter set and if
the state of the /ExP[1]]
assigned signal is
true.

ExBlo2 External blocking of 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para

the module, if
/Global Prot Para
blocking is activated
(allowed) within a /ExP
parameter set and if
the state of the /ExP[1]]
assigned signal is
true.

ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para

the Trip Command
of the module/the /Global Prot Para
stage, if blocking is /ExP
activated (allowed)
within a parameter /ExP[1]]
set and if the state of
the assigned signal
is true.

Alarm Assignment for 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para

External Alarm
/Global Prot Para
/ExP
/ExP[1]]
Trip External trip of the 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para
CB if the state of the
/Global Prot Para
assigned signal is
true. /ExP
/ExP[1]]

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 443

ExP Protection Module – External Protection

Setting Group Parameters of the Module External Protection

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
Function Permanent activation inactive, inactive [Protection Para
or deactivation of
active /<n>
module/stage.
/ExP
/ExP[1]]
ExBlo Fc Activate (allow) or inactive, inactive [Protection Para
inactivate (disallow)
blocking of the active /<n>
module/stage. This /ExP
parameter is only
effective if a signal is /ExP[1]]
assigned to the
corresponding global
protection
parameter. If the
signal becomes true,
those
modules/stages are
blocked that are
parameterized
"ExBlo Fc=active".

Blo TripCmd Permanent blocking inactive, inactive [Protection Para

of the Trip
active /<n>
Command of the
module/stage. /ExP
/ExP[1]]

ExBlo TripCmd Fc Activate (allow) or inactive, inactive [Protection Para

inactivate (disallow)
blocking of the active /<n>
module/stage. This /ExP
parameter is only
effective if a signal is /ExP[1]]
assigned to the
corresponding global
protection
parameter. If the
signal becomes true,
those
modules/stages are
blocked that are
parameterized
"ExBlo TripCmd
Fc=active".

Page 444 EN MRA4 04/09

ExP Protection Module – External Protection

Module External Protection Input States

Name Description Assignment via
ExBlo1-I Module input state: External [Protection Para
blocking1
/Global Prot Para
/ExP
/ExP[1]]
ExBlo2-I Module input state: External [Protection Para
blocking2
/Global Prot Para
/ExP
/ExP[1]]
ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External [Protection Para
Blocking of the Trip Command
/Global Prot Para
/ExP
/ExP[1]]
Alarm-I Module input state: External Alarm [Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/ExP
/ExP[1]]
Trip-I Module input state: External Trip [Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/ExP
/ExP[1]]

Module External Protection Signals (Output States)

Name Description
active Signal: active
ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
Alarm Signal: External Alarm
Trip Signal: External Trip
TripCmd Signal: External Trip Command

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 445

ExP Protection Module – External Protection

Commissioning: External Protection

Object to be tested
Test of the module External Protection

Necessary means
• Depending on the application

Procedure
Simulate the functionality of the External Protection (Alarm, Trip, Blockings...) by (de-)energizing of the digital
inputs.

Successful test result

All external alarms, external trips and external blockings are correctly recognized and processed by the device.

Page 446 EN MRA4 04/09

CBF-Supervision Module – Circuit Breaker Failure Protection [ANSI 50BF]

CBF-Supervision Module – Circuit Breaker Failure

Protection [ANSI 50BF]
CBF

The CBF Protection is used to detect those tripping commands that had not been executed by the circuit breaker
(if defective for example). If a trip command was not executed that means that the current does not fall below the
set threshold (approx. zero) within a specified time delay, a CB failure has occurred; this will be signaled by an
alarm. Via an output relay this alarm can be passed on to a primary CB (e.g. by feeding to the bus bar).

The CB failure protection will start immediately after a tripping command was issued by the module »Prot«. That
means as soon as any of the protection modules has passed its trip decision on to the »Prot« master module,
the CBF will be started.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 447

Page 448
CBF
name = CBF

CBF.running

name.t-CBF
Please Refer To Diagram: Blockings
2 (Stage is not deactivated and no active blocking
&
t 0 CBF.Alarm
signals)
S 1 14
CBF-Supervision Module – Circuit Breaker Failure Protection [ANSI 50BF]

Please Refer To Diagram: CB R1 1

11 CB.Trip CB

name.I-CBF >

IL1

IL2 &

IL3

EN MRA4 04/09
CBF-Supervision Module – Circuit Breaker Failure Protection [ANSI 50BF]

Device Planning Parameters of the CBF Module

Parameter Description Options Default Menu path
Mode Mode do not use, use [Device planning]
use

Global Protection Parameters of the CBF Module

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
ExBlo1 External blocking of 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para
the module, if
/Global Prot Para
blocking is activated
(allowed) within a /Supervision
parameter set and if
the state of the /CBF]
assigned signal is
true.

ExBlo2 External blocking of 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para

the module, if
blocking is activated /Global Prot Para
(allowed) within a /Supervision
parameter set and if
the state of the /CBF]
assigned signal is
true.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 449

CBF-Supervision Module – Circuit Breaker Failure Protection [ANSI 50BF]

Setting Group Parameters of the CBF Module

In order to prevent a faulty activation of the CBF-Module the alarm time

must be greater than the sum of:

• Close-open-time of the circuit breaker (please refer to Technical Data of

the manufacturer of the circuit Breaker)

• + Tripping delay of the device (please refer to Technical Data)

• + Security margin

• + Operating time

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

Function Permanent activation inactive, inactive [Protection Para
or deactivation of
active /<n>
module/stage.
/Supervision
/CBF]
ExBlo Fc Activate (allow) or inactive, inactive [Protection Para
inactivate (disallow)
active /<n>
blocking of the
module/stage. This /Supervision
parameter is only
effective if a signal is /CBF]
assigned to the
corresponding global
protection
parameter. If the
signal becomes true,
those
modules/stages are
blocked that are
parameterized
"ExBlo Fc=active".

I-CBF > If the pick-up value is 0.00 - 0.10In 0.00In [Protection Para
exceeded, the
/<n>
module/stage will be
started. /Supervision
/CBF]

t-CBF If the delay time is 0.00 - 10.00s 0.20s [Protection Para

expired, an CBF
/<n>
alarm is given out.
/Supervision
/CBF]

Page 450 EN MRA4 04/09

CBF-Supervision Module – Circuit Breaker Failure Protection [ANSI 50BF]

CBF Module Input States

Name Description Assignment via
ExBlo1-I Module input state: External [Protection Para
blocking1
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/CBF]
ExBlo2-I Module input state: External [Protection Para
blocking2
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/CBF]

CBF Module Signals (Output States)

Name Description
active Signal: active
ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
running Signal: CBF-Module started
Alarm Signal: Circuit Breaker Failure

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 451

CBF-Supervision Module – Circuit Breaker Failure Protection [ANSI 50BF]

Commissioning: Circuit Breaker Failure Protection [ANSI 50BF]

The time that is parameterized for the CBF must not be below the CB
control time, otherwise an unwanted operation of the CBF is caused by any
protective trip.

Object to be tested
Test of the circuit breaker failure protection.

Necessary means
• Current source
• May be: ampere meter
• Timer

When testing the applied test current must always be higher than the
tripping threshold »I-LSV«. If the test current falls below the threshold while
the CB is in the OFF-position, no alarm will be generated.

Procedure (single-phase)
For testing the tripping time of the CBF protection a test current has to be impressed which is higher than the
threshold value of one of the current protection modules. When the trip relay that is assigned to the protection
function, picks up, a timer will be started and the time until the CBF is signaled by the corresponding relay will be
measured.

To avoid wiring errors, it should be checked, if the CB in the higher-level system switches off.

The time, measured by the timer, should be in line with the specified tolerances. Alternatively the timer can be
started when the auxiliary voltage is applied and the test current impressed and then stopped when the relay for
the CBF protection picks up. In this case, the previously measured tripping delay has to be subtracted from the
measured time.

Re-connect the control cable to the circuit breaker!

Successful test result

The actual times measured comply with the set-point times. The CB in the higher-level section switches off.

Page 452 EN MRA4 04/09

TCS-Supervision Module – Trip Circuit Supervision ANSI [74TC]

TCS-Supervision Module – Trip Circuit Supervision ANSI

[74TC]
TCS

The trip circuit is monitored by evaluating the auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker. The CB trip circuits
inclusive cable can be monitored by two non-grouped digital inputs. If a circuit is broken an alarm is issued. With
this protection module it is assumed that the CB is provided with auxiliary contacts (CB-open and CB-closed),
allocated to the digital inputs.

In Slot 1 has 2 digital inputs, each of which has a separate root (contact
separation) for the trip circuit supervision.

In this case the trip circuit supply voltage serves also as supply voltage for the digital inputs and so the supply
voltage failure of a trip circuit can be detected directly.

In order to identify a conductor-failure in the trip circuit on the supply line or in the trip coil, the off-coil has to be
looped-in to the supervision circuit.

Via the two digital inputs the auxiliary contacts are checked continuously (»INPUT 1« and »Input 2«) for
»identity« (both open or both closed). If »identity« is identified, the trip circuit is checked for a possible defect
after a set time delay and if necessary the »TCS.ALARM« is issued.

The time delay is to be set in a way that switching actions cannot cause false trips in this module.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 453

TCS-Supervision Module – Trip Circuit Supervision ANSI [74TC]

Connection example: Trip circuit supervision with two CB auxiliary contacts.

TCS.Al
arm
0
t-TCS

t
T

HighPROTEC
≥1
&

&
Input 1

Input 2

position indicator
normal closed
normal open
position indicator
Trip CB

trip coil
L+

L-
TCS

LS

Page 454 EN MRA4 04/09

EN MRA4 04/09
TCS

name = TCS

Please Refer To Diagram: Blockings

2
TCS-Supervision Module – Trip Circuit Supervision ANSI [74TC]

(Stage is not deactivated and no active blocking signals)

name.t-TCS

& TCS.Alarm
CB Pos Detect t 0

CB Managemt.Pos

Page 455
TCS-Supervision Module – Trip Circuit Supervision ANSI [74TC]

Device Planning Parameters of the Trip Circuit Supervision Module

Parameter Description Options Default Menu path
Mode Mode do not use, use [Device planning]
use

Page 456 EN MRA4 04/09

TCS-Supervision Module – Trip Circuit Supervision ANSI [74TC]

Global Protection Parameters of the Trip Circuit Supervision Module

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
ExBlo1 External blocking of 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para
the module, if
/Global Prot Para
blocking is activated
(allowed) within a /Supervision
parameter set and if
the state of the /TCS]
assigned signal is
true.

ExBlo2 External blocking of 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para

the module, if
blocking is activated /Global Prot Para
(allowed) within a /Supervision
parameter set and if
the state of the /TCS]
assigned signal is
true.

CB Pos Detect Criterion by which -.-, - [Protection Para

the Circuit Breaker
CB.Pos /Global Prot Para
Switch Position is to
be detected. /Supervision
/TCS]

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 457

TCS-Supervision Module – Trip Circuit Supervision ANSI [74TC]

Setting Group Parameters of the Trip Circuit Supervision Module

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
Function Permanent activation inactive, inactive [Protection Para
or deactivation of
active /<n>
module/stage.
/Supervision
/TCS]
ExBlo Fc Activate (allow) or inactive, inactive [Protection Para
inactivate (disallow)
blocking of the active /<n>
module/stage. This /Supervision
parameter is only
effective if a signal is /TCS]
assigned to the
corresponding global
protection
parameter. If the
signal becomes true,
those
modules/stages are
blocked that are
parameterized
"ExBlo Fc=active".

t-TCS Tripping delay time 0.10 - 10.00s 0.2s [Protection Para

of the Trip Circuit
/<n>
Supervision
/Supervision
/TCS]

Page 458 EN MRA4 04/09

TCS-Supervision Module – Trip Circuit Supervision ANSI [74TC]

Trip Circuit Supervision Module Input States

Name Description Assignment via
ExBlo1-I Module input state: External [Protection Para
blocking1
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/TCS]
ExBlo2-I Module input state: External [Protection Para
blocking2
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/TCS]
CB Pos Detect-I Module input state: Criterion by [Protection Para
which the Circuit Breaker Switch
/Global Prot Para
Position is to be detected.
/Supervision
/TCS]

Trip Circuit Supervision Module Signals (Output States)

Name Description
active Signal: active
ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
Alarm Signal: Alarm Trip Circuit Supervision

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 459

TCS-Supervision Module – Trip Circuit Supervision ANSI [74TC]

Commissioning: Trip Circuit Supervision for Circuit Breakers [74TC]

For CBs that trip by means of little energy (e.g. via an optocoupler), it has
to be ensured that the current applied by the digital inputs will not cause
false tripping of the CB.

Object to be tested
Test of the trip circuit supervision.

Procedure, part 1
Simulate failure of the control voltage in the power circuits.

Successful test result, part 1

After expiry of »t-TCS« the trip circuit supervision TCS of the device should signal an alarm.

Procedure, part 2
Simulate a broken cable in the CB control circuit.

Successful test result, part 2

After expiry of »t-TCS« the trip circuit supervision TCS of the device should signal an alarm.

Page 460 EN MRA4 04/09

CTS-Supervision Module – Current Transformer Supervision [ANSI 60L]

CTS-Supervision Module – Current Transformer

Supervision [ANSI 60L]
CTS

Wire breaks and failures within measuring circuits cause current transformer failures.
The module »CTS« can detect a failure of the CT if the calculated earth current does not match the measured
one. If an adjustable threshold value (Difference of measured and calculated earth current) is exceeded, a CT
failure can be assumed. This is signaled through a message/alarm.
The precondition is that the conductor currents are measured by the device and the earth current, for instance,
by a ring core type current transformer.

The measuring principles of the circuit supervision are based on comparing the measured and the calculated
residual currents:
In an ideal case these are:

 IL2
 IL1  IL3KI∗
 
IG=3∗I 
0KI∗ IG=0

KI represents a correction factor which takes the different transformation ratio of the phase- and earth current
transformers into account. The device automatically calculates this factor from the rated field parameters, i.e. the
relation between the rated primary and secondary current values of the phase- and earth current transformers.

For compensating the current proportional ratio error of the measuring circuits, the dynamic correction factor Kd
can be used. As a function of the measured max. current this factor is considering the linear rising measuring
error.
The limiting value of the CT supervision is calculated as follows:

∆I = deviation I (rated value)

Kd = correction factor
Imax = current maximum
Limiting value = ∆I + Kd x Imax

Precondition for identifying an error

3∗ I0KI∗IGDelta
 I Kd∗Imax

The evaluation method of the circuit supervision by using factor Kd can be graphically represented as follows:

limit value

Kd*Imax

Imax

If the current is measured in two phases only (for instant only IL1/IL3) or if
there is no separate earth current measuring (e.g. normally via a cable-type

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 461

Page 462
CTS

Please Refer To Diagram: Blockings

2
(Stage is not deactivated and no active blocking signals)

IL1

IL2
CTS-Supervision Module – Current Transformer Supervision [ANSI 60L]

IG
calculated CTS.
IL3 ◊I

Kd
CT), the supervision function should be deactivated.

+ & CTS.Alarm
CTS.t
t 0
Σ
-

IG

EN MRA4 04/09
CTS-Supervision Module – Current Transformer Supervision [ANSI 60L]

Device Planning Parameters of the Current Transformer Supervision

Parameter Description Options Default Menu path
Mode Mode do not use, use [Device planning]
use

Global Protection Parameter of the Current Transformer Supervision

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
ExBlo1 External blocking of 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para
the module, if
blocking is activated /Global Prot Para
(allowed) within a /Supervision
parameter set and if
the state of the /CTS]
assigned signal is
true.

ExBlo2 External blocking of 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para

the module, if
/Global Prot Para
blocking is activated
(allowed) within a /Supervision
parameter set and if
the state of the /CTS]
assigned signal is
true.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 463

CTS-Supervision Module – Current Transformer Supervision [ANSI 60L]

Setting Group Parameters of the Current Transformer Supervision

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
Function Permanent activation or inactive, inactive [Protection Para
deactivation of
active /<n>
module/stage.
/Supervision
/CTS]
ExBlo Fc Activate (allow) or inactivate inactive, inactive [Protection Para
(disallow) blocking of the
module/stage. This active /<n>
parameter is only effective if /Supervision
a signal is assigned to the
corresponding global /CTS]
protection parameter. If the
signal becomes true, those
modules/stages are blocked
that are parameterized
"ExBlo Fc=active".

ΔI In order to prevent faulty 0.10 - 1.00In 0.50In [Protection Para

tripping of phase selective
protection functions that use /<n>
the current as tripping /Supervision
criterion. If the difference of
the measured earth current /CTS]
and the calculated value I0 is
higher than the pick up value
ΔI, an alarm event is
generated after expiring of
the excitation time. In such a
case, a fuse failure, a broken
wire or a faulty measuring
circuit can be assumed.

Alarm delay Alarm delay 0.1 - 9999.0s 1.0s [Protection Para

/<n>
/Supervision
/CTS]
Kd Dynamic correction factor for 0.00 - 0.99 0.00 [Protection Para
the evaluation of the
/<n>
difference between
calculated and measured /Supervision
earth current. This correction
factor allows transformer /CTS]
faults, caused by higher
currents, to be
compensated.

Page 464 EN MRA4 04/09

CTS-Supervision Module – Current Transformer Supervision [ANSI 60L]

Current Transformer Supervision Input States

Name Description Assignment via
ExBlo1-I Module input state: External [Protection Para
blocking1
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/CTS]
ExBlo2-I Module input state: External [Protection Para
blocking2
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/CTS]

Current Transformer Supervision Signals (Outputs States)

Name Description
active Signal: active
ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
Alarm Signal: Alarm Current Transformer Measuring Circuit
Supervision

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 465

CTS-Supervision Module – Current Transformer Supervision [ANSI 60L]

Commissioning: Current Transformer Failure Supervision [ANSI 60L]

Precondition:
1. Measurement of all three phase currents (are applied to the
measuring inputs of the device).
2. The earth current is detected via a cable-type transformer (not in
Holmgreen connection).

Object to be tested
Check of the CT supervision (by comparing the calculated with the measured earth current).

Necessary means
• Three-phase current source

Procedure, part 1
• Set the limiting value of the CTS to »delta I=0.1*In«.
• Feed a three-phase, symmetrical current system (approx. nominal current) to the secondary side.
• Disconnect the current of one phase from one of the measuring inputs (the symmetrical feeding at
secondary side has to be maintained).
• Make sure that the signal »CTS.ALARM« is generated now.

Successful test result, part 1

• The signal »CTS.ALARM« is generated.

Procedure, part 2
• Feed a three-phase, symmetrical current system (approx. nominal current) to the secondary side.
• Feed a current that is higher than the threshold value for the measuring circuit supervision to the earth
current measuring input.
• Ascertain that the signal »CTS.ALARM« is generated now.

Successful test result, part 2

The signal »CTS.ALARM« is generated.

Page 466 EN MRA4 04/09

VTS-Supervision Module - Voltage Transformer Supervision [ANSI 60FL]

VTS-Supervision Module - Voltage Transformer

Supervision [ANSI 60FL]
Available stages:
VTS

Supervision of the voltage transformers (VTs) by a digital input

The module »VTS« is capable of detecting a fuse failure at the secondary side of the VTs as long as the
automatic circuit breakers of the VTs are connected with the device via a digital input and if this input is assigned
to the module »VTS«.

Supervision of the VTs by comparing the measured and calculated residual voltage
The module »VTS« can detect a VT failure if the calculated residual voltage does not match the measured one.
As a precondition, however the phase voltages (not the line-to-line voltage) are connected to the device and so
the residual voltage can be calculated. It is furthermore necessary that the residual voltage is actually being
measured by means of the VTs auxiliary windings (e-n).

If an adjustable threshold value (difference between measured and calculated residual voltage) has been
exceeded, a VT failure can be assumed. This will then be signaled by an alarm/message.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 467

Page 468
VTS

VTS.Ex Fuse Fail VT-I

VTS.Ex Fuse Fail EVT-I

VTS.Ex Fuse Fail VT
&
1..n, Assignment List VTS.Ex FF VT

VTS.Ex Fuse Fail EVT

1..n, Assignment List

&
VTS.Ex FF EVT

VL1
&
VL2 VE VTS.Alarm ? V
calculated
VL3
VTS.
i V
+
VTS.t
Σ &
t 0

-
VE measured
VTS-Supervision Module - Voltage Transformer Supervision [ANSI 60FL]

VT con=Phase to Earth
&

EVT con=measured >1

&
VTS.Alarm
12

Please Refer To Diagram: Blockings

2 (Stage is not deactivated and no active blocking signals)

EN MRA4 04/09
VTS-Supervision Module - Voltage Transformer Supervision [ANSI 60FL]

Device Planning Parameters of the Voltage Transformer Module

Parameter Description Options Default Menu path
Mode Mode do not use, use [Device planning]
use

Global Protection Parameters of the Voltage Transformer Supervision

Module
Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
ExBlo1 External blocking of 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para
the module, if
blocking is activated /Global Prot Para
(allowed) within a /Supervision
parameter set and if
the state of the /VTS]
assigned signal is
true.

ExBlo2 External blocking of 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para

the module, if
/Global Prot Para
blocking is activated
(allowed) within a /Supervision
parameter set and if
the state of the /VTS]
assigned signal is
true.

Ex Fuse Fail VT Fuse failure of 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para

voltage transformers
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/VTS]
Ex Fuse Fail EVT Fuse failure earth 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para
voltage transformer
/Global Prot Para
if the state of the
assigned signal is /Supervision
true.
/VTS]

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 469

VTS-Supervision Module - Voltage Transformer Supervision [ANSI 60FL]

Setting Group Parameters of the Voltage Transformer Module

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
Function Permanent activation inactive, inactive [Protection Para
or deactivation of
active /<n>
module/stage.
/Supervision
/VTS]
ExBlo Fc Activate (allow) or inactive, inactive [Protection Para
inactivate (disallow)
blocking of the active /<n>
module/stage. This /Supervision
parameter is only
effective if a signal is /VTS]
assigned to the
corresponding global
protection
parameter. If the
signal becomes true,
those
modules/stages are
blocked that are
parameterized
"ExBlo Fc=active".

ΔV In order to prevent 0.20 - 1.00Vn 0.50Vn [Protection Para

faulty tripping of
/<n>
phase selective
protection functions /Supervision
that use the voltage
as tripping criterion. /VTS]
If the difference of
the residual voltage
and the calculated
value V0 is higher
than the pick up
value ΔV, an alarm
event effected after
the excitation time.
In such a case, the
existence of a fuse
failure, a broken wire
or a faulty measuring
circuit can be
assumed.

Alarm delay Alarm delay 0.1 - 9999.0s 1.0s [Protection Para

/<n>
/Supervision
/VTS]

Page 470 EN MRA4 04/09

VTS-Supervision Module - Voltage Transformer Supervision [ANSI 60FL]

Voltage Transformer Supervision Module Input States

Name Description Assignment via
Ex Fuse Fail VT-I Module input state: External fuse [Protection Para
failure voltage transformers
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/VTS]
Ex Fuse Fail EVT-I Module input state: External fuse [Protection Para
failure earth voltage transformer
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/VTS]
ExBlo1-I Module input state: External [Protection Para
blocking1
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/VTS]
ExBlo2-I Module input state: External [Protection Para
blocking2
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/VTS]

Voltage Transformer Module Signals (Output States)

Name Description
active Signal: active
ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
Alarm ΔV Signal: Alarm ΔV Voltage Transformer Measuring
Circuit Supervision
Alarm Signal: Alarm Voltage Transformer Measuring Circuit
Supervision
Ex FF VT Signal: Alarm Fuse Failure Voltage Transformers
Ex FF EVT Signal: Alarm Fuse Failure Earth Voltage
Transformers

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 471

VTS-Supervision Module - Voltage Transformer Supervision [ANSI 60FL]

Commissioning: Voltage Transformer Supervision (via DI) [ANSI 60FL]

Object to be tested
Check if the auto fuse failure is correctly identified by the device.

Procedure
Disconnect the automatic circuit breaker of the VTs (all poles to be dead)

Successful test result

• The state of the respective digital input changes.

• If a LED is allocated to the auto fuse failure, this is indicated accordingly.

Page 472 EN MRA4 04/09

VTS-Supervision Module - Voltage Transformer Supervision [ANSI 60FL]

Commissioning: Voltage Transformer Failure [ANSI 60FL]

Precondition:
1. The residual voltage is measured via the residual voltage measuring
input.
2. Phase voltages are applied to the voltage measuring inputs (no line-
to-line voltages)

Calculation of the residual voltage is only possible, if phase voltages (star)

were applied to the voltage measuring inputs and »VT con = phase-to-
neutral« and »EVT con=calculated« were set in the field parameters.

Object to be tested
Check of the VT supervision (by comparing the calculated residual voltage with the measured one). It is to be
tested whether VE=3xV0.

Necessary means
• 4-channel voltage source (3+1)

Procedure, part 1
• Set the limiting value of the VT supervision to »ΔV=0.1*Vn«.
• Feed a three-phase, symmetrical voltage system (nominal voltage) in to the secondary side.
• Disconnect the voltage of one phase at one of the measuring inputs (symmetrical feeding at the
secondary side has to be maintained).
• Make sure that the signal »VTS.ALARM« is generated now.

Successful test result, part 1

The signal »VTS.ALARM« is generated.

Procedure, part 2
• Feed a three-phase, symmetrical voltage system to the secondary side (nominal current).
• Feed a voltage of about 20% Un in to the measuring input of the residual voltage.
• Make sure that the signal »VTS.ALARM« is generated now.

Successful test result, part 2

The signal »VTS.ALARM« is generated.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 473

Device Parameters

Device Parameters
Sys

Date and Time

In menu »Device parameters/Date/Time« you can set date and time.

Synchronize Date and Time via Smart View

• In case Smart view is not running – please start it.

• If device data has not been loaded yet – click »Receive Data From The Device« in menu »Device«

• Double click the »Device parameters« icon in the navigation tree.

• Double click the »Date/time-icon« within the operational data.

• Out of the working window you can now synchronize date and time of the device with your PC i.e. That
means, that the device takes over date and time from your PC.

Version
Within this menu »Device parameters/Version« you can obtain information on the soft- and hardware version.

Version via Smart view

Within this menu »File/Properties« you can obtain detailed information on the currently opened file like e.g. soft-
and hardware version....

In order to be able to transmit a parameter file (e.g. offline created) into the
device the following issues must comply:

• Type Code (written on the top of the device/type label) and

• Version of the device model (can be found in menu

[Device Parameters\Version].

Page 474 EN MRA4 04/09

Device Parameters

TCP/IP Settings
Within menu »Device Para / TCP/IP« the TCP/IP settings have to be set.

The first-time setting of the TCP/IP Parameters can be done at the panel (HMI) only.

Establishing a connection via TCP/IP to the device is only possible if your

device is equipped with an Ethernet Interface (RJ45).

Contact your IT administrator in order to establish the network connection.

Set the TCP/IP Parameters

Call up »Device parameter/TCP/IP« at the HMI (panel) and set the following parameters:

• TCP/IP address

• Subnetmask

• Gateway

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 475

Device Parameters

Direct Commands of the System Module

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
Ack LED All acknowledgeable inactive, inactive [Operation
LEDs will be
active /Acknowledge]
acknowledged.

Ack BO All acknowledgeable inactive, inactive [Operation

binary output relays
active /Acknowledge]
will be
acknowledged.

Ack Scada SCADA will be inactive, inactive [Operation

acknowledged.
active /Acknowledge]

Ack BO LED Scd Reset the binary inactive, inactive [Operation

TCmd output relays, LEDs,
SCADA and the Trip active /Acknowledge]
Command.

Reboot Rebooting the no, no [Service

device.
yes /General]

CAUTION, rebooting the device manually will release the Supervision

Contact.

Page 476 EN MRA4 04/09

Device Parameters

Global Protection Parameters of the System

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path
PSet-Switch Switching Parameter Set PS1, PS1 [Protection Para
PS2, /PSet-Switch]
PS3,
PS4,
PSS via Inp fct,
PSS via Scada
PS1: activated by This Setting Group will be 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para
the active one if: The
Parameter Setting Group /PSet-Switch]
Switch is set to "Switch via
Input" and the other three
input functions are inactive
at the same time. In case
that there is more than one
input function active, no
Parameter Setting Group
Switch will be executed. In
case all input functions are
inactive, the device will keep
working with the Setting
Group that was activated
lastly.

Only available if: PSet-

Switch = PSS via Inp fct
PS2: activated by This Setting Group will be 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para
the active one if: The
Parameter Setting Group /PSet-Switch]
Switch is set to "Switch via
Input" and the other three
input functions are inactive
at the same time. In case
that there is more than one
input function active, no
Parameter Setting Group
Switch will be executed. In
case all input functions are
inactive, the device will keep
working with the Setting
Group that was activated
lastly.

Only available if: PSet-

Switch = PSS via Inp fct

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 477

Device Parameters

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

PS3: activated by This Setting Group will be 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para
the active one if: The
Parameter Setting Group /PSet-Switch]
Switch is set to "Switch via
Input" and the other three
input functions are inactive
at the same time. In case
that there is more than one
input function active, no
Parameter Setting Group
Switch will be executed. In
case all input functions are
inactive, the device will keep
working with the Setting
Group that was activated
lastly.

Only available if: PSet-

Switch = PSS via Inp fct
PS4: activated by This Setting Group will be 1..n, Assignment List - [Protection Para
the active one if: The
Parameter Setting Group /PSet-Switch]
Switch is set to "Switch via
Input" and the other three
input functions are inactive
at the same time. In case
that there is more than one
input function active, no
Parameter Setting Group
Switch will be executed. In
case all input functions are
inactive, the device will keep
working with the Setting
Group that was activated
lastly.

Only available if: PSet-

Switch = PSS via Inp fct
Ack LED All acknowledgeable LEDs 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para
will be acknowledged if the
state of the assigned signal /Ex Acknowledge]
becomes true.

Ack BO All acknowledgeable binary 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para

output relays will be
/Ex Acknowledge]
acknowledged if the state of
the assigned signal
becomes true.

Ack Scada SCADA will be 1..n, Assignment List - [Device Para

acknowledged if the state of
/Ex Acknowledge]
the assigned signal
becomes true.

Page 478 EN MRA4 04/09

Device Parameters

Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

Scaling Display of the measured Per unit values, Per unit [Device Para
values as primary, values
Primary values, /Measurem Display]
secondary or per unit values
Secondary values

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 479

Device Parameters

System Module Input States

Name Description Assignment via
Ack LED-I Module input state: LEDs [Device Para
acknowledgment by digital input
/Ex Acknowledge]
Ack BO-I Module input state: [Device Para
Acknowledgment of the binary
/Ex Acknowledge]
Output Relays
Ack Scada-I Module input state: Acknowledge [Device Para
Scada via digital input. The replica
/Ex Acknowledge]
that SCADA has got from the
device is to be reset.
PS1-I State of the module input [Protection Para
respectively of the signal, that
/PSet-Switch]
should activate this Parameter
Setting Group.
PS2-I State of the module input [Protection Para
respectively of the signal, that
/PSet-Switch]
should activate this Parameter
Setting Group.
PS3-I State of the module input [Protection Para
respectively of the signal, that
/PSet-Switch]
should activate this Parameter
Setting Group.
PS4-I State of the module input [Protection Para
respectively of the signal, that
should activate this Parameter /PSet-Switch]
Setting Group.

Page 480 EN MRA4 04/09

Device Parameters

System Module Signals

Name Description
Reboot Signal: Rebooting the device: 1=Restart initiated by
power supply; 2=Restart initiated by the user; 3=Set on
defaults (Super Reset); 4=Restart by the debugger;
5=Restart because of configuration change; 6=General
failure; 7=Restart initiated by System Abort (host side);
8=Restart initiated by watchdog timeout (host side);
9=Restart initiated by System Abort (dspside);
10=Restart initiated by watchdog timeout (dspside);
11=Power supply failure (short term interruption) or
power supply voltage to low; 12=illegal memory
access.
Act Set Signal: Active Parameter Set
PS 1 Signal: Parameter Set 1
PS 2 Signal: Parameter Set 2
PS 3 Signal: Parameter Set 3
PS 4 Signal: Parameter Set 4
PSS manual Signal: Manual Switch over of a Parameter Set
PSS via Scada Signal: Parameter Set Switch via Scada
PSS via Inp fct Signal: Parameter Set Switch via input function
min 1 param changed Signal: At least one parameter has been changed
Param to be saved Number of parameters to be saved. 0 means that all
parameter changes are overtaken.
Ack LED Signal: LEDs acknowledgment
Ack BO Signal: Acknowledgment of the Binary Outputs
Ack Counter Signal: Reset of all Counters
Ack Scada Signal: Acknowledge Scada
Ack TripCmd Signal: Reset Trip Command
Ack LED-HMI Signal: LEDs acknowledgment :HMI
Ack BO-HMI Signal: Acknowledgment of the Binary Outputs :HMI
Ack Counter-HMI Signal: Reset of all Counters :HMI
Ack Scada-HMI Signal: Acknowledge Scada :HMI
Ack TripCmd-HMI Signal: Reset Trip Command :HMI
Ack LED-Sca Signal: LEDs acknowledgment :SCADA
Ack BO-Sca Signal: Acknowledgment of the Binary
Outputs :SCADA
Ack Counter-Sca Signal: Reset of all Counters :SCADA
Ack Scada-Sca Signal: Acknowledge Scada :SCADA
Ack TripCmd-Sca Signal: Reset Trip Command :SCADA

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 481

Device Parameters

Special Values of the System Module

Value Description Menu path
Build Build [Device Para
/Version]
Version Version [Device Para
/Version]
Operating hours Cr Operating hours counter [Operation
/Count and RevData
/Sys]

Page 482 EN MRA4 04/09

Commissioning

Commissioning
Before starting work on an opened switchboard it is imperative that the complete switchboard is dead and the
following 5 safety regulations are always met: ,

Safety precautions:
• Disconnect from the power supply
• Secure against reconnection
• Verify if the equipment is dead
• Connect to ground and short-circuit all phases
• Cover or safeguard all live adjacent parts

The secondary circuit of a current transformer must never be opened

during operation. The prevailing high voltages are dangerous to life.

Even when the auxiliary voltage is switched off, it is likely that there are still
hazardous voltages at the component connections.
All locally applicable national and international installation and safety
regulations for working at electrical power installations must always to be
followed (e.g. VDE, EN, DIN, IEC).

Prior to the initial voltage connection, the following must be guaranteed:

• Correct grounding of the device

• That all signal circuits are tested
• That all control circuits are tested
• Transformer wiring is checked
• Correct rating of the CTs
• Correct burden of the CTs
• That the operational conditions are in line with the Technical Data
• Correct rating of the transformer protection
• Function of the transformer fuses
• Correct wiring of all digital inputs
• Polarity and capacity of the supply voltage
• Correct wiring of the analogue inputs and outputs

The permissible deviations of measuring values and device adjustment are

dependent on the technical data/tolerances.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 483

Commissioning

Commissioning/Protection Test

Putting into operation/Protection test must be carried out by authorized and

qualified personnel. Before the device is put into operation the related
documentation has to be read and understood.

With any test of the protection functions the following has to be checked:

• Is activation/tripping saved in the event recorder?

• Is tripping saved in the fault recorder?
• Is tripping saved in the disturbance recorder?
• Are all signals/messages correctly generated?
• Do all general parameterized blocking functions work properly?
• Do all temporary parameterized (via DI) blocking functions work
properly?
• To enable checks on all LEDs and relay functions, these have to
be provided with the relevant alarm and tripping functions of the
respective protection functions/elements. This has to be tested in
practical operation.

Check of all temporary blockings (via digital inputs):

• In order to avoid malfunctions, all blockings related to

tripping/non-tripping of protection function have to be tested. The
test can be very complex and should therefore be performed by
the same people who set up the protection concept.

Check of all general trip blockings:

• All general trip blockings have to be tested.

Prior to the initial operation of the protection device all tripping times and
values shown in the adjustment list have to be confirmed by a secondary
test

Any description of functions, parameters, inputs or outputs that does not

match the device in hand, can be ignored.

Page 484 EN MRA4 04/09

Commissioning

Putting out of Operation – Plug out the Relay

Warning! Dismounting the relay will lead to a loss of the protection
functionality. Ensure that there is a back-up protection. If you are not aware
of the consequences of dismounting the device – stop! Don´t start.

Inform SCADA before you start.

Switch-off the power supply.

Ensure, that the cabinet is dead and that there are no voltages that could
lead to personal injury.

Plug-out the terminals at the rear-side of the device. Do not pull any cable –
pull on the plugs! If it is stuck use for example a screw driver.

Fasten the cables and terminals in the cabinet by means of cable clips to
ensure that no accidental electrical connections are caused.

Hold the device at the front-side while opening the mounting nuts.

Remove the device carefully out of the cabinet.

In case no other device is to be mounted or replaced cover/close the cut-

out in the front-door.

Close the cabinet.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 485

Service

Service
General
Within this menu you can initiate a reboot of the device.

Page 486 EN MRA4 04/09

Self Supervision

Self Supervision
HighPROTEC devices are continuously monitored and supervised through different methods during normal
operation as well as during start-up phase.

Results of this supervision may be:

• messages appearing within event-recorder (from release 1.2 or later),

• indications within the display or Smart view,
• corrective measures,
• disabling of protection functions,
• restart of the device
•
or any combination out of these.

In case of failures that cannot be corrected immediately three restarts within 20 minutes are accepted before the
device will be deactivated. The device should be removed in for service in such case to ensure continuous
correct operation. Contact data and address can be found at the end of this manual.
In case of any failures the recorders of the device should be left untouched to ensure an easy diagnosis and
proper repair at the factory. Besides the records and visible indications to the customer there exists internal
information about failures. These allow service personnel to make a detailed analysis of files with failure reports,
at least at factory site.

Self supervision is applied by different functions at different cyclic or noncyclic timings to the following parts and
functions of the device:

• faultless cyclic execution of software,

• functional capability of memory boards,
• consistency of data,
• functional capability of hardware sub-assemblies and
• faultless operation of the measuring unit.

Faultless cyclic operation of software is supervised by timing analysis and checking results of different functions.
Errors of the software function (watchdog function) lead to restarting the device and switching off the self-
supervision relay (life-contact). Also the System-OK LED will blink red, after three unsuccessful attempts to
restart the device within a time-period of 20 minutes.

The main processor cyclically monitors the operation of the signal processor and initiates corrective actions or
restart of the device in case of faulty operation.

Data and files are generally secured against unintended overwriting or faulty changes by checksums.

The measuring unit continuously checks the measured data by comparing received data with data from a
second channel sampled in parallel.

Monitoring of the auxiliary voltage is done by reset-IC's. If the voltage of one of the different supply circuits falls
below a certain threshold a restart of the device is initiated. There are three major supply groups (24 V, 3.3 V
and 1.6 V), each of them being monitored separately and forcing the processor to reset (stop of the device) until
the voltage again reaches nominal value. If the voltage staggers around the threshold the device also starts
again after 5 s.

Independent of these separate monitoring functions the intermediate voltage circuit is buffered for
100 ms until all important and relevant operational and fault-data have been saved and the device initiates a
restart.

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 487

Self Supervision

Error messages / -codes

After a reboot of the device the reason for rebooting will be displayed under
[Operation/Status Display/Sys/Reset].
For more information about the reboot reason please follow this chapter.

The reboot will also be logged within the event recorder. Rebooting causes an event named: Sys.reboot.

Numerical reboot codes:

Error messages / -codes

1. Reboot after clean switching off of the device normal reboot after clean shut down of the device.
2. Reboot by user command user-initiated reboot through panel-command.
3. Super reset: reset to factory settings
4. Restart by debugger;WW-SEG internally for system-analysis purpose.
5. Restart because of configuration changes.
6. General failure: reboot without definite reason.
7. Reboot by SW-system abort (HOST-side); summary of several reboot reasons detected by
software, i.e. wrong pointer, corrupted files etc.
8. Reboot by watchdog timeout (HOST-side);signaling if the protection-class-task hangs for more
than 800 ms.
9. Reboot by system abort (DSP-side); summary of several reboot reasons detected by software,
i.e. wrong pointer, DSP-side.
10. Reboot by watchdog timeout (DS-side);appears when DSP sequence needs longer than 3 ms for
one cycle.
11. Loss of auxiliary voltage or low voltage reboot after loss of auxiliary voltage or voltage dropping
below reboot-level but not becoming zero.
12. Faulty memory access: message of MMU (memory mapping unit) that prohibited memory access
has occurred.

Page 488 EN MRA4 04/09

Technical Data

Technical Data

Climatic Environmental Conditions

Storage Temperature: -25°C up to +70°C (-13°F to 158°F)
Operating Temperature: 0°C up to +55°C (32°F to 131°F)
Permissible Humidity at Ann. Average: <75% rel. (on 56d up to 95% rel.)
Permissible Installation Altitude: <2000 m (6561.67 ft) above sea level
If 4000 m (13123.35 ft) altitude apply a changed classification of
the operating and test voltages may be necessary.

Degree of Protection EN 60529

HMI front panel with seal IP54
HMI front panel without seal IP50
Rear side terminals IP20

Routine Test
Insulation test acc. to IEC60255-5: All tests to be carried out against earth and other input- and
output circuits
Aux. voltage supply, digital inputs, 2.5 kV (eff) / 50 Hz
current measuring inputs, signal relay
outputs:
Voltage measuring inputs: 3.0 kV (eff) / 50 Hz
All wire-bound communication interfaces: 1.5 kV DC

Housing
Housing B2: height/-width 173 mm (6.811” / 4 U)/ 212.7 mm (8.374” / 42 HP)
Housing depth (incl. terminals): 208 mm (8.189”)
Material, housing: Aluminum extruded section
Material, front panel: Aluminum/Foil front
Mounting position: Horizontal (±45° around the X-axis must be permitted)

Weight: MRA4 housing B2: approx. 4.2 kg (9.259 lb)

Plug-in Connectors with Integrated Short-Circuiter

(Conventional Current Inputs)
Nominal current: 1 A and 5 A
Continuous loading capacity: 4 x In/continuously
Overcurrent withstand: 30 x In/10 s
100 x In/1 s
250 x In/10 ms (1 half-wave)
Screws: M4, captive type acc. to VDEW
Connection cross-section: 1 x or 2 x 2.5 mm² (2 x AWG 14) with wire end ferrule
1 x or 2 x 4.0 mm² (2 x AWG 12) with ring cable sleeve or cable
sleeve
1 x or 2 x 6 mm² (2 x AWG 10) with ring cable sleeve or cable
sleeve:

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 489

Technical Data

Voltage Supply
Aux. Voltage: 24V - 270 V DC/48 - 230 V AC (-20/+10%)
Buffer time in case of supply failure: >= 50 ms at minimal aux. voltage
communication is permitted to be interrupted
Max. permissible making current: 18 A peak value for <0.25 ms
12 A peak value for <1 ms

The voltage supply must be protected by a fuse of:

• 2,5 A time-lag miniature fuse 5x20 mm (approx. 1/5” x 0.8”) according to IEC 60127
• 3,5 A time-lag miniature fuse 6,3x32 mm (approx. 1/4” x 1 1/4”) according to UL 248-14

Power Consumption
Power supply range: Power consumption Max. power consumption
in idle mode
19-300 V DC: 7W 13 W
40-250 V AC 7 VA 13 VA
(for frequencies of 40-70 Hz):

Real Time Clock

Running reserve of the real time clock: 1 year min.

Display
Display type: LCD with LED background illumination
Resolution graphics display: 128 x 64 pixel

LED-Type: Two colored: red/green

Number of LEDs, Housing B2: 15

Page 490 EN MRA4 04/09

Technical Data

Digital Inputs
Max. input voltage: 300 V DC/270 V AC
Input current: <4 mA
Reaction time: <20 ms
Fallback time: <30 ms

(Safe state of the digital inputs)

4 Switching thresholds: Un = 24 V DC, 48 V DC, 60 V DC,

110 V AC/DC, 230 V AC/DC
Un = 24 V DC:
Switching threshold 1 ON: min. 19.2 V DC
Switching threshold 1 OFF: max. 9.6 V DC
Un = 48 V/60V DC:
Switching threshold 2 ON: Min. 42.6 V DC
Switching threshold 2 OFF: max. 21.3 V DC
Un = 110 V AC/DC:
Switching threshold 3 ON: min. 88.0 V DC/88.0 V AC
Switching threshold 3 OFF: max. 44.0 V DC/44.0 V AC
Un = 230 V AC/DC:
Switching threshold 4 ON: min. 184 V DC/184 V AC
Switching threshold 4 OFF max. 92 V DC/92 V AC
Terminals: Screw-type terminals

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 491

Technical Data

Current and Earth Current Measurement

Nominal currents: 1A/5A
Max. measuring range: up to 40 x In (phase currents)
up to 25 x In (earth current standard)
up to 2.5 x In (earth current sensitive)
Continuous loading capacity: 4 x In/continuously
Overcurrent proof: 30 x In/10 s
100 x In/1 s
250 x In/10 ms (1 half-wave)
Power consumption: Phase current inputs:
at In = 1A S = 0.15 mVA
at In = 5A S = 0.15 mVA

Earth current input:

at In = 1A S = 0.35 mVA
at In = 5A S = 0.35 mVA
Frequency range: 50 Hz / 60 Hz ±10%
Terminals: Screw-type terminals with integrated short-circuiters (contacts)

Voltage and Residual Voltage Measurement

Nominal voltages: 100 V/110 V/230 V/400 V (can be parameterized)
Max. measuring range: 2 x nominal voltage
Continuous loading capacity: 2 x nominal voltage (800V AC)
Power consumption: at Vn = 100 V S = 0.1 mVA
at Vn = 110 V S = 0.1 mVA
at Vn = 230 V S = 0.4 mVA
at Vn = 400 V S = 1.0 mVA
Frequency range: 50 Hz or 60 Hz ±10%
Terminals: Screw-type terminals

Frequency Measurement
Nominal frequencies: 50 Hz / 60 Hz

Page 492 EN MRA4 04/09

Technical Data

Binary Output Relays

Continuous current: 5 A AC/DC
Max. Switch-on current: 25 A AC/ 25 A dc upt to 30 V for 4 s
30 A / 230 Vac according to ANSI IEEE Std C37.90-2005
30 A / 250 Vdc according to ANSI IEEE Std C37.90-2005
Max. breaking current: 5 A AC up to 125 V AC
5 A DC up to 30 V (resistive)
0.3 A DC at 300 V
Max. switching voltage: 250 V AC/250 V DC
Switching capacity: 1250 VA
Contact type: 1 changeover contact
Terminals: Screw-type terminals

Supervision Contact (SC)

Continuous current:: 5 A at 120/240 V AC or 30 V DC

Max. Switch-on current: 15 A at 120/240 V AC or 30 V DC (max. 4s)
Max. breaking current: 5 A at 120/240 Vac or 30 Vdc
0,4 A at 125 V DC
Contact type: 1 changeover contact
Terminals: Screw-type terminals

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 493

Technical Data

Time Synchronization IRIG

Nominal input voltage: 5V
Connection: Screw-type terminals (twisted pair)

Front Interface RS232

Baud rates: 115200 Baud
Handshake: RTS and CTS
Connection: 9-pole D-Sub plug

RS485
Master/Slave: Slave
Connection: 9-pole D-Sub socket
(external terminating resistors/in D-Sub)
or 6 screw-clamping terminals RM 3.5 mm (138 MIL)
(terminating resistors internal)
or fiber optic connection (ST plug)

In case that the RS485 interface is realized via terminals, the

communication cable has to be shielded. The shielding has to be fixed at
the screw that is marked with the ground symbol (rear side of the device).

Boot phase
After switching on the power supply the protection will be available in approximately 45 seconds. After
approximately 80 seconds the boot phase is completed (HMI and Communication initialized).

Page 494 EN MRA4 04/09

Standards

Standards
Design Standards
Generic standard EN 61000-6-2
EN 61000-6-3
Product standard IEC 60255-6
EN 50178
UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)
CSA C22.2 No. 14-95 (Industrial Control Equipment)
ANSI C37.90

High Voltage Tests (IEC 60255-6)

High frequency interference test
IEC 60255-22-1 Within one circuit 1 kV/2 s
class 3
Circuit to earth 2.5 kV/2 s

Circuit to circuit 2.5 kV/2 s

Insulation voltage test

IEC 60255-5 All circuits to other circuits and 2.5 kV (eff.)/50Hz, 1 min.
EN 50178 exposed conductive parts
Except interfaces 1,5 kV DC, 1 min.

and Voltage measuring input 3 kV (eff.)/50 Hz, 1 min.

Impulse voltage test

IEC 60255-5 5 kV/0.5J, 1.2/50 µs

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 495

Standards

EMC Immunity Tests

Fast transient disturbance immunity test (Burst)

IEC 60255-22-4 Power supply, mains inputs ±4 kV, 2.5 kHz
IEC 61000-4-4
class 4
Other in- and outputs ±2 kV, 5 kHz

Surge immunity test

IEC 61000-4-5 Within one circuit 2 kV
class 4
Circuit to earth 4 kV

Page 496 EN MRA4 04/09

Standards

Electrical discharge immunity test

IEC 60255-22-2 Air discharge 8 kV
IEC 61000-4-2
class 3
Contact discharge 6 kV

Radiated radio-frequency electromagnetic field immunity test

IEC 61000-4-3 35 V/m
class X
ANSI C37.90.2

Immunity to conducted disturbances induced by radio frequency fields

IEC 61000-4-6 10 V
class 3

Power frequency magnetic field immunity test

IEC 61000-4-8 continues 30 A/m
class 4
3 sec 300 A/m

EMC Emission Tests

Radio interference suppression test

IEC/CISPR11 Limit value class B

Radio interference radiation test

IEC/CISPR11 Limit value class B

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 497

Standards

Environmental Tests

Classification:
IEC 60068-1 Climatic 0/055/56
classification

IEC 60721-3-1 Classification of ambient conditions 1K5/1B1/1C1L/1S1/1M2

(Storage) but min. -25°C
IEC 60721-3-2 Classification of ambient conditions 2K3/2B1/2C1/2S1/2M2
(Transportation)
IEC 60721-3-3 Classification of ambient conditions 3K6/3B1/3C1/3S1/3M2 but min. 0°C
(Stationary use at weatherprotected and 3K8H for 2 h
locations)

Test Ad: Cold

IEC 60068-2-1 Temperature -20°C
test duration 16 h

Test Bd: Dry Heat

IEC 60068-2-2 Temperature 55°C
Relative humidity <50%
test duration 72 h

Test Cab: Damp Heat (steady state)

IEC 60068-2-78 Temperature 40°C
Relative humidity 93%
test duration 56 d

Test Db: Damp Heat (cyclic)

IEC 60068-2-30 Temperature 55°C
Relative humidity 95%
Cycles (12 + 12-hour) 2

Page 498 EN MRA4 04/09

Standards

Mechanical Tests
Test Fc: Vibration response test
IEC 60068-2-6 (10 Hz – 59 Hz) 0.035 mm
IEC 60255-21-1 Displacement
class 1
(59Hz – 150Hz) 0.5 gn
Acceleration
Number of cycles in each axis 1

Test Fc: Vibration endurance test

IEC 60068-2-6 (10 Hz – 150 Hz) 1.0 gn
IEC 60255-21-1 Acceleration
class 1
Number of cycles in each axis 20

Test Ea: Shock tests

IEC 60068-2-27 Shock response test 5 gn, 11 ms, 3 impulses in each
IEC 60255-21-2 direction
class 1
Shock resistance test 15 gn, 11 ms, 3 impulses in each
direction

Test Eb: Shockendurance test

IEC 60068-2-29 Shock endurance test 10 gn, 16 ms, 1000 impulses in each
IEC 60255-21-2 direction
class 1

Test Fe: Earthquake test

IEC 60068-3-3 Single axis earthquake vibration test 3 – 7 Hz: Horizontal 10 mm,
KTA 3503 1 cycle each axis
IEC 60255-21-3

class 2 7 – 35 Hz Horizontal: 2 gn,

1 cycle each axis

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 499

Tolerances

Tolerances
It has to be observed, that the set pickup and release values (hysteresis) including tolerances, are always within
the permissible measuring range.

Real Time Clock Tolerances

Resolution: 1 ms
Tolerance: <1 minute / month (+20°C)
<±1ms if synchronized via IRIG-B

Measured Values Tolerances

Phase and Earth Current Measuring

Max measuring range: up to 40 x In (phase currents)

up to 25 x In (Earth current standard)
up to 2.5 x In (Earth current sensitive)

Please note: The precision does not depend on the nominal

value but is referenced to 100 mA (with In =1 A)
respectively. 500 mA (with In = 5 A)

Frequency range: 50 Hz / 60 Hz ± 10%

Accuracy: Class 0,5
Amplitude error if I < 1 x IN: ±0.5% of the rated value
Amplitude error if I > 1 x IN < 2 x IN: ±0.5% of the measured value
Amplitude error if I > 2 x IN: ±1.0% of the measured value
Resolution: 0.01 A

Harmonics up to 20% 3rd harmonic ±1%

up to 20% 5th harmonic ±1%

Frequency influence <±2% / Hz in the range of ±5 Hz of

the parameterized nominal frequency

Temperature influence <±1% within the range of 0°C up to +55°C

Page 500 EN MRA4 04/09

Tolerances

Phase-to-earth and Residual Voltage Measurement

Nominal voltage (Vn): 100 V / 110 V / 230 V / 400 V (parameterizable)
Max measuring range: 2 x nominal value (Vn)
Frequency range: 50 Hz or 60 Hz ±10%
Precision: Class 0,5
Amplitude error for V<Vn: ±0.5% (of the nominal value)
Amplitude error for V>Vn: ±0.5% (of the nominal value)
Resolution: 0.1 V

Harmonics up to 20% 3rd harmonic ±1%

up to 20% 5th harmonic ±1%

Frequency influence < ±2% / Hz in the range of ±5 Hz of

the parameterized nominal frequency

Temperature influence <±1% within the range of 0°C up to +55°C

Frequency measurement
Nominal frequency: 50 Hz / 60 Hz
Precision: ±0.05% of fn within the range of 40-70 Hz
Voltage dependency frequency acquisition of 5 V – 800 V

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 501

Tolerances

Protection Stages Tolerances

Note:
The tripping delay relates to the time between alarm and trip. The tolerance of the operating time relates to the
time between the measured value has exceeded the threshold until the protection stage is alarmed.

Overcurrent protection stages: I[x] Tolerance

I MTA ±2° at I>0.1 x In

und V> 0.1 x Vn
I> ±1.5% of the setting value resp. 1% In
resetting ratio 97% or 0.5% x In
t DEFT
±1% resp.. ±10 ms
Operating time non-directional <+35ms
directional <+35ms
Starting from I higher than 1.1 x I>
Release time directional and
non-directional <+45ms
t-char ±5% IEC NINV, IEC VINV, IEC LINV, IEC EINV, ANSI
MINV, ANSI ANSI VINV, ANSI EINV, Therm Flat, IT,
I2T, I4T
t-reset ±1% resp. ±10 ms

Only available if: Characteristic = INV

Page 502 EN MRA4 04/09

Tolerances

Earth current stages: IG[x] Tolerance

IG MTA ±3° approx close to the star point treatment.
Star point treatment ±5° at IG *
sin phi >20%
sin (-90°) In and VE>
10 V
Star point treatment ±5° at IG *
cos phi >20%
cos (180°) In and VE>
10 V
Star point treatment ±5° of the setting value
at IE>1.0*In
SOLI-RESI and VE>
5% Vn
IG> ±1,5% of the setting value
resp. 1% In
resetting ratio 97% or 0.5% x In
VE> ±1,5% of the setting value
resp. 1% In
resetting ratio 97% or 0.5% x In
t DEFT
±1% resp.
±10 ms
Operating time non-directional <+35 ms
directional <+40ms
Starting from IG higher than 1.1 x IG>
Release time directional and
non-directional <+45ms
t-char ±5% IEC NINV, IEC VINV, IEC LINV, IEC EINV, ANSI
MINV, ANSI ANSI VINV, ANSI EINV, Therm Flat, IT,
I2T, I4T
t-reset ±1% resp.
±10 ms
Only available if: Characteristic = INV

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 503

Tolerances

Thermal Replica: ThR Tolerance

Ib ±2% of the setting value
resp. 1% In
K
Alarm ThR ±1.5 % of the setting value

Unbalanced load :I2>[x] Tolerance

I2> ±2% of the setting value resp.1% In

resetting ratio 97% or 0.5% x In

t DEFT
±1% resp.
Tripping delay time (DEFT) ±10 ms
Operating time <+60ms
Release time <+40ms
k ±5% INV
τ-cool ±5% INV

Page 504 EN MRA4 04/09

Tolerances

Inrush Supervision IH2 Tolerance

IH2/In ±1% In
resetting ratio 1% x In
or 5% x IH2
Inrush supervision is possible, if 1st Harmonic > 0.1xIn and 2nd Harmonic > 0.01xIn.

Voltage Protection V>[x] Tolerance

V> ±1.5% of the setting value resp.1% Vn
resetting ratio 97% or 0.5% x Vn
t ±1% resp.
±10 ms
Operating time <+40ms

Starting from U higher than 1.3 x U>

Release time <+40ms

Voltage Protection V<[x] Tolerance

V< ±1.5% of the setting value resp.1% Vn
resetting ratio 103% or 0.5% x Vn
t ±1% resp.
±10 ms
Operating time <+40ms

Starting from V lower than 0.7 x V<

Release time <+40ms

Voltage Protection V(t)<[x] Tolerance

V(t)< ±1.5% of the setting value resp.1% Vn
resetting ratio 103% or 0.5% x Vn
t ±1% resp.
±10 ms
Operating time <+40ms

Starting from V lower than 0.7 x V<

Release time <+40ms

Residual Voltage Protection VE[x] Tolerance

VE> ±1.5% of the setting value resp.1% Vn
resetting ratio 97% or 0.5% x Vn
t ±1% resp.
±10 ms
Operating time <+40ms

Starting from VE higher than 1.3 x VE>

Release time <+40ms

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 505

Tolerances

Frequency Protection f>[x] Tolerance

f> 10 mHz at fn
resetting ratio 99.95%
or 0.05% fn
t ±1% resp.
±10 ms
Operating time 40-50Hz <+60ms
50-70Hz <+50ms
Starting from f higher than f>+0.02 Hz
Release time 40-50Hz <+85ms
50-70Hz <+75ms
Frequency Protection f<[x] Tolerance
f< 10 mHz at fn
t ±1% resp.
±10 ms
resetting ratio 100.05% or 0.05% fn
Operating time 40-50Hz <+60ms
50-70Hz <+50ms
Starting from f lower than f<-0.02 Hz
Release time 40-50Hz <+85ms
50-70Hz <+75ms
V Block f ±1.5% of the setting value resp. 1% Un
resetting ratio 103%
or 0.5% x Un

Rate of Change of Frequency df/dt Tolerance

df/dt 100 mHz per Second
t ±1% bzw.
±10 ms
Kommandozeit/ <+40 ms
Anregezeit

Rückfallzeit <+40 ms

Vector surge delta phi Tolerance

delta phi ±0,5° [1-30°] at Vn and fn
Operating time <+40 ms

Circuit Breaker Failure Protection CBF Tolerance

I-CBF> ±1.5% of the setting value resp.1% In
resetting ratio
t-CBF ±1% resp.
±10 ms
Operating time <+40 ms

Starting from I higher than 1.3 x I-CBF>

Release time <+40 ms

Page 506 EN MRA4 04/09

Tolerances

Trip Circuit Supervision TCS Tolerance

t-TCS ±1% resp.
±10 ms

Current Transformer Supervision CTS Tolerance

ΔI ±2% of the setting value resp.1.5% In
resetting ratio 94%
t ±1% resp. ± 10 ms

Voltage Transformer Supervision VTS Tolerance

ΔV ±2% of the setting value resp.1.5% Vn
resetting ratio 94%
t ±1% resp. ± 10 ms

Asymmetry V012[x] Tolerance

V1> ±2% of the setting value resp.1,5% Vn
resetting ratio 97%
or 0.5% x Vn
V1< ±2% of the setting value resp.1,5% Vn
resetting ratio 103%
or 0.5% x Vn
V2> ±2% of the setting value resp.1,5% Vn
resetting ratio 97%
or 0.5% x Vn
t ±1% resp.
±10 ms
Operating time <+60ms
Release time <+40ms

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 507

Tolerances

Automatic Reclosing AR Tolerance

t-start ±1% resp.
±20 ms
t-DP1 .... t-DP6 ±1% resp.
±20 ms
t-DE1 .… t-DE6 ±1% resp.
±20 ms
t-Superv ±1% resp.
±20 ms
t-CB ON Cmd ±1% resp.
±20 ms
t-sync_AR ±1% resp.
±20 ms
1.n SA ... 6.t-SA ±1% resp.
±20 ms

Page 508 EN MRA4 04/09

Tolerances

PQS Tolerance at 0.8 Vn (Vn =100 V) symmetrically feeded

P>, Q> |PF|>0,5 ±3% of the setting value resp. 0.1% of Sn
resetting ratio 97% of setting values or 0.2 W
t ±1% of the setting value resp.10 ms
Operating time < 75 ms
resetting time < 75 ms

PQS Tolerance at 0.8 Vn (Vn =100 V) symmetrically feeded

P<, Q< |PF|>0,5 ±3% of the setting value resp. 0.1% of Sn
resetting ratio 103% of setting values or 0.2 W
t ±1% of the setting value resp.10 ms
Operating time < 75 ms
resetting time < 75 ms

PQS Tolerance at 0.8 Vn (Vn =100 V) symmetrically feeded

S> ±3% of the setting value resp. 0.1% of Sn
resetting ratio 97% of setting values or 0.2 W
t ±1% of the setting value resp.10 ms
Operating time < 75 ms
resetting time < 75 ms

PQS Tolerance at 0.8 Vn (Vn =100 V) symmetrically feeded

S< ±3% of the setting value resp. 0.1% of Sn
resetting ratio 103% of setting values or 0.2 W
t ±1% of the setting value resp.10 ms
Operating time < 75 ms
resetting time < 75 ms

PQS Tolerance at 0.8 Vn (Vn =100 V) symmetrically feeded

Pr |PF|>0,5 ±3% of the setting value resp. 0.1% of Sn
resetting ratio 97% of Setting values > 0.07 Sn
up to 58% of setting values < 0.07 Sn
t ±1% of the setting value resp.10 ms
Operating time < 75 ms
resetting time < 75 ms

PQS Tolerance at 0.8 Vn (Vn =100 V) symmetrically feeded

Qr |PF|>0,5 ±3% of the setting value resp. 0.1% of Sn
resetting ratio 97% of Setting values > 0.07 Sn
up to 58% of setting values < 0.07 Sn resp. |PF|>0,9
or reset at +1° at |PF|>0.99
t ±1% of the setting value resp.10 ms
Operating time < 75 ms
resetting time < 75 ms

EN MRA4 04/09 Page 509

Tolerances

We appreciate your comments about the content of our publications.

Please send comments to: [email protected]

Please include the manual number from the front cover of this publication.

Woodward SEG GmbH & Co. KG

Krefelder Weg 47 ⋅ D – 47906 Kempen (Germany)
Postfach 10 07 55 (P.O.Box) ⋅ D – 47884 Kempen (Germany)
Phone: +49 (0) 21 52 145 1

Internet
Homepage http://www.woodward-seg.com
Documentation http://doc.seg-pp.com

Sales
Phone: +49 (0) 21 52 145 635
Telefax: +49 (0) 21 52 145 354
e-mail: [email protected]

Service
Phone: +49 (0) 21 52 145 614 ⋅
Fax: +49 (0) 21 52 145 455
e-mail: [email protected]

Page 510 EN MRA4 04/09